Canon LBP632CDW Lbp633cdw Color Imageclass Wireless Laser User Manual

imageCLASS

LBP633Cdw / LBP632Cdw

User

's Guide

USRMA-6657-00 2022-01 en Copyright CANON INC. 2022

Contents

Setting Up

............................................................................................................................................................ 2

Main Functions ......................................................................................................................................................... 3

Preparations Required Before Use ............................................................................................................................. 4

Preventing Unauthorized Access ................................................................................................................................ 5

Setting Up Using the Setup Guide .............................................................................................................................. 7

Setting the Date/Time ............................................................................................................................................... 9

Setting Up the Network Environment ...................................................................................................................... 11

Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN ..................................................................................................................... 13

Connecting to a Wired LAN .................................................................................................................................. 14

Connecting to a Wireless LAN ............................................................................................................................... 15

Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode ....................................................................................... 17

Setting Up Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode ........................................................................................... 19

Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router ....................................................................................... 21

Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings ...................................................................................... 23

Checking the SSID and Network Key ............................................................................................................... 26

Setting IP Addresses ........................................................................................................................................... 27

Setting IPv4 Address ..................................................................................................................................... 28

Setting IPv6 Addresses .................................................................................................................................. 31

Viewing Network Settings .................................................................................................................................... 34

Conguring Settings for Communication with a Computer ...................................................................................... 36

Conguring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions ........................................................................................... 37

Conguring Printer Ports ............................................................................................................................... 40

Setting Up Print Server .................................................................................................................................. 43

Conguring the Machine for Your Network Environment ......................................................................................... 46

Conguring Ethernet Settings ........................................................................................................................ 47

Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit ...................................................................................................... 49

Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network .............................................................................................. 50

Conguring DNS .......................................................................................................................................... 51

Conguring SMB .......................................................................................................................................... 55

Conguring WINS ......................................................................................................................................... 57

Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP ......................................................................................... 59

Other Network Settings ................................................................................................................................. 63

Installing Drivers .................................................................................................................................................... 67

Basic Operations .......................................................................................................................................... 70

Parts and Their Functions ........................................................................................................................................ 73

Front Side .......................................................................................................................................................... 74

Back Side ........................................................................................................................................................... 76

Interior .............................................................................................................................................................. 77

Manual Feed Slot ................................................................................................................................................ 78

Paper Drawer ..................................................................................................................................................... 79

Operation Panel ................................................................................................................................................. 80

Turning ON the Machine ......................................................................................................................................... 82

Turning OFF the Machine .....................................................................................................................................

Turning OFF the Machine by Remote Operation ............................................................................................... 84

Powering OFF at a Fixed Time ......................................................................................................................... 85

Restarting the Machine ....................................................................................................................................... 87

Using the Operation Panel ....................................................................................................................................... 89

Basic Screens ..................................................................................................................................................... 90

Home Screen ............................................................................................................................................... 91

<Status Monitor> Screen ............................................................................................................................... 93

Message Display ........................................................................................................................................... 95

Basic Operation .................................................................................................................................................. 96

Entering Text ...................................................................................................................................................... 98

Logging in to the Machine ..................................................................................................................................... 101

Loading Paper ....................................................................................................................................................... 102

Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer .................................................................................................................... 104

Loading Paper in the Manual Feed Slot ................................................................................................................ 110

Loading Envelopes ............................................................................................................................................ 112

Loading Preprinted Paper .................................................................................................................................. 115

Specifying Paper Size and Type .......................................................................................................................... 117

Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer ....................................................................................... 118

Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Manual Feed Slot .................................................................................. 120

Registering Default Paper Settings for the Manual Feed Slot ............................................................................ 122

Registering a Custom Paper Size .................................................................................................................. 124

Limiting the Paper Sizes Displayed ................................................................................................................ 126

Automatically Selecting an Appropriate Paper Source for Each Function ............................................................ 127

Customizing the Display ........................................................................................................................................ 128

Customizing the Home Screen ........................................................................................................................... 129

Changing the Default Settings for Functions .......................................................................................................... 130

Setting Sounds ...................................................................................................................................................... 131

Entering Sleep Mode ............................................................................................................................................. 132

Using a USB Memory Device .................................................................................................................................. 134

Printing .............................................................................................................................................................. 137

Printing from a Computer ..................................................................................................................................... 138

Canceling Prints ............................................................................................................................................... 140

Checking the Printing Status and Log .................................................................................................................. 142

Various Printing Methods ...................................................................................................................................... 144

Printing a Document Secured by a PIN (Secure Print) ............................................................................................ 145

Printing via Secure Print .............................................................................................................................. 146

Printing from a USB Memory Device (Memory Media Print) .................................................................................... 149

Receiving I-Faxes for Printing ............................................................................................................................. 156

Linking with Mobile Devices ............................................................................................................ 160

Connecting with Mobile Devices ............................................................................................................................ 161

Connecting via a Wireless LAN Router (LAN Connection) ........................................................................................ 162

Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode) ............................................................................................................. 163

Utilizing the Machine through Applications

........................................................................................................... 166

Using AirPrint ....................................................................................................................................................... 169

Printing with AirPrint ........................................................................................................................................ 174

If AirPrint Cannot Be Used ................................................................................................................................. 177

Managing the Machine by the Remote Control ....................................................................................................... 178

Managing the Machine ........................................................................................................................ 180

Setting Access Privileges ....................................................................................................................................... 182

Setting the System Manager ID and PIN .............................................................................................................. 183

Setting the Department ID Management ............................................................................................................. 185

Setting a Remote UI PIN .................................................................................................................................... 191

Conguring the Network Security Settings ............................................................................................................ 193

Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls ..................................................................................................... 195

Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Settings .................................................................................................. 196

Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Settings .............................................................................................. 199

Changing Port Numbers .................................................................................................................................... 202

Setting a Proxy ................................................................................................................................................. 203

Conguring the Key and Certicate for TLS .......................................................................................................... 205

Generating the Key and Certicate for Network Communication ...................................................................... 209

Conguring the Expiration Check Method for Received Certicates .................................................................. 212

Generating a Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR) ................................................................................... 214

Registering the Key and Certicate for Network Communication ...................................................................... 217

Conguring IPSec Settings ................................................................................................................................. 219

Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings .................................................................................................. 226

Restricting the Machine's Functions ...................................................................................................................... 230

Restricting Printing from a Computer .................................................................................................................. 232

Restricting USB Functions .................................................................................................................................. 233

Disabling HTTP Communication ......................................................................................................................... 234

Disabling Remote UI ......................................................................................................................................... 235

Restricting Use of the Operation Panel ................................................................................................................ 236

Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI) ............................................................................................ 237

Starting Remote UI ........................................................................................................................................... 238

Checking the Status and Logs ............................................................................................................................ 242

Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI ........................................................................................................... 248

Security Policy .................................................................................................................................................. 251

Importing/Exporting the Setting Data ................................................................................................................. 256

Updating the Firmware ......................................................................................................................................... 259

Initializing Settings ............................................................................................................................................... 262

Setting Menu List ...................................................................................................................................... 265

<Preferences> ....................................................................................................................................................... 266

<Display Settings> ............................................................................................................................................ 267

<English Keyboard Layout> ................................................................................................................................ 271

<Timer/Energy Settings> ................................................................................................................................... 272

III

....................................................................................................................................................... 276

<External Interface> .......................................................................................................................................... 290

<Accessibility> .................................................................................................................................................. 291

<Volume Settings> ............................................................................................................................................ 293

<Adjustment/Maintenance> .................................................................................................................................. 295

<Adjust Image Quality> ..................................................................................................................................... 296

<Maintenance> ................................................................................................................................................ 305

<Function Settings> .............................................................................................................................................. 306

<Common> ...................................................................................................................................................... 307

<Printer> ......................................................................................................................................................... 310

<Receive> ........................................................................................................................................................ 354

<Access Files> .................................................................................................................................................. 356

<Secure Print> .................................................................................................................................................. 362

<Management Settings> ....................................................................................................................................... 363

<User Management> ........................................................................................................................................ 364

<Device Management> ...................................................................................................................................... 365

<Remote UI Settings/Update Firmware> .............................................................................................................. 368

<Data Management> ........................................................................................................................................ 370

<Security Settings> ........................................................................................................................................... 372

Maintenance ................................................................................................................................................. 375

Regular Cleaning .................................................................................................................................................. 377

Cleaning the Exterior ........................................................................................................................................ 378

Cleaning the Fixing Assembly ............................................................................................................................. 379

Cleaning the Transfer Belt (ITB) .......................................................................................................................... 380

Replacing the Toner Cartridge ............................................................................................................................... 381

Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables .................................................................................................. 388

Relocating the Machine ......................................................................................................................................... 389

Adjusting Image Quality ....................................................................................................................................... 391

Adjusting Gradation .......................................................................................................................................... 392

Correcting "Print Color Mismatch" ...................................................................................................................... 394

Adjusting Print Position ..................................................................................................................................... 395

Viewing the Counter Value .................................................................................................................................... 397

Printing Reports and Lists ..................................................................................................................................... 398

Consumables ........................................................................................................................................................ 401

Troubleshooting (FAQ) .......................................................................................................................... 404

Appendix ........................................................................................................................................................... 406

Third Party Software ............................................................................................................................................. 407

Feature Highlights ................................................................................................................................................ 408

Going Green and Saving Money ......................................................................................................................... 409

Improving Eciency ......................................................................................................................................... 410

So Much More .................................................................................................................................................. 411

Specications

....................................................................................................................................................... 413

Main Unit ........................................................................................................................................................ 414

Available Paper ................................................................................................................................................ 416

Printer Functions .............................................................................................................................................. 419

Management Functions ..................................................................................................................................... 422

System Environment ......................................................................................................................................... 424

Network Environment ....................................................................................................................................... 425

Manuals and Their Contents .................................................................................................................................. 426

Using User's Guide ................................................................................................................................................ 427

Screen Layout of User's Guide ............................................................................................................................ 428

Viewing User's Guide ........................................................................................................................................ 431

Basic Windows Operations .................................................................................................................................... 433

Menu Route Map ................................................................................................................................................... 440

Notice .................................................................................................................................................................. 441

Setting Up

Setting Up ...............................................................................................................................................................

Main Functions ...................................................................................................................................................... 3

Preparations Required Before Use ....................................................................................................................... 4

Preventing Unauthorized Access .......................................................................................................................... 5

Setting Up Using the Setup Guide ........................................................................................................................ 7

Setting the Date/Time ........................................................................................................................................... 9

Setting Up the Network Environment ............................................................................................................... 11

Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN .............................................................................................................. 13

Connecting to a Wired LAN ............................................................................................................................. 14

Connecting to a Wireless LAN ......................................................................................................................... 15

Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode ............................................................................. 17

Setting Up Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode .................................................................................. 19

Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router ............................................................................. 21

Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings ............................................................................ 23

Checking the SSID and Network Key ........................................................................................................ 26

Setting IP Addresses ....................................................................................................................................... 27

Setting IPv4 Address ................................................................................................................................ 28

Setting IPv6 Addresses ............................................................................................................................ 31

Viewing Network Settings ............................................................................................................................... 34

Conguring Settings for Communication with a Computer ............................................................................ 36

Conguring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions ................................................................................. 37

Conguring Printer Ports ......................................................................................................................... 40

Setting Up Print Server ............................................................................................................................ 43

Conguring the Machine for Your Network Environment ............................................................................... 46

Conguring Ethernet Settings ................................................................................................................. 47

Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit ............................................................................................. 49

Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network .................................................................................... 50

Conguring DNS ...................................................................................................................................... 51

Conguring SMB ...................................................................................................................................... 55

Conguring WINS .................................................................................................................................... 57

Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP ............................................................................... 59

Other Network Settings ........................................................................................................................... 63

Installing Drivers ................................................................................................................................................. 67

Setting Up

8054-006

Befor

e using the functions of the machine, the environmental conditions must be set in advance. To begin with, check

the sequences of ow required to complete the setup, and then perform the actual settings.

Preparations Required

Befor

e Use(P. 4)

● The functions installed on the machine vary depending on the model you pur

chased. Before using the

machine, see

Main Functions(P. 3) and check the available functions.

Conguring Initial Settings of the Machine (Setup Guide)

● Y

ou can easily congure the initial settings required to use the machine, such as date, time, and network

settings, by following the on-screen guidance.

Setting Up Using the Setup Guide(P. 7)

Setting Up

Main Functions

8054-007

This manual co

vers all the functions of the model series you purchased. Before getting started, check which functions

are available on the model you purchased.

: With function : Without function

Function LBP633Cdw LBP632Cdw

2-sided printing

Wired LAN connection

Wireless LAN connection

USB connection

Remote UI

Keys and Certicates

Linking with Mobile Devices

Display Black and white LCD Black and white LCD

Default System Manager ID Not specied Not specied

Default System Manager PIN Not specied Not specied

Department ID Management

Application Library

Toner Replenishment Service

● For the available driver types, see the User Softwar

e CD-ROM/DVD-ROM supplied with the machine, or see

the Canon website (https://global.canon/).

LINKS

Viewing User's Guide(P. 431)

Setting Up

Preparations Required Before Use

8054-008

Set up the machine follo

wing steps 1 to 3 in order. For more information about a particular step, click on the link to go

to the corresponding section. In addition, to use the machine safely, also check

Preventing Unauthorized

Access(P

. 5) .

Step 1 Setting Up Using the Setup Guide(P. 7)

Step 2 Setting Up the Network Environment(P. 11)

● Congur

e the network settings that are not covered in the Setup Guide. If you do not need

to use the Setup Guide, congure the network settings from here.

Step 3 Installing Drivers(P. 67)

Setting from the Remote UI

● When the network envir

onment settings are complete, you can eciently set the machine from a computer

using Remote UI.

Starting Remote UI(P. 238)

Importing data fr

om another machine to save time

● As long as the model is the same, you can save setting data registered on another Canon printer/

multifunction machine to a computer (export) and load the setting data to this machine (import).

Importing/Exporting the Setting Data(P. 256)

Setting Up

Preventing Unauthorized Access

8054-009

This section describes the security measur

es on how to prevent unauthorized access from the external network. This is

a must-read for all users and administrators before using this machine, other printers, and multifunction machines

connected to the network. In recent years, a printer/multifunction machine connected to the network can offer you a

variety of useful functions, such as printing from a computer, operating from a computer using the remote function,

and sending scanned documents via the Internet. On the other hand, it is essential to take security measures to

reduce the security risk for information leakage, as a printer/multifunction machine has become more exposed to

threats, such as unauthorized access and theft, when it is connected to the network. This section explains necessary

settings you need to specify to prevent unauthorized access before using a printer/multifunction machine connected

to the network.

Security Measures to Prevent Unauthorized Access from the External Network

Assigning a Private IP Address(P. 5)

Using Firewall to Restrict Transmission(P. 6)

Specifying the TLS Encrypted Communication (P. 6)

Setting PIN to Manage Information Stored in the Multifunction Machine(P. 6)

Assigning a Private IP Address

An IP address is a numerical label assigned to each device participating in a computer network. A "global IP address" is

used for the communication connecting to the Internet, and a "private IP address" is used for the communication

within a local area network, such as a LAN in the company. If a global IP address is assigned, your printer/

multifunction machine is open to the public and can be accessed via the Internet. Thus, the risk of information leakage

due to unauthorized access from external network increases. On the other hand, if a private IP address is assigned,

your printer/multifunction machine is closed to a local area network and can be accessed by only users on your local

area network, such as a LAN in the company.

Global IP Address

Can be accessed fr

om the external network

Private IP Address

Can be accessed from the users within a local area network

Basically, assign a private IP address to your printer/multifunction machine. Make sure to conrm the IP address,

assigned to the printer/multifunction machine you are using, is a private IP address or not. A private IP address is

found in one of the following ranges.

Ranges for Private IP addresses

● Fr

om 10.0.0.0 to 10.255.255.255

● From 172.16.0.0 to 172.31.255.255

● From 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.255

For information on how to conrm the IP address, see

Setting IPv4 Address(P. 28) .

● If a global IP addr

ess is assigned to a printer/multifunction machine, you can create a network environment

to reduce the risk of unauthorized access by installing security software, such as a rewall that prevents

Setting Up

access from the external networks. If you want to assign a global IP address to and use a printer/

multifunction machine, contact your network administr

ator.

Using Firewall to Restrict Transmission

A r

ewall is a system that prevents unauthorized access from the external networks and protects against attacks/

intrusions to a local area network. You can use a rewall on your network environment to block access from the

external network that appears to be dangerous, by restricting communication from specied IP address of the

external network. The function installed to a Canon printer/multifunction machine enables you to set up the IP

address lter. For information on how to set up an IP address lter, see

Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall

Settings(P

. 196) .

Specifying the TLS Encrypted Communication

For information on the TLS Encrypted Communication, see

Conguring the Network Security Settings

(P. 193) ,

and on the procedures to specify, see

Conguring the Ke

y and Certicate for TLS(P. 205) .

Setting PIN to Manage Information Stored in the Multifunction Machine

If a malicious thir

d party attempts to gain unauthorized access to a printer/multifunction machine, setting PIN to

information stored in the machine will reduce the risk of information leakage. Canon printers/multifunction machines

enable you to protect various type of information by setting PIN.

Setting PIN to Each Function

● Setting PIN for Using Remote UI

For mor

e information, see

Setting a Remote UI PIN(P. 191) .

● Setting PIN for the System Manager Settings

For mor

e information, see

Setting the System Manager ID and PIN(P. 183) .

Listed abo

ve are some examples of security measures for preventing unauthorized access. For more information on

the other security measures, see

Managing the Machine(P. 180) and tak

e necessary security measures for

preventing unauthorized access to suit your environment.

Setting Up

Setting Up Using the Setup Guide

8054-00A

1660-009

When the machine is turned on (

Turning ON the Machine(P. 82) ) for the rst time, the Setup Guide starts up to

assist you to congur

e the initial settings of the machine by following the on-screen guidance. In the Setup Guide, the

setting screens are displayed in the following order.

Step 1 Setting the Display Language and the Country or Region

Set the language to be displayed on the operation panel screen or in reports, as well as the

country or r

egion where the machine will be used.

Select a language.

Select a country or region.

Step 2 Setting the Date and Time

Adjust the machine's date/time.

Select a time zone.

What is UTC?

● Coor

dinated Universal Time (UTC) is the primary time standard by which the

world regulates clocks and time. The correct UTC time zone setting is required

for Internet communications.

Enter the date and time, and press

● Use or to move the cursor, and enter the date and time using the

numeric k

eys.

Step 3 Setting the Security

Specify the basic security settings to prevent unauthorized access to the machine.

Select <Yes> when using the Remote UI.

● If you select <No>, the Remote UI settings ar

e not congured, and the Setup

Guide proceeds to step 4.

Press

Select <Yes> when using General User mode.

● If you select <No>, PIN is not set, and the Setup Guide pr

oceeds to step 4.

● You can also set the access security measure of the Remote UI later.

Setting

a Remote UI PIN

(P. 191)

Enter a PIN, and press

Enter the same PIN, and press .

Step 4 Setting the Wireless LAN

Congure the settings to connect to the network using the wir

eless LAN.

Select <Yes>.

Setting Up

● If you select <No>, wir

eless LAN is not set, and the Setup Guide proceeds to

step 5

Select the network with a matching SSID.

Enter the password (network key) and select <Apply>.

Select <Yes>.

● For more information about the wireless LAN settings, see

Connecting to a

Wir

eless LAN(P. 15) .

Step 5 Conguring Settings for T

oner Replenishment Service

You can congur

e settings for toner replenishment service. Through toner replenishment

service, new toner cartridges are automatically delivered to you before your existing toner

cartridges are used up.

● Use of the toner r

eplenishment service requires prior registration with select retailers. This

service is only available in certain countries/regions and for certain models.

● This service can be set up through <Toner Delivery Set.> displayed on the Home screen.

Home Screen(P. 91)

Press .

● If you pess , the screen for conguring settings for toner replenishment

service is skipped.

Press .

● If connecting to the server fails, try conguring the settings again through

<Connect to Server/Verify Connection with Server> in <Toner Delivery

Settings>. Home Screen(P. 91)

➠ When the Setup Guide is complete, the Home scr

een appears.

Setting Up

Setting the Date/Time

8054-00C

Set the date and time for the machine. The date and time ar

e used as the reference for the functions specifying the

time, therefore, they need to be set accurately.

Setting the Time Zone(P. 9)

Setting the Current Date and Time(P. 9)

Setting the Daylight Saving Time(P. 10)

Setting the Time Zone

If the time zone setting is changed, the values set in <Current Date/Time Settings> are also changed accordingly.

Select <Menu> in the Home screen.

Home Screen(P. 91)

Select <Preferences> <Timer/Energy Settings> <Date/Time Settings> <Time

Zone>.

Select the time zone.

What is UTC?

● Coor

dinated Universal Time (UTC) is the primary time standard by which the world regulates clocks and

time. Time differences exist depending on the country or area where the machine is used. The correct UTC

time zone setting is required for Internet communications.

Setting the Current Date and Time

Select <Menu> in the Home screen.

Home Screen(P. 91)

Select <Preferences> <Timer/Energy Settings> <Current Date/Time Settings>.

Enter the date and time.

● Use or to move the cursor, and enter the date and time using the numeric keys.

Setting Up

Press

● Set <Time Zone> befor

e setting the current date and time. If the <Time Zone> setting is changed later, the

current date and time are also changed accordingly.

● The display format of the date and time can be changed, respectively.

<Date Format>(P. 273)

<Time Format>(P. 273)

Setting the Daylight Saving Time

If daylight saving time is enabled, specify the dates from which and to which daylight saving time is in effect.

Select <Menu> in the Home screen.

Home Screen(P. 91)

Select <Preferences> <Timer/Energy Settings> <Date/Time Settings> <Daylight

Saving Time Settings>.

Select <Off> or <On> in <Daylight Saving Time>.

● When you select <On>, select <Start Date> and <End Date>, and set the month and day for each item. T

o set

the day, specify "what day of which week."

Select <Apply>.

Setting Up

Setting Up the Network Environment

8054-00E

When connecting the machine to a wir

ed or wireless local area network (LAN), you need to set an IP address unique to

the selected network. Select "wired" or "wireless" depending on your communication environment and networking

devices. For specic IP address settings, contact your Internet service provider or Network Administrator.

● If the machine is connected to an unsecur

ed network, your personal information might be leaked to a third

party.

● The machine cannot connect to both wir

ed and wireless LANs at the same time.

● The machine does not come with a LAN cable or router. Have them ready as necessary.

● For more information about your networking devices, see the instruction manuals for the devices or contact

your manufacturer.

◼ Befor

e You Start

Follow these steps to connect the machine to a network.

Check your computer settings.

● Make sure that the computer is correctly connected to the network. For more

information, see the instruction manuals for the devices you are using, or contact the

device manufacturers.

● Make sure that the network settings have been completed on the computer. If the

network has not been set up properly, you will not be able to use the machine on the

network, even if you perform the rest of the procedure below.

● Depending on the network, you may need to change settings for the communication

method or the Ethernet type ( Conguring Ethernet Settings(P. 47) ). For more

information, contact your Internet service provider or Network Administrator.

● To check the MAC address of the machine.

Viewing the MAC Address for Wired LAN(P. 34)

Viewing the MAC Address and Information for Wireless LAN(P. 35)

Setting Up

● T

o connect to an IEEE 802.1X network, see

Conguring IEEE 802.1X

Authentication Settings

(P. 226) .

Select wired or wireless LAN.

Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN(P. 13)

Connect to a wired or wireless LAN.

● Pr

oceed to the section that corresponds to the setting you selected in step 2.

Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 14)

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 15)

Set the IP address as necessary.

● At the time of pur

chase, the machine is set to automatically acquire an IP address.

Change this setting if you want to use a specic IP address.

Setting IP

Addr

esses(P. 27)

Conrm that pr

oper connection is completed.

● Start the Remote UI from a computer (

Starting Remote UI(P. 238) ). If the Remote

UI scr

een is displayed, the connection is completed.

LINKS

Conguring Settings for Communication with a Computer(P. 36)

Conguring the Machine for Your Network Environment(P. 46)

Setting Up

Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN

8054-00F

After you decide on wir

ed or wireless LAN to connect the machine to the computer, select wired LAN or wireless LAN

using the operation panel. Note that if you change the setting from <Wired LAN> to <Wireless LAN> or vice versa, you

will need to uninstall the drivers installed on your computer and then reinstall them. For more information, see the

manuals for the relevant drivers on the online manual website.

Select <Menu> in the Home screen.

Home Screen(P. 91)

Select <Preferences> <Network>.

● If the login scr

een appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.

Logging in to the Machine(P. 101)

Select <Select Wired/Wireless LAN>.

Select <Wired LAN> or <Wireless LAN>.

LINKS

Setting Up the Network Environment(P. 11)

Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 14)

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 15)

Setting Up

Connecting to a Wired LAN

8054-00H

Connect the machine to a computer via a r

outer. Use a LAN cable to connect the machine to the router.

Connect a LAN cable.

● Connect the machine to a r

outer by using a LAN cable.

● Push the connector in until it clicks into place.

Wait for several minutes.

➠ The IP addr

ess is set automatically.

● Y

ou can set the IP address manually.

Setting IP Addresses(P. 27)

LINKS

Setting Up the Network Environment(P. 11)

Setting Up

Connecting to a Wireless LAN

8054-00J

Wir

eless routers (or access points) connect the machine to a computer via radio waves. If your wireless router is

equipped with Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS), conguring your network is automatic and easy. If your networking

devices do not support automatic conguration, or if you want to specify authentication and encryption settings in

detail, you need to manually set up the connection. Make sure that your computer is correctly connected to the

network.

Setting Up Connection Using WPS(P. 15)

Manually Setting Up Connection(P. 16)

Risk of information leak

● Use wir

eless LAN connection at your own discretion and at your own risk. If the machine is connected to an

unsecured network, your personal information might be leaked to a third party because radio waves used in

wireless communication can go anywhere nearby, even beyond walls.

Wireless LAN security

● The wireless LAN function of this machine supports WEP, WPA-PSK, and WPA2-PSK. For the wireless security

compatibility of your wireless router, see the instruction manuals for your networking devices or contact

your manufacturer.

Required devices for wireless LAN connection

● The machine does not come with a wir

eless router. Have the router ready as necessary.

Setting Up Connection Using WPS

When using WPS, two modes ar

e available: push button mode and PIN code mode.

◼ Push Button Mode

Find the WPS mark shown below on the package of your wireless router. Also make sure that there is a WPS button on

your networking device.

Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode(P. 17)

Setting Up

◼ PIN Code Mode

Some WPS r

outers do not support the push button mode. If WPS PIN code mode is mentioned on the package or in

the instruction manuals of your networking device, set up the connection by entering the PIN code.

Setting Up

Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode(P

. 19)

● If the wir

eless router is set to use WEP authentication, you may not be able to set up connection using WPS.

Manually Setting Up Connection

When manually setting up a wir

eless connection, you can either select a wireless router or manually enter the required

information. Regardless of the method, make sure that you have the required setup information, including the SSID

and network key.

Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 26)

◼ Selecting a Wir

eless Router

Select this setup option if you need to manually set up the connection but want to complete the setup as easily as

possible.

Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 21)

◼ Manually Entering the Setup Information

If you want to specify security settings in detail, such as authentication and encryption settings, manually enter the

SSID and network k

ey to set up the connection.

Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 23)

LINKS

Setting Up the Network Environment(P. 11)

Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN(P. 13)

Setting Up

Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode

8054-00K

1660-00J

If your wir

eless router supports WPS push button mode, you can easily set up a connection with a WPS button.

● Ho

w to operate the wireless router may vary on each device. See the instruction manuals for your

networking device for help.

Select <Wireless LAN Set.> in the Home screen.

Home Screen(P. 91)

● When a message appears on the display of the machine, select <Y

es>.

● If a message is displayed telling that no access point can be found, select <Close>.

Select <Other Connections>.

Select <WPS Push Button Mode>.

Press and hold the WPS button on the wireless router.

● The button must be pr

essed within 2 minutes after selecting <WPS Push Button Mode> in step 3.

● Depending on the networking device, you may need to press and hold the button for 2 seconds or longer.

See the instruction manuals for your networking device for help.

If an error message is displayed during setup

● Select <Close> and r

eturn to step 2.

Wait until message <Connected.> is displayed.

Select <Close>.

➠ W

ait several minutes until the IP address and other items are set automatically.

Setting Up

Signal strength

● When

more than one wireless router is available for connection, the machine connects to the device

with the strongest signal. Signal strength is measured using RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication).

● Y

ou can set the IP address manually.

Setting IP Addresses(P. 27)

● While

the machine is connected to the wireless LAN, the Wi-Fi icon is displayed in the Home screen or

the Basic Features screen of each function.

Home Screen(P. 91)

Reducing power consumption

● Y

ou can set the machine to enter <Power Save Mode> based on signals emitted from the wireless router.

<Power Save Mode>(P. 277)

If the IP addr

ess of the machine has changed

● In a DHCP environment, the IP address of the machine may be changed automatically. If this happens, the

connection is maintained as long as the machine and the computer belong to the same subnet.

LINKS

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 15)

Setting Up

Setting Up Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode

8054-00L

If your wir

eless router supports WPS PIN code mode, generate a PIN code with the machine and register the code to

the networking device.

● Ho

w to operate the wireless router may vary on each device. See the instruction manuals for your

networking device for help.

From a Computer

Access your wireless router from a computer and display the screen for entering a

WPS PIN code.

● For mor

e information, see the instruction manuals for your networking device.

From the Operation Panel

Select <Wireless LAN Set.> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 91)

● When a message appears on the display of the machine, select <Y

es>.

● If a message is displayed telling that no access point can be found, select <Close>.

Select <Other Connections>.

Select <WPS PIN Code Mode>.

➠ The PIN code is gener

ated and shown on the display.

From a Computer

● Register the PIN code on the setup scr

een displayed in step 1.

● The PIN code must be registered within 10 minutes after selecting <WPS PIN Code Mode> in step 4.

If an error message is displayed during setup

● Select <Close> and r

eturn to step 3.

Setting Up

From the Operation Panel

Wait until the message <Connected.> is displayed.

Select <Close>.

➠ W

ait several minutes until the IP address and other items are set automatically.

Signal strength

● When

more than one wireless router is available for connection, the machine connects to the device

with the strongest signal. Signal strength is measured using RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication).

● Y

ou can set the IP address manually.

Setting IP Addresses(P. 27)

● While

the machine is connected to the wireless LAN, the Wi-Fi icon is displayed in the Home screen or

the Basic Features screen of each function.

Home Screen(P. 91)

Reducing power consumption

● Y

ou can set the machine to enter <Power Save Mode> based on signals emitted from the wireless router.

<Power Save Mode>(P. 277)

If the IP addr

ess of the machine has changed

● In a DHCP environment, the IP address of the machine may be changed automatically. If this happens, the

connection is maintained as long as the machine and the computer belong to the same subnet.

LINKS

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 15)

Setting Up

Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router

8054-00R

ou can search the wireless routers (or access points) available for connection and select one from the display of the

machine. For the network key, enter a WEP key or PSK. Before selecting a wireless router, check and write down the

required setup information, including the SSID and network key (

Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 26) ).

Security settings

● If the wir

eless connection is set up by selecting a wireless router, the WEP authentication method is set to

<Open System> or the WPA/WPA2 encryption method is set to <Auto> (AES-CCMP or TKIP). If you want to

select <Shared Key> for WEP authentication or <AES-CCMP> for WPA/WPA2 encryption, you need to set up

the connection using <Manually Enter Network Name>.

Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed

Settings(P

. 23)

Select <Wireless LAN Set.> in the Home screen.

Home Screen(P. 91)

● When a message appears on the display of the machine, select <Y

es>.

➠ The machine starts searching for available wireless routers.

● If

a message is displayed telling that no access point can be found, check the network settings. For more

information, see "Troubleshooting (FAQ)" on the online manual website.

Select a wireless LAN router.

● Select the r

outer whose SSID matches the one that you have written down.

If your wireless router is not found

● Check

whether the machine is properly installed and ready to connect to the network. For more

information, see "Troubleshooting (FAQ)" on the online manual website.

Enter the network key that you have written down.

● Enter the network k

ey, and select <Apply>.

● On how to enter text, see

Entering Text(P. 98) .

If an error message is displayed during setup

● Select <Close>, check whether the network k

ey is correct, and return to step 2.

Setting Up

Select <Yes>.

Wait until message <Connected.> is displayed.

Select <Close>.

➠ W

ait several minutes until the IP address and other items are set automatically.

Signal strength

● When

more than one wireless router is available for connection, the machine connects to the device

with the strongest signal. Signal strength is measured using RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication).

● Y

ou can set the IP address manually.

Setting IP Addresses(P. 27)

● While

the machine is connected to the wireless LAN, the Wi-Fi icon is displayed in the Home screen or

the Basic Features screen of each function.

Home Screen(P. 91)

Reducing power consumption

● Y

ou can set the machine to enter <Power Save Mode> based on signals emitted from the wireless router.

<Power Save Mode>(P. 277)

If the IP addr

ess of the machine has changed

● In a DHCP environment, the IP address of the machine may be changed automatically. If this happens, the

connection is maintained as long as the machine and the computer belong to the same subnet.

LINKS

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 15)

Setting Up

Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings

8054-00S

If you want to specify the security settings in detail or cannot establish the wir

eless connection using the other

procedures, manually enter all the required information for the wireless LAN connection. Before specifying detailed

settings, check and write down the required information, including the SSID, network key, and wireless security

protocols.

Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 26)

Select <Wireless LAN Set.> in the Home screen.

Home Screen(P. 91)

● When a message appears on the display of the machine, select <Y

es>.

● If a message is displayed telling that no access point can be found, select <Close>.

Select <Other Connections>.

Select <Manually Enter Network Name>.

Enter the network name that you have written down, and select <Apply>.

● On ho

w to enter text, see

Entering Text(P. 98) .

Specify the security settings based on the information that you have written down.

● If you do not need to specify the security settings, select <None>.

Using WEP

Select <WEP>.

Select an authentication method.

Sets open system authentication, which is also called "

open authentication."

Uses the WEP key as a password.

Setting Up

When <Open System> is selected

● When connecting to a wir

eless LAN, the machine experiences an authentication error if the shared key

authentication is set on the wireless router. If this happens, the machine automatically changes the

setting to <Shared Key> and retries the connection.

Select the WEP key you want to edit.

● Select <Edit WEP Key>

WEP key (1 to 4).

● Up to four WEP k

eys can be registered.

Enter the network key that you have written down.

● Enter the network key, and select <Apply>.

Select the desired WEP key.

● Select <Select WEP Key>

the WEP key you have edited.

Using WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK

Select <WPA/WPA2-PSK>.

Select an encryption method.

<Auto>

Sets the machine to automatically select AES-C

CMP or TKIP to match the setting of the wireless router.

<AES-CCMP>

Sets AES-CCMP as the encryption method.

Enter the network key that you have written down.

● Enter the network key, and select <Apply>.

Select <Yes>.

Wait until message <Connected.> is displayed.

Select <Close>.

➠ W

ait several minutes until the IP address and other items are set automatically.

Signal strength

● When

more than one wireless router is available for connection, the machine connects to the device

with the strongest signal. Signal strength is measured using RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication).

Setting Up

● Y

ou can set the IP address manually.

Setting IP Addresses(P. 27)

● While

the machine is connected to the wireless LAN, the Wi-Fi icon is displayed in the Home screen or

the Basic Features screen of each function.

Home Screen(P. 91)

Reducing power consumption

● Y

ou can set the machine to enter <Power Save Mode> based on signals emitted from the wireless router.

<Power Save Mode>(P. 277)

If the IP addr

ess of the machine has changed

● In a DHCP environment, the IP address of the machine may be changed automatically. If this happens, the

connection is maintained as long as the machine and the computer belong to the same subnet.

LINKS

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 15)

Setting Up

Checking the SSID and Network Key

8054-00U

When manually setting up a wir

eless connection, you need to specify the SSID and network key of your wireless router.

The SSID and network key may be indicated on these networking devices. Check your devices and write down the

necessary information before setting up the connection. For more information, see the instruction manuals for your

networking devices or contact your manufacturer.

SSID A name given for identifying a specic wir

eless LAN. Some other terms used for SSID include

"access point name" and "network name."

Network Key A keyword or password used for encrypting data or authenticating a network. Some other

terms used for network key include "encryption key," "WEP key," "WPA/WPA2 passphrase,"

and "preshared key (PSK)."

Wireless Security Protocols

(Authentication/Encryption)

When manually setting up a wireless connection by specifying detailed settings, you need to

specify security settings. Check the following information:

● Security types (WEP/WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK)

● Authentication method (Open System/Shared Key)

● Encryption method (TKIP/AES-CCMP)

LINKS

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 15)

Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 21)

Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 23)

Setting Up

Setting IP Addresses

8054-00W

Connecting the machine to a network r

equires a unique network IP address. Two versions of IP addresses are

available: IPv4 and IPv6. Congure these settings depending on the network environment. To use IPv6 addresses, you

need to properly congure the IPv4 address settings.

Setting IPv4 Address(P. 28)

Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 31)

Setting Up

Setting IPv4 Address

8054-00X

1660-00W

The machine's IPv4 address can be either assigned automatically by a dynamic IP

addr

essing protocol, such as DHCP, or entered manually. When connecting the

machine to a wired LAN, make sure that the connectors of the LAN cable are rmly

inserted into the ports (

Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 14) ). Y

ou can test the

network connection if necessary.

Setting IPv4 Address(P. 28)

Testing the Network Connection(P. 29)

Setting IPv4 Address

Select <Menu> in the Home screen.

Home Screen(P. 91)

Select <Preferences> <Network>.

● If the login scr

een appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.

Logging in to the Machine(P. 101)

Select <TCP/IP Settings> <IPv4 Settings> <IP Address Settings>.

Congure IP addr

ess settings.

Select to automatically assign an IP addr

ess via DHCP protocol. When <On> is displayed, automatic

addressing is enabled.

Select to congure the IP address settings by manually entering an IP address. In order to select this option,

the automatic acquirement must be set to <Off>.

Select when you want to view the current IP address settings.

Automatically assigning an IP address

Select <Auto Acquire>.

Select the protocol.

● Select <Select Pr

otocol>

<DHCP>.

Setting Up

If you do not want to use DHCP/BOOTP/RARP to assign an IP address

● Select <Off>. If you select <DHCP> when these services ar

e unavailable, the machine will waste time

and communications resources searching the network for these services.

Check that <Auto IP> is set to <On>.

● If <Off> is selected, change the setting to <On>.

Select <Apply>.

● IP addr

esses assigned via DHCP override the address obtained via Auto IP.

Manually entering an IP address

Congure a setting to disable auto-acquisition.

● Select <Auto Acquir

e>, and set both <Select Protocol> and <Auto IP> to <Off>.

Select <Manually Acquire>.

Specify the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address (or default gateway).

● Enter these values in each screen using the numeric keys, and press

Restart the machine.

Restarting the Machine(P. 87)

Checking whether the settings are correct

● Make sure that the Remote UI screen can be displayed with your computer ( Starting Remote

UI(P

. 238) ). If a computer is not available, you can check the connection by using the operation panel (

Testing the Network Connection(P. 29) ).

When you have changed the IP addr

ess after installing the printer driver

● You need to add a new port.

Conguring Printer Ports(P

. 40)

Testing the Network Connection

Select <Menu> in the Home screen.

Home Screen(P. 91)

Select <Preferences> <Network>.

● If the login scr

een appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.

Logging in to the Machine(P. 101)

Select <TCP/IP Settings>

<IPv4 Settings> <PING Command>.

Enter the IPv4 address of another device on the network, and press .

➠ If a pr

oper connection has been established, <Received response from the host.> is displayed.

Setting Up

LINKS

Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 31)

Viewing Network Settings(P. 34)

Conguring WINS

(P. 57)

Setting Up

Setting IPv6 Addresses

8054-00Y

The IPv6 addresses of the machine can be congur

ed via the Remote UI. Before

setting IPv6 addresses, check the IPv4 address settings (

Viewing IPv4

Settings(P

. 34) ). You need to set the correct IPv4 settings to use IPv6 addresses.

The machine can use the following multiple IPv6 addresses:

Type Description

Link-local address An address that is only valid within a subnet or link and cannot be used to communicate with

vices beyond a router. A link-local address is automatically set when the IPv6 function of the

machine is enabled.

Manual address An address that is entered manually. When using this address, specify the prex length and default

router address.

Stateless address An address that is generated automatically using the MAC address of the machine and the network

prex that is advertised by the router. Stateless addresses are discarded when the machine is

restarted (or turned ON).

Stateful address An address obtained from a DHCP server using DHCPv6.

● For mor

e information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the

Remote UI, see

Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 248) .

Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.

Starting Remote

UI(P

. 238)

Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.

Remote UI Screen(P. 239)

Select [Network Settings] [IPv6 Settings].

Click [Edit].

Select the [Use IPv6] check box and congur

e the required settings.

Setting Up

[Use IPv6]

Select the check bo

x to enable IPv6 on the machine. When not using IPv6, clear the check box.

[Stateless Address 1]

Select the check box when using a stateless address. When not using a stateless address, clear the check box.

[Use Manual Address]

When you want to manually enter an IPv6 address, select the check box and enter the IP address, prex

length, and default router address in the corresponding text boxes.

[IP Address]

Enter an IPv6 address. Addresses that start with "ff" (or multicast address) cannot be entered.

[Prex Length]

Enter a number that indicates how many bits are available for the network address.

[Default Router Address]

Specify the IPv6 address of the default router as necessary. Addresses that start with "ff" (or multicast

address) cannot be entered.

[Use DHCPv6]

Select the check box when using a stateful address. When not using DHCPv6, clear the check box.

Click [OK].

Restart the machine.

Restarting the Machine(P. 87)

Checking whether the settings are correct

● Mak

e sure that the Remote UI screen can be displayed with your computer by using the IPv6 address of the

machine.

Starting Remote UI(P. 238)

Setting Up

Selecting settings from the operation panel

● IPv6 settings can also be accessed fr

om <Menu> in the Home screen.

<IPv6 Settings>(P. 281)

When you have changed the IP addr

ess after installing the printer driver

● You need to add a new port.

Conguring Printer Ports(P

. 40)

LINKS

Setting IPv4 Address(P. 28)

Viewing Network Settings(P. 34)

Setting Up

Viewing Network Settings

8054-010

Viewing IPv4 Settings(P. 34)

Viewing IPv6 Settings(P. 34)

Viewing the MAC Address for Wired LAN(P. 34)

Viewing the MAC Address and Information for Wireless LAN(P. 35)

● The IP addr

ess is not correctly congured if it is displayed as "0.0.0.0".

● Connecting the machine to a switching hub or bridge may result in a connection failure even when the IP

address is correctly congured. This problem can be solved by setting a certain interval before the machine

starts communicating.

Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network(P. 50)

● Y

ou can print a list of the current network settings.

User Data List/System Manager Data List(P. 398)

Viewing IPv4 Settings

<Network Information> <IPv4> Select the setting to view Check the settings

Viewing IPv6 Settings

<Network Information> <IPv6> Select the setting to view Check the settings

Viewing the MAC Address for Wired LAN

Select <Menu> in the Home screen.

Home Screen(P. 91)

Select <Preferences> <Network>.

● If the login scr

een appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.

Logging in to the Machine(P. 101)

Select <Ethernet Driver Settings>.

➠ The MA

C address is displayed.

Setting Up

Viewing the MAC Address and Information for Wireless LAN

Select <Wireless LAN Set.> in the Home screen.

Home Screen(P. 91)

● When a message appears on the display of the machine, select <Y

es>.

● If a message is displayed telling that no access point can be found, select <Close>.

Select <Connection Settings>.

Select <Connection Information>.

Select the setting to view.

Viewing security information

● T

o view WEP and WPA/WPA2-PSK information, use the following procedure.

Select the displayed security protocol Select the setting to view

Vie

wing from the <Status Monitor> screen

● <Wireless LAN Status> and <Latest Error Information> can be viewed from

<Network Information> <Network Connection Method> <Connection Information> Select the

setting to vie

LINKS

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 15)

Setting IPv4 Address(P. 28)

Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 31)

Conguring DNS(P

. 51)

Setting Up

Conguring Settings for Communication with a

Computer

8054-011

Specify the pr

otocol and port when operating the machine from a computer via the network. Before conguring the

machine for printing from a computer, perform the basic setup procedures. For more information, see the manuals

for the relevant drivers on the online manual website.

Conguring Printing Pr

otocols and WSD Functions(P. 37)

Conguring Printer Ports(P

. 40)

Setting Up Print Server(P. 43)

● Pr

otocols explained here are rules for delivering document data between a computer and the machine, and

can be selected according to intended purposes or the network environment.

● Ports are gateways for passing data between network devices. If a communication failure occurs in the

network connection, the port settings may be the cause of the problem.

Setting Up

Conguring Printing Pr

otocols and WSD Functions

8054-012

Congur

e the protocols that are used for printing documents from a networked computer.

● For mor

e information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the

Remote UI, see

Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 248) .

Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P

. 238)

Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.

Remote UI Screen(P. 239)

Click [Network Settings].

Congure printing pr

otocols.

Conguring LPD or RAW

Select [LPD Settings] or [RAW Settings]

[Edit].

Congure the settings as necessary

[Use LPD Printing]

Select the check bo

x to print via LPD. When not using LPD printing, clear the check box.

[Use RAW Printing]

Select the check box to print via RAW. When not using RAW printing, clear the check box.

[RX Timeout]

Set a value as the restart wait time for data reception. If data reception does not resume within the set

time, printing is canceled.

Click [OK].

Setting Up

Conguring WSD

Select [WSD Settings] [Edit].

Congure the settings as necessary

[Use WSD Printing]

Select the check bo

x to print via WSD. When not using WSD printing, clear the check box.

[Use WSD Browsing]

Select the check box to obtain information about the machine from a computer via WSD. This check box is

automatically selected when the [Use WSD Printing] check box is selected.

[Use Multicast Discovery]

Select the check box to set the machine to reply to multicast discovery messages. If the check box is

cleared, the machine stays in sleep mode even when multicast discovery messages are owing on the

network.

Click [OK].

Restart the machine.

Restarting the Machine(P. 87)

Selecting settings from the operation panel

● LPD

, RAW, and WSD settings can also be accessed from <Menu> in the Home screen.

<LPD Settings>(P. 283)

<RAW Settings>(P. 283)

<WSD Settings>(P. 283)

Setting up WSD network de

vices

● The WSD network devices can be added from the printer folder. Open the printer folder (

Displaying the

Printer Folder(P

. 433) )

click [Add a device] or [Add a printer] and follow the on-screen instructions. For

mor

e information about how to install the driver for the WSD network, see the manuals for the relevant

drivers on the online manual website.

To change the port number

● The same port number used for the machine and a computer must be used for printing protocol.

Conguring Printer Ports(P

. 40)

Changing Port Numbers(P. 202)

Setting Up

LINKS

Conguring Printer Ports(P

. 40)

Setting Up

Conguring Printer Ports

8054-013

Printing err

ors can occur when the IP address of the machine has been changed, or when a printer has been added via

the Windows printer folder. These errors are typically caused by incorrect printer port settings. For example, an

incorrect port number or port type may have been specied. In such situations, your attempt to print fails because the

document data cannot reach the machine. To x this type of problem, congure the printer port settings on the

computer.

● T

o perform the following procedure, log in to your computer with an administrator account.

Open the printer folder.

Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 433)

Right-click the driver icon for this machine, and click [Printer properties] or

[Pr

operties].

Click the [Ports] tab and congur

e the required settings.

Adding a port

If you have changed the IP addr

ess of the machine or you have selected an incorrect port while installing

drivers, add a new port.

Click [Add Port].

Select [Standard TCP/IP Port] in [Available port types] and click [New Port].

Click [Next].

Enter the IP address or the DNS name of the machine, and click [Next].

● The [Port Name] is enter

ed automatically. If necessary, you can change it.

Setting Up

● When the ne

xt screen is displayed, follow the instructions on the screen.

When you select the [De

vice Type], select [Canon Network Printing Device with P9100] under [Standard].

Click [Finish].

Click [Close].

Changing the port type or number

If the printing pr

otocol (LPD or RAW) has been changed on the machine side (

Conguring Printing

otocols and WSD Functions(P. 37) ) or the port number has been changed (

Changing Port

Numbers(P

. 202) ), the corresponding settings on the computer must also be congured. This operation is

not needed for WSD ports.

Click [Congur

e Port].

Under [Protocol], select [Raw] or [LPR].

● If you selected [Raw], change the [Port Number].

● If you selected [LPR], enter "lp" in [Queue Name].

Click [OK].

Deleting ports

Select the port you want to delete, and click [Delete Port].

Setting Up

● Y

ou cannot delete a port currently congured as the printer port. To delete this port, select a different

port and click [Apply] to congure it as the new printer port, and then delete the original port.

Click [OK].

Click [Close].

LINKS

Setting Up Print Server(P. 43)

Setting Up

Setting Up Print Server

8054-014

With a print server, you can r

educe the load on the computer that you print from. The print server also makes it

possible to install the drivers on each computer over the network, which saves you the trouble of installing the drivers

on each computer by using the provided CD-ROM/DVD-ROM. To set up a computer on the network as a print server,

congure the settings for sharing the printer.

● T

o perform the following procedure, log in to your computer with an administrator account.

● You may be unable to install drivers over the network depending on the operating system and the bit

architecture (32-bit or 64-bit) of the print server and client computers.

● When implementing a print server in a domain environment, consult your Network Administrator.

To carry out Department ID Management when using a print server

● "Canon Driver Information Assist Service

" must be added during the printer driver installation. For more

information, see the manuals for the relevant drivers on the online manual website.

Open the printer folder.

Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 433)

Right-click the printer driver icon for this machine and click [Printer properties] or

[Pr

operties].

Click the [Sharing] tab, select [Share this printer], and enter the share name of the

machine.

● Click the [Change Sharing Options] button if displayed.

Install additional drivers as necessary.

● This oper

ation is required if you want to install the drivers in other computers running a different bit

architecture via the print server.

Setting Up

Click [Additional Drivers].

Select the check box for the bit architecture that other computers are running, and click [OK].

● Select additional drivers fr

om the following, according to the operating system of the print server.

Print server Select the check box for

32-bit operating systems [x64]

64-bit operating systems [x86] under [Processor]

● If you do not kno

w whether your Windows operating system is a 32-bit or 64-bit version, see

Checking the Bit Architecture(P. 435) .

Insert the provided CD-ROM/DVD-ROM into the drive on the computer, click [Browse] to specify the folder

that contains the drivers, and then click [OK].

● If the print server runs a 32-bit oper

ating system, select [UFRII]

[us_eng] [x64] [Driver] folders

on the pr

ovided CD-ROM/DVD-ROM.

● If the print server runs a 64-bit operating system, select [UFRII]

[us_eng] [32BIT] [Driver]

folders on the pr

ovided CD-ROM/DVD-ROM.

Follow the on-screen instructions to install additional drivers.

Click [OK].

◼ Installing the Drivers on a Computer via the Print Server

Locate the shared printer in the print server.

Displaying Shared Printers in the

Print Server(P

. 434)

Double-click the shared printer.

Setting Up

Follow the on-screen instructions to install the drivers.

LINKS

Printing from a Computer(P. 138)

Setting Up

Conguring the Machine for Y

our Network

Environment

8054-015

The congur

ation of a network varies depending on the purpose of the network. The machine has been designed to

be compatible with as many network congurations as possible, and it is equipped with a variety of technologies.

Consult your Network Administrator and set a conguration to suit your network environment.

Conguring Ethernet Settings(P

. 47)

Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit(P. 49)

Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network(P. 50)

Conguring DNS(P

. 51)

Conguring SMB

(P. 55)

Conguring WINS

(P. 57)

Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP(P. 59)

Other Network Settings(P. 63)

Setting Up

Conguring Ethernet Settings

8054-016

Ethernet is a standard for communicating data in a local area network (LAN). You can set

the communication mode and the Ethernet type. In gener

al, the machine can be used

without changing the defaults (

<Ethernet Driver Settings>(P. 287) ), but you can

change these settings to suit your network envir

onment.

Select <Menu> in the Home screen.

Home Screen(P. 91)

Select <Preferences>

<Network>.

● If the login scr

een appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.

Logging in to the Machine(P. 101)

Select <Ethernet Driver Settings>.

Select whether to congur

e Ethernet settings automatically or manually.

● If auto-detection is enabled, the machine detects and automatically sets the Ethernet communication mode

and the type that can be used.

Conguring Ethernet settings automatically

Select <Auto Detect> <On>.

Conguring Ethernet settings manually

Select <Auto Detect>

<Off>.

<Communication Mode> select the communication mode.

Alternately sends and r

eceives communication data. Select when the machine is connected to a

networking device using half duplex.

Simultaneously sends and receives communication data. Use this setting for most environments.

select the Ethernet type.

Setting Up

Select <Apply>.

Restart the machine.

Restarting the Machine(P. 87)

LINKS

Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit(P. 49)

Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network(P. 50)

Setting Up

Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit

8054-017

In most Ethernet networks, the maximum size of a pack

et that can be sent is 1500 bytes. A packet refers to a chunk of

data into which the original data is divided before being sent. The maximum transmission unit (MTU) may vary on each

network. Change the settings of the machine as necessary. For more information, contact your Network Administrator.

Select <Menu> in the Home screen.

Home Screen(P. 91)

Select <Preferences> <Network>.

● If the login scr

een appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.

Logging in to the Machine(P. 101)

Select <TCP/IP Settings> <MTU Size>.

Select the MTU.

Restart the machine.

Restarting the Machine(P. 87)

LINKS

Conguring Ethernet Settings(P

. 47)

Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network(P. 50)

Setting Up

Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network

8054-018

When a network is designed to enjo

y redundant connectivity with multiple switching hubs or bridges, it must have a

mechanism to prevent packets from looping. One effective solution is to dene the role of each switch port. However,

communication may still be disrupted for several tens of seconds immediately after you change the way that network

devices are connected, or if you add a new device. If this type of problem occurs, set a wait time for connecting to the

network.

Select <Menu> in the Home screen.

Home Screen(P. 91)

Select <Preferences> <Network>.

● If the login scr

een appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.

Logging in to the Machine(P. 101)

Select <Waiting Time for Connection at Startup>.

Enter the waiting time required to start a communication with the network, and

ess

LINKS

Conguring Ethernet Settings(P

. 47)

Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit(P. 49)

Setting Up

Conguring DNS

8054-019

DNS (Domain Name System) pr

ovides a service for name resolution that associates a host (or domain) name with an IP

address. Congure the DNS, mDNS, or DHCP option settings as necessary. Note that the procedures for conguring

DNS are different for IPv4 and IPv6.

● For mor

e information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the

Remote UI, see

Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 248) .

Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P

. 238)

Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.

Remote UI Screen(P. 239)

Click [Network Settings].

Congure DNS settings.

Conguring IPv4 DNS

Select [IPv4 Settings]

[Edit].

Congure IPv4 DNS settings.

Setting Up

[DHCP Option Settings]

[Acquire Host Name]

Select the check box to enable Option 12 to obtain the host name from the DHCP server.

[DNS Dynamic Update]

Select the check box to enable Option 81 to dynamically update the DNS records through the DHCP

server.

[Acquire DNS Server Address]

Select the check box to enable Option 6 to obtain a DNS server address from the DHCP server.

[Acquire Domain Name]

Select the check box to enable Option 15 to obtain a domain name from the DHCP server.

[Acquire WINS Server Address]

Select the check box to enable Option 44 to obtain a WINS server address from the DHCP server.

[Acquire POP Server Address]

Select the check box to enable Option 70 to obtain a POP3 server address from the DHCP server.

[DNS Settings]

[Primary DNS Server Addr

ess]

Enter the IP address of a DNS server.

[Secondary DNS Server Address]

Enter the IP address of a secondary DNS server, if any.

[Host Name]

Enter alphanumeric characters for the host name of the machine that is to be registered to the DNS

server.

[Domain Name]

Enter alphanumeric characters for the name of the domain the machine belongs to, such as

"example.com."

[DNS Dynamic Update]

Select the check box to dynamically update the DNS records whenever the machine's IP address is

changed. When specifying the interval between updates, enter the time in hours in the [DNS

Dynamic Update Interval] text box.

[mDNS Settings]

[Use mDNS]

Setting Up

Adopted by Bonjour, mDNS (multicast DNS) is a protocol for associating a host name with an IP

addr

ess without using DNS. Select the check box to enable mDNS and enter the mDNS name in the

[mDNS Name] text box.

Click [OK].

Conguring IPv6 DNS

Select [IPv6 Settings] [Edit].

Congure IPv6 DNS settings.

● The [Use IPv6] check bo

x must be selected to congure the settings.

Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 31)

[DHCP Option Settings]

[Acquire DNS Server Address]

Select the check box to enable Option 23 to obtain a DNS server address from the DHCP server.

[Acquire Domain Name]

Select the check box to enable Option 24 to obtain a domain name from the DHCP server.

[DNS Settings]

[Primary DNS Server Addr

ess]

Enter the IP address of a DNS server. Addresses that start with "ff" (or multicast address) cannot be

entered.

[Secondary DNS Server Address]

Enter the IP address of a secondary DNS server, if any. Addresses that start with "ff" (or multicast

address) cannot be entered.

[Use Same Host Name/Domain Name as IPv4]

Select the check box to use the same host and domain names as in IPv4.

[Host Name]

Enter alphanumeric characters for the host name of the machine that is to be registered to the DNS

server.

[Domain Name]

Setting Up

Enter alphanumeric characters for the name of the domain the machine belongs to, such as

example.com."

[DNS Dynamic Update]

Select the check box to dynamically update the DNS records whenever the machine's IP address is

changed. To specify the type(s) of addresses you want to register to the DNS server, select the

check box for [Register Manual Address], [Register Stateful Address], or [Register Stateless

Address]. To specify the interval between updates, enter the time in hours in the [DNS Dynamic

Update Interval] text box.

[mDNS Settings]

[Use mDNS]

Adopted b

y Bonjour, mDNS (multicast DNS) is a protocol for associating a host name with an IP

address without using DNS. Select the check box to enable mDNS.

[Use Same mDNS Name as IPv4]

Select the check box to use the same mDNS name as in IPv4. To set a different name, clear the

check box and enter the mDNS name in the [mDNS Name] text box.

Click [OK].

Restart the machine.

Restarting the Machine(P. 87)

Selecting settings from the operation panel

● DNS settings can also be accessed from <Menu> in the Home screen.

<IPv4 Settings>(P. 279)

<IPv6 Settings>(P. 281)

LINKS

Setting IPv4 Address(P. 28)

Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 31)

Viewing Network Settings(P. 34)

Setting Up

Conguring SMB

8054-01A

Server Message Block (SMB) is a protocol for sharing resources, such as les and

printers, among multiple de

vices on a network. You need to use it to congure the

machine as a shared printer on an SMB network. Depending on your network, you may

have to set the computer name and workgroup name.

● For mor

e information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the

Remote UI, see

Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 248) .

Conguring the Computer Name and W

orkgroup Name

Specify the name of the machine on the network and the name of the workgroup it belongs to. If your environment

does not have workgroups, create a workgroup in Windows and enter the name of that workgroup.

Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.

Starting Remote

UI(P

. 238)

Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.

Remote UI Screen(P. 239)

Select [Network Settings] [Computer Name/Workgroup Name Settings].

Click [Edit].

Specify the required settings.

[Computer Name]

Enter alphanumeric char

acters for the name of the machine on the network.

Setting Up

[Workgroup Name]

orkgroup name is a name for grouping multiple computers so that basic network functions, such as le

sharing, become available in a Windows network. Enter alphanumeric characters for the name of the

workgroup that the machine belongs to.

[Use NetBIOS]

Select the check box when using NetBIOS.

● Computer

names or workgroup names that start with an asterisk (

) cannot be registered to a WINS

server.

Click [OK].

Restart the machine.

Restarting the Machine(P. 87)

LINKS

Conguring WINS

(P. 57)

Setting Up

Conguring WINS

8054-01C

Windo

ws Internet Name Service (WINS) is a name resolution service that associates a computer or printer name in an

SMB network with an IP address. To enable WINS, the WINS server must be specied.

● In or

der to specify WINS server settings, [Computer Name/Workgroup Name Settings] are required to be

set.

Conguring the Computer Name and W

orkgroup Name(P. 55)

● If you clear [Use NetBIOS] check box in [Computer Name/Workgroup Name Settings], the WINS setting is

disabled. Make sure to select [Use NetBIOS] check box when using WINS.

● The function is not available in an IPv6 network.

● For mor

e information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the

Remote UI, see

Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 248) .

Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.

Starting Remote

UI(P

. 238)

Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.

Remote UI Screen(P. 239)

Select [Network Settings] [WINS Settings].

Click [Edit].

Select the [WINS Resolution] check box, and specify the required settings.

[WINS Resolution]

Select the check bo

x to use WINS for name resolution. When not using WINS, clear the check box.

[WINS Server Address]

Setting Up

Enter the IP address of the WINS server.

● If

the IP address of the WINS server is obtained from a DHCP server, the obtained IP address overrides the

IP address entered in the [WINS Server Address] text box.

Click [OK].

Restart the machine.

Restarting the Machine(P. 87)

Selecting settings from the operation panel

● WINS settings can also be accessed fr

om <Menu> in the Home screen.

<WINS Settings>(P. 283)

LINKS

Setting IPv4 Address(P. 28)

Setting Up

Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP

8054-01E

Simple Network Management Pr

otocol (SNMP) is a protocol for monitoring and controlling communication devices in a

network by using Management Information Base (MIB). The machine supports SNMPv1 and security-enhanced

SNMPv3. You can check the status of the machine from a computer when you print documents or use the Remote UI.

You can enable either SNMPv1 or SNMPv3, or both at the same time. Specify the settings for each version to suit your

network environment and the purpose of use.

SNMPv1

SNMPv1 uses information called "community" to dene the scope of SNMP communication. Because this

information is e

xposed to the network in plain text, your network will be vulnerable to attacks. If you want to

ensure network security, disable SNMPv1 and use SNMPv3.

SNMPv3

With SNMPv3, you can implement network device management that is protected by robust security features.

Note that TLS must be enabled for the Remote UI befor

e conguring SNMPv3 (

Conguring the Ke

y and

Certicate for TLS(P. 205) ).

● The machine does not support the tr

ap notication feature of SNMP.

● To change the port number of SNMP, see

Changing Port Numbers(P. 202) .

● SNMP management softwar

e, when installed on a computer on the network, enables you to congure,

monitor, and control the machine remotely from the computer. For more information, see the instruction

manuals for your management software.

● For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the

Remote UI, see

Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 248) .

Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager mode.

Starting Remote

UI(P

. 238)

Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.

Remote UI Screen(P. 239)

Select [Network Settings] [SNMP Settings].

Click [Edit].

Setting Up

Specify SNMPv1 settings.

● If you do not need to change SNMPv1 settings, pr

oceed to the next step.

[Use SNMPv1]

Select the check bo

x to enable SNMPv1. You can specify the rest of SNMPv1 settings only when this check box

is selected.

[Use Community Name 1]/[Use Community Name 2]

Select the check box to specify a community name. If you do not need to specify a community name, clear

the check box.

[Community Name]

Enter alphanumeric characters for the name of the community.

[MIB Access Permission]

For each community, select [Read/Write] or [Read Only] for the access privileges to MIB objects.

[Read/Write] Permits both viewing and changing the values of MIB objects.

[Read Only] Permits only viewing the values of MIB objects.

[Use Dedicated Community]

Dedicated Community is a pr

eset community, intended exclusively for Administrators using Canon software,

such as imageWARE Enterprise Management Console. Select the check box to use Dedicated Community, and

specify [MIB Access Permission]. If you do not need to use Dedicated Community, clear the check box.

Specify SNMPv3 settings.

● If you do not need to change SNMPv3 settings, pr

oceed to the next step.

Setting Up

[Use SNMPv3]

Select the check bo

x to enable SNMPv3. You can specify the rest of SNMPv3 settings only when this check box

is selected.

[Enable User]

Select the check box to enable [User Settings 1]/[User Settings 2]/[User Settings 3]. To disable user settings,

clear the corresponding check box.

[User Name]

Enter alphanumeric characters for the user name.

[MIB Access Permission]

Select [Read/Write] or [Read Only] for the access privileges to MIB objects.

[Read/Write] Permits both viewing and changing the values of MIB objects.

[Read Only] Permits only viewing the values of MIB objects.

[Security Settings]

Select [Authentication On/Encryption On], [Authentication On/Encryption Off], or [Authentication Off/

Encryption Off] for the desir

ed combination of authentication and encryption settings.

[Authentication Algorithm]

If you have selected [Authentication On/Encryption On] or [Authentication On/Encryption Off] in [Security

Settings], select the appropriate authentication algorithm for your network environment.

[Encryption Algorithm]

If you have selected [Authentication On/Encryption On] in [Security Settings], select the appropriate

encryption algorithm for your network environment.

[Set/Change Password]

To set or change the password, select the check box and enter alphanumeric characters for the password in

the [Authentication Password] or [Encryption Password] text box. For conrmation, enter the same password

in the [Conrm] text box. Passwords can be set independently for authentication and encryption algorithms.

Specify Printer Management Information Acquisition Settings.

Setting Up

● With SNMP

, the printer management information, such as printing protocols and printer ports, can be

monitored and obtained regularly from a computer on the network.

[Acquire Printer Management Information from Host]

Select the check bo

x to enable monitoring of the printer management information of the machine via SNMP.

To disable monitoring of the printer management information, clear the check box.

Click [OK].

Restart the machine.

Restarting the Machine(P. 87)

Disabling SNMPv1

● If SNMPv1 is disabled, some of the functions of the machine become unavailable, such as obtaining machine

information via the printer driver.

Using the oper

ation panel

● You can enable or disable the SNMP settings from <Menu>.

<SNMP Settings>(P. 285)

Enabling Both SNMPv1 and SNMPv3

● If both versions of SNMP ar

e enabled, it is recommended that MIB access permission in SNMPv1 be set to

[Read Only]. MIB access permission can be set independently in SNMPv1 and SNMPv3 (and for each user in

SNMPv3). Selecting [Read/Write] (full access permission) in SNMPv1 negates the robust security features

that characterize SNMPv3 because most of the machine settings can then be controlled with SNMPv1.

LINKS

Conguring the Ke

y and Certicate for TLS(P. 205)

Setting Up

Other Network Settings

8054-01F

Congur

e the following items according to your network environment.

Conguring SNTP

(P. 63)

Monitoring the Machine from the Device Management Systems(P. 64)

Conguring SNTP

Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) enables you to adjust the system clock by using the time server on the network.

If SNTP is used, the time server is checked at the specied intervals; therefore, the correct time can always be

maintained. The time is adjusted based on Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), so specify the time zone setting before

conguring SNTP ( Setting the Date/Time(P. 9) ). SNTP settings can be specied via the Remote UI.

● The SNTP of the machine supports both NTP (version 3) and SNTP (versions 3 and 4) servers.

● For mor

e information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the

Remote UI, see

Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 248) .

Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P

. 238)

Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.

Remote UI Screen(P. 239)

Select [Network Settings] [SNTP Settings].

Click [Edit].

Select the [Use SNTP] check box and specify the required settings.

[Use SNTP]

Select the check bo

x to use SNTP for synchronization. If you do not want to use SNTP, clear the check box.

[NTP Server Name]

Setting Up

Enter the IP address of the NTP or the SNTP server. If DNS is available on the network, you can enter a host

name (or FQDN) consisting of alphanumeric char

acters instead (example: ntp.example.com).

[Polling Interval]

Specify the interval between one synchronization and the next.

Click [OK].

Restart the machine.

Restarting the Machine(P. 87)

Testing communication with the NTP/SNTP server

● Y

ou can view communication status with the registered server by clicking [Settings/Registration]

[Network

Settings] [Check NTP Server] in [SNTP Settings]. If a proper connection has been established, the result is

displayed as shown below. Note that this operation does not adjust the system clock.

Monitoring the Machine from the Device Management Systems

You can facilitate the collection and management of various information about networked devices by implementing

device management software, such as imageWARE Enterprise Management Console

, into the network. Information

such as device settings and error logs is retrieved and distributed via the server computer. If the machine is connected

to such a network, imageWARE Enterprise Management Console searches the network for the machine by using

protocols such as Service Location Protocol (SLP) to gather information from the machine, such as power supply status

information. SLP settings can be specied via the Remote UI. This section also describes the procedure to congure

settings for communication between the machine and plug-ins for imageWARE Enterprise Management Console.

For more information about imageWARE Enterprise Management Console, contact your dealer or service

representative.

To use imageWARE Enterprise Management Console plug-ins

● Y

ou need to enable the settings of the dedicated port and the SNMP settings. As for the SNMP settings, set

[MIB Access Permission] to [Read/Write] for both SNMPv1 and SNMPv3.

<Dedicated Port Settings>(P. 286)

Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP(P. 59)

Remote UI Oper

ations

● For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the

Remote UI, see

Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 248) .

Setting Up

◼ Conguring SLP Communication with De

vice Management Software

Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.

Starting Remote

UI(P

. 238)

Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.

Remote UI Screen(P. 239)

Click [Network Settings].

Specify SLP settings.

Specifying multicast device discovery

Select [Multicast Discovery Settings] [Edit].

Select the [Respond to Discovery] check box and specify the required settings.

[Respond to Discovery]

Select the check bo

x to set the machine to respond to device management software multicast discovery

packets and enable monitoring by device management software.

● T

o change the port number for multicast discovery, see

Changing Port Numbers(P. 202) .

[Scope Name]

o include the machine into a specic scope, enter alphanumeric characters for the scope name.

Click [OK].

Notifying a device management software of the power status of the machine

Select [Sleep Mode Notication Settings]

[Edit].

Select the [Notify] check box and specify the required settings.

Setting Up

[Notify]

Select the check bo

x to notify a device management software of the power status of the machine. When

[Notify] is selected, you can expect the machine to avoid unnecessary communication during sleep mode

and reduce the total power consumption.

[Port Number]

Change the port number for this function according to the network environment.

[Number of Routers to Traverse]

Specify how many routers the notication packets can pass through.

[Notication Interval]

Specify how often the machine noties a device management software of its power status.

Click [OK].

Restart the machine.

Restarting the Machine(P. 87)

◼ Conguring Settings for Communication between the Machine and Plug-ins

ou can specify the settings to enable communication between the machine and imageWARE Enterprise Management

Console plug-ins. Use of plug-ins allows you to manage the machine's settings from imageWARE Enterprise

Management Console.

Setting Up

Installing Drivers

8054-01H

Install the various drivers and associated softwar

e on your computer.

Make the necessary preparation before proceeding with the installation.

● Install the drivers and softwar

e to use from the included CD-ROM/DVD-ROM or by downloading them from

the Canon website for your country/region accessed via the URL indicated below.

https://global.canon/en/support/

● When

new versions of drivers and software become available, they will be uploaded to the Canon website.

You can download them as necessary after checking their system requirements.

● Depending on your machine or environmental conditions, some functions may not be available.

● Some of the drivers are not supported depending on the OS. For more information about the supported

status of the latest OS, see the Canon website.

Proceed with the installation.

● For mor

e information about the installation procedure, see the manuals for the drivers and software you are

going to use.

● Installation of drivers is impossible if sending and r

eceiving of the IP address are not permitted in [Firewall

Settings]. For more information, see

Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Settings(P. 196) .

● If sending and r

eceiving of the IP address of the computer on which drivers are installed become disabled by

[Firewall Settings], it is no longer possible to perform printing from that computer.

Setting Up

Basic Operations

Basic Operations ...............................................................................................................................................

Parts and Their Functions ................................................................................................................................... 73

Front Side ....................................................................................................................................................... 74

Back Side ........................................................................................................................................................ 76

Interior ........................................................................................................................................................... 77

Manual Feed Slot ............................................................................................................................................ 78

Paper Drawer ................................................................................................................................................. 79

Operation Panel .............................................................................................................................................. 80

Turning ON the Machine ..................................................................................................................................... 82

Turning OFF the Machine ............................................................................................................................... 83

Turning OFF the Machine by Remote Operation ...................................................................................... 84

Powering OFF at a Fixed Time .................................................................................................................. 85

Restarting the Machine .................................................................................................................................. 87

Using the Operation Panel .................................................................................................................................. 89

Basic Screens .................................................................................................................................................. 90

Home Screen ........................................................................................................................................... 91

<Status Monitor> Screen .......................................................................................................................... 93

Message Display ...................................................................................................................................... 95

Basic Operation .............................................................................................................................................. 96

Entering Text .................................................................................................................................................. 98

Logging in to the Machine ................................................................................................................................ 101

Loading Paper .................................................................................................................................................... 102

Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer .............................................................................................................. 104

Loading Paper in the Manual Feed Slot ........................................................................................................ 110

Loading Envelopes ....................................................................................................................................... 112

Loading Preprinted Paper ............................................................................................................................ 115

Specifying Paper Size and Type .................................................................................................................... 117

Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer ............................................................................. 118

Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Manual Feed Slot ........................................................................ 120

Registering Default Paper Settings for the Manual Feed Slot ................................................................. 122

Registering a Custom Paper Size ........................................................................................................... 124

Limiting the Paper Sizes Displayed ........................................................................................................ 126

Automatically Selecting an Appropriate Paper Source for Each Function ............................................... 127

Customizing the Display ................................................................................................................................... 128

Customizing the Home Screen ..................................................................................................................... 129

Basic Operations

Changing the Default Settings for Functions ..................................................................................................

130

Setting Sounds ................................................................................................................................................... 131

Entering Sleep Mode ......................................................................................................................................... 132

Using a USB Memory Device ............................................................................................................................. 134

Basic Operations

8054-01J

This chapter describes basic oper

ations, such as how to use the operation panel or how to load the paper, that are

frequently performed to use the functions of the machine.

◼ Parts and Their Functions

This section describes the exterior and interior parts of the machine and their functions, as well as how to use the keys

on the operation panel and how to view the display.

Parts and Their Functions(P. 73)

◼ T

urning ON the Machine

This section describes how to turn the machine ON and OFF.

Turning ON the Machine(P. 82)

◼ Using the Oper

ation Panel

This section describes how to use the display for tasks such as selecting items and adjusting settings. Also, it describes

how to enter characters and numbers.

Using the Operation Panel(P. 89)

◼ Logging in to the Machine

This section describes ho

w to log in when a login screen is displayed.

Logging in to the Machine(P. 101)

Basic Operations

◼ Loading Paper

This section describes ho

w to load the paper into the paper drawer and manual feed slot.

Loading Paper(P. 102)

◼ Customizing the Display

This section describes ho

w to rearrange the displayed items in order to make it easier to use screens shown in the

display.

Customizing the Display(P. 128)

◼ Changing the Default Settings for Functions

This section describes ho

w to change the setting that is displayed initially when a function is selected.

Changing the

Default Settings for Functions

(P. 130)

◼ Setting Sounds

This section describes ho

w to adjust the volume of various machine sounds, such as those produced when an error

occurs.

Setting Sounds(P. 131)

Basic Operations

◼ Entering Sleep Mode

This section describes ho

w to set the sleep mode.

Entering Sleep Mode(P. 132)

◼ Using a USB Memory De

vice

This section describes about the available USB memory devices and how to insert/remove the USB memory device.

Using a USB Memory Device(P. 134)

Basic Operations

Parts and Their Functions

8054-01K

This section describes the parts of the machine (e

xterior, front and back side, and interior) and how they function. In

addition to describing the parts of the machine used for such basic operations as loading paper and replacing the

toner cartridges, this section also describes the keys on the operation panel and display. Read this section for tips on

how to use the machine properly.

Front Side(P. 74)

Back Side(P. 76)

Interior(P. 77)

Manual Feed Slot(P. 78)

Paper Drawer(P. 79)

Operation Panel(P. 80)

Basic Operations

Front Side

8054-01L

Output tray

Printed paper is output to the output tr

ay.

USB port (for USB device connection)

Use this port to connect a thir

d-party USB memory device or USB keyboard. Connecting a USB memory

device allows you to print data from the memory device.

Printing from a USB Memory Device (Memory Media Print)(P. 149)

Paper stopper

Open the paper stopper when you want to prevent paper from falling out of the output tray.

Lift handles

Hold the lift handles when carrying the machine. Relocating the Machine(P. 389)

Power switch

urns the power ON or OFF. To restart the machine, turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and

turn it back ON.

Front cover

Open the front cover when replacing toner cartridges.

Procedure for Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 383)

Paper drawer

Load the type of paper you fr

equently use into the paper drawer.

Loading Paper in the Paper

awer(P. 104)

Manual feed slot

Load the paper into the manual feed slot when you want to tempor

arily use a type of paper different from

that which is loaded in the paper drawer.

Loading Paper in the Manual Feed Slot(P. 110)

Basic Operations

Operation panel

The oper

ation panel consists of keys such as Home key, Stop key, a display, and status indicators. You can

perform all the operations and specify settings from the operation panel.

Operation Panel(P. 80)

Basic Screens(P. 90)

Ventilation slots

Air fr

om inside the machine is vented out to cool down the inside of the machine. Note that placing objects in

front of the ventilation slots prevents ventilation.

Basic Operations

Back Side

8054-01R

Rear cover

Open the r

ear cover when clearing paper jams. For more information, see "Troubleshooting (FAQ)" on the

online manual website.

Rating label

The label sho

ws the serial number, which is needed when making inquiries about the machine. For more

information, see "Troubleshooting (FAQ)" on the online manual website.

Power socket

Connect the power cord.

USB port (for computer connection)

Connect a USB cable when connecting the machine and a computer.

LAN port

Connect a LAN cable when connecting the machine to a wir

ed LAN router, etc.

Connecting to a Wired

LAN(P

. 14)

Basic Operations

Interior

8054-01S

Toner cartridge tray

Install the toner cartridges. Load the Y (yello

w), M (magenta), C (cyan), and K (black) toner cartridges in the

slots from the rear to the front respectively.

Procedure for Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 383)

LINKS

Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 381)

Basic Operations

Manual Feed Slot

8054-01U

Paper guides

Adjust the paper guides to e

xactly the width of the loaded paper to ensure that paper is fed straight into the

machine.

LINKS

Loading Paper in the Manual Feed Slot(P. 110)

Basic Operations

Paper Drawer

8054-01W

Paper guides

Adjust the paper guides to e

xactly the size of the loaded paper to ensure that paper is fed straight into the

machine. Press the lock release levers that are indicated with arrows in the illustrations to release the locks

and slide the paper guides.

Lock release lever (for extending the paper drawer)

When loading Legal size paper, the paper dr

awer needs to be extended. Press this lever to release the lock

and extend the length of the paper drawer.

When loading Legal size paper

● When the e

xtended paper drawer is inserted, its front side is not ush with the machine. Place the

legal dust cover over the open part of the paper drawer.

LINKS

Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 104)

Basic Operations

Operation Panel

8054-01X

Display

ou can view the operation and error statuses of this machine, the amount remaining in the toner cartridges,

and other conditions.

Basic Screens(P. 90)

[Home] key

ess to display the Home screen, which provides access to the setting menu and functions such as Memory

Media Print and Secure Print.

Home Screen(P. 91)

[Back] key

ess to return to the previous screen. If you press this key when specifying settings, for example, the

settings are not applied and the display returns to the previous screen.

Numeric keys ([0]-[9] keys)

ess to enter numbers and text.

Entering Text(P. 98)

[*] key

ess to switch the type of text that is entered.

[Data] indicator

Blinks while an oper

ation is being performed, such as data transmission or printing. Lights up when there

are documents waiting to be processed.

[Error] indicator

Blinks or lights up when an err

or such as a paper jam occurs.

Basic Operations

[Energy Saver] key

ess to put the machine into sleep mode. The key lights up green when the machine is in sleep mode. Press

the key again to exit sleep mode.

Entering Sleep Mode(P. 132)

[Status Monitor] key

ess to check the printing status, to view the usage history, or to view the network settings such as the IP

address of the machine. You can also check the status of the machine, such as the remaining amount of

paper and the amount remaining in the toner cartridges, or whether any errors occurred.

<Status

Monitor> Scr

een(P. 93)

[ID] key

ess after entering the ID and PIN to log on when Department ID Management is enabled. After you nish

using the machine, press this key again to log off.

Logging in to the Machine(P. 101)

[Clear] key

ess to delete the entered numbers and text.

[Stop] key

ess to cancel printing and other operations.

[#] key

ess to enter symbols such as "@" or "/".

[ ] key

When specifying settings, pr

ess to return to the previous screen. When entering numbers, press to move the

cursor to the left.

[ ] key

When specifying settings, pr

ess to select the item immediately above the currently selected item. When

changing setting values, press to increase a value.

[ ] key

When specifying settings, pr

ess to proceed to the next screen. When entering numbers, press to move the

cursor to the right.

[ ] key

When specifying settings, pr

ess to select the item immediately below the currently selected item. When

changing setting values, press to decrease a value.

[ ] key

ess to apply settings or specied details.

LINKS

Basic Operation(P. 96)

Basic Operations

Turning ON the Machine

8054-01Y

This section describes ho

w to turn ON the machine.

Make sure that the power plug is rmly inserted into a po

wer outlet.

Press the power switch.

➠ The Start scr

een appears.

Operation Panel(P. 80)

● Y

ou can select the screen that is displayed rst after the machine is turned ON.

<Default Screen After

Startup/Restor

ation>(P. 267)

LINKS

Turning OFF the Machine(P. 83)

Restarting the Machine(P. 87)

Basic Operations

Turning OFF the Machine

8054-020

This section describes ho

w to turn OFF the machine.

Press the power switch.

● It may tak

e some time for the machine to completely shut down. Do not unplug the power cord until the

display turns off.

● To restart the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds after the machine is turned OFF.

● You can also turn OFF the machine from a computer.

Turning OFF the Machine by Remote

Oper

ation(P. 84)

● You can specify the time for each day of the week and congure a setting to automatically turn OFF the

machine.

Powering OFF at a Fixed Time(P. 85)

Basic Operations

Turning OFF the Machine by Remote Operation

8054-021

ou can turn OFF the machine from a computer on the same network without going to where the machine is installed.

Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.

Starting Remote

UI(P

. 238)

Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.

Remote UI Screen(P. 239)

Select [Device Management] [Remote Shutdown].

Check [Device Status] to make sure that no functions are being processed, and click

[Ex

ecute].

Click [OK].

Restarting the machine by remote operation

● You can restart the machine by clicking [Restart Device] on the [Settings/Registration] screen of the Remote

UI. Restarting the Machine(P. 87)

Basic Operations

Powering OFF at a Fixed Time

8054-022

ou can make a setting so that the power is automatically tuned OFF at a specied time on each day of the week. This

allows you to avoid useless power consumption that may occur due to failure to turn OFF the power. By default, this

function is disabled.

● For information about the basic oper

ation to set up the machine from Remote UI, see

Setting Up Menu

Options fr

om Remote UI(P. 248) .

Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.

Starting Remote

UI(P

. 238)

Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.

Remote UI Screen(P. 239)

Select [Timer Settings] [Edit].

Select the check box for [Set Auto Shutdown Weekly Timer], and set the time to turn

OFF the po

wer.

[Set Auto Shutdown Weekly Timer]

Selecting the check bo

x allows you to set the time to turn OFF the power on each day of the week.

[Sunday] to [Saturday]

Basic Operations

Enter the desired time to turn OFF the power. For any day of the week, leaving the time eld blank means

that the auto shutdo

wn function is disabled for that day.

Click [OK].

If the power is not turned OFF automatically at the specied time

● When the Data indicator is lit up or blinking

● When the menu scr

een or Check Counter screen is displayed

● When settings data is being imported/exported

● When the rmware is being updated

If the power cannot be turned OFF automatically at the specied time, a retry will be performed up to ten times at intervals

of one minute. If the power cannot be turned OFF even after ten retries, auto shutdown will be impossible for that day.

Basic Operations

Restarting the Machine

8054-023

Depending on the setting items that have been changed, you may need to mak

e the changes effective by restarting

the machine. This section describes how to restart the machine.

Restarting the Machine by an Operation on the Main Unit(P. 87)

Restarting the Machine by Remote Operation(P. 87)

Restarting the Machine by an Operation on the Main Unit

Press the power switch.

● It may tak

e some time for the machine to completely shut down.

➠ When the machine shuts down, the display or Energy Saver key of the operation panel turns off.

Wait at least 10 seconds after the shutdown, then press the power switch again.

➠ The machine starts.

Restarting the Machine by Remote Operation

Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.

Starting Remote

UI(P

. 238)

Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.

Remote UI Screen(P. 239)

Click [Restart Device] in the menu on the left side of the screen.

Basic Operations

Check [Device Status] to make sure that no functions are being processed, and click

[Ex

ecute].

Click [OK].

➠ A r

estart process begins. Communication remains disconnected until the main unit has restarted.

Basic Operations

Using the Operation Panel

8054-024

ou can use the display and keys of the operation panel to congure machine settings or operate functions. This

section describes basic usage of the display and keys.

Basic Screens(P. 90)

Basic Operation(P. 96)

Entering Text(P. 98)

● If you want to invert the light and dark parts of the display: <Invert Screen Colors>(P. 291)

● If you want to adjust the brightness of the display: <Brightness>(P. 291)

● If you want to adjust the contr

ast of the display:

<Contrast>(P. 291)

LINKS

Operation Panel(P. 80)

Basic Operations

Basic Screens

8054-025

The Home scr

een or settings screen appears on the display, allowing you to initiate functions such as Memory Media

Print and Secure Print. You can also use the display to check information such as error messages and the machine's

operation status.

Home Screen(P. 91)

<Status Monitor> Screen(P. 93)

Message Display(P. 95)

● Y

ou can customize the Home screen by rearranging frequently used buttons for easier access to the

respective functions.

Customizing the Display(P. 128)

Basic Operations

Home Screen

8054-026

The Home scr

een is displayed when the power is turned ON or by pressing

on the operation panel. Use this screen

to specify settings for and r

egister functions.

Wi-Fi icon

Displayed when the machine is connected to a wir

eless

LAN.

Amount r

emaining in the toner cartridges

Displays the amount remaining in the toner cartridges in

stages. This is hidden while the Home screen is active.

<Menu>

<Function Settings>, <Pr

eferences>, and many other

machine settings start from this button.

Setting Menu

List(P

. 265)

This button is used for specifying the size and type of

paper loaded in the paper dr

awer and manual feed slot.

Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 117)

Prints les stor

ed in a USB memory device.

Printing

om a USB Memory Device (Memory Media Print)

(P. 149)

<Secur

e Print>

Use this function to print a secure document.

Printing

a Document Secur

ed by a PIN (Secure Print)(P. 145)

Use this to establish a connection to a mobile de

vice.

Connecting with Mobile Devices(P. 161)

<Display Or

der (Home)>

Allows you to change the order that Home screen buttons

are displayed in.

Customizing the Home

Scr

een(P. 129)

oner Delivery Set.>

You can congure settings for toner replenishment

service. Use of the toner replenishment service requires

prior registration with select retailers. This service is only

Basic Operations

available in certain countries/regions and for certain

models.

<Wir

eless LAN Set.>

Use this button to congure the wireless LAN settings.

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 15)

LINKS

Customizing the Home Screen(P. 129)

Basic Operations

<Status Monitor> Screen

8054-027

When you pr

ess

, a screen appears in which you can check the progress of documents as well as the status of the

machine and network setting information.

IP Address

Displays the IPv4 addr

ess of the machine.

● Y

ou can specify whether to display the IP address on the <Status Monitor> screen by setting <Display IP

Address>.

<Display IP Address>(P. 270)

Displays the details of any err

ors that occurred. For more information, see "Troubleshooting (FAQ)" on the

online manual website.

Displays the status of the machine.

Displays whether paper is loaded in each paper sour

ce.

Displays the amount of toner remaining in the toner cartridges. Other internal parts may reach the end of

their lifetime before the toner runs out.

Used to safely remove a USB memory device. This is only displayed when a USB memory device is

connected to the machine.

Remove the USB Memory Device(P. 135)

Displays the separ

ate totals for black and white and color printouts.

Viewing the Counter Value(P. 397)

<Secur

e Print Memory Usage>

Basic Operations

Displays the amount of memory currently used for storing secured document data. Printing a

Document Secur

ed by a PIN (Secure Print)(P. 145)

Displays rmware version information.

Displays the serial number of the machine.

Status and logs of printed and received documents

Displays the curr

ent status of the selected item. The <Print Job Status> screen is shown below as an example.

Displays the network settings such as the IP addr

ess of the machine and status such as the condition of

wireless LAN communications.

Viewing Network Settings(P. 34)

Basic Operations

Message Display

8054-028

Messages ar

e displayed on the screen in situations such as when paper runs out or when the expiration of the toner

cartridge lifetime is reached. For more information, see "Troubleshooting (FAQ)" on the online manual website.

When an Error Occurs

In some cases when an error occurs, instructions on how to respond to the error are displayed. Follow the on-

scr

een instructions to solve the problem. The screen displayed when a paper jam occurs is shown below as an

example.

Basic Operations

Basic Operation

8054-029

Use the k

eys shown below to specify settings and adjust values.

Using /

Scrolling the Screen

The scr

oll bar is displayed on the right side of the screen when not all of the information ts on one screen. If

the scroll bar is displayed, use

/ to scroll up or down. The text and background colors of an item are

inverted when it is selected.

Changing Setting Values

Use / to enter values. If an icon such as below is displayed at the upper left of the screen, you can

enter values dir

ectly using the numeric keys.

Entering Text(P. 98)

● V

alues in ( ) displayed below the entry box are the enterable value range.

Using

Proceeding to the Next Screen/Returning to the Previous Screen

ess

to proceed to the next screen. Press to return to the previous screen.

Basic Operations

● Y

ou can also proceed to the next screen by pressing

, and return to the previous screen by pressing

Changing Setting Values

Use

/ to adjust the slider scale.

Moving the Cursor

Use / to enter text and values. Entering Text(P. 98)

Using

Press to apply a setting.

Using the Numeric Keys

Use the numeric keys to enter text and values. Entering Text(P. 98)

● Y

ou can change a variety of display-related settings, such as the display language:

<Display

Settings>(P

. 267)

● You can change the screen that is automatically displayed when the machine remains idle for a specied

length of time:

<Function After Auto Reset>(P. 274)

● Y

ou can change a variety of accessibility-related settings, such as the scroll speed:

<Accessibility>(P. 291)

Basic Operations

Entering Text

8054-02A

20HS-029

Use the numeric k

eys to enter text and values.

Switching the Type of Text

Press to switch the type of text that is entered.

● Y

ou can also select <Entry Mode> and press

to switch the type of text.

Types of Text That Can Be Entered

Text that can be entered is listed below.

Key A a 12

@ . - _ / 1

ABC abc 2

DEF def 3

GHI ghi 4

JKL jkl 5

MNO mno 6

PQRS pqrs 7

Basic Operations

TUV tuv 8

WXYZ wxyz 9

(Not available) 0

(space) -.*#!",;:^`_=/|'?$@%&+\~()[]{}<> (Not available)

● Pr

ess

or select <Symbol> and press when the type of text that is entered is <A> or <a> to

display enter

able symbols in the screen. Use

/ / / to select the symbol you want to enter,

and pr

ess

Deleting Text

One character is deleted each time is pressed. Press and hold to delete all of the entered text.

ving the Cursor (Entering a Space)

Press or to move the cursor. To enter a space, move the cursor to the end of the text, and press .

Example of Entering T

ext and Numbers

Example: "Canon-1"

Press repeatedly until <A> is selected.

Press repeatedly until the letter "C" is selected.

Press repeatedly until <a> is selected.

Press repeatedly until the letter "a" is selected.

Press repeatedly until the letter "n" is selected.

Press repeatedly until the letter "o" is selected.

Press repeatedly until the letter "n" is selected.

Press repeatedly until the symbol "-" is selected.

Press repeatedly until <12> is selected.

Press .

Select <Apply> and press .

Entering Characters Using a USB Keyboard

ou can connect a keyboard to the USB port for USB devices on the

Front Side(P. 74) and enter text from the

keyboard. Even while the keyboard is connected, you can enter text from the operation panel.

● Some k

eys on the USB keyboard, such as the [Backspace], [Home] and [End] keys, cannot be used. When

keys that cannot be used are pressed, nothing is entered or changed.

● To delete text, press the [Delete] key.

Basic Operations

● Pr

essing the [RETURN/ENTER] key completes text entry in the same way as selecting <Apply>.

● You can specify the type of keyboard layout (US layout or UK layout).

<English Keyboard Layout>(P. 271)

● Y

ou can disconnect the USB keyboard from the machine at any time. No special operation is required to

disconnect it.

● Depending on the display language, you may not be able to enter some characters correctly.

● The USB keyboard may not operate correctly depending on its type.

Basic Operations

100

Logging in to the Machine

8054-02C

If Department ID Management is enabled or System Manager IDs ar

e enabled, you must log in before using the

machine. When the login screen appears, use the procedure below to enter the Department ID and PIN.

Enter the ID.

Select <Department ID> or <System Manager ID>.

Enter the ID.

● If no PIN is r

egistered, proceed to step 3.

Enter the PIN.

Select <PIN>.

Enter the PIN.

Press

➠ The login scr

een will be changed to the Home screen.

● After you nish using the machine, press

to display the login screen.

LINKS

Setting the Department ID Management(P. 185)

Setting the System Manager ID and PIN(P. 183)

Basic Operations

101

Loading Paper

8054-02E

ou can load the paper into the paper drawer or manual feed slot. Load the paper you usually use into the paper

drawer. The paper drawer is convenient when using large amounts of paper. Use the manual feed slot when you

temporarily use a size or type of paper that is not loaded in the paper drawer. See

Available Paper(P. 416) for

available paper sizes and types.

About Paper

Precautions for Paper(P. 102)

Storing the Paper Printed with the Machine(P. 103)

w to Load Paper

Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 104)

Loading Paper in the Manual Feed Slot(P. 110)

Loading Envelopes(P. 112)

Loading Preprinted Paper(P. 115)

Conguring the Settings for the Loaded Paper

Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 117)

Precautions for Paper

Do not use the following types of paper:

● A paper jam or printing err

or may occur.

- Wrinkled or creased paper

- Curled or rolled paper

- Torn paper

- Damp paper

- Very thin paper

- Thin coarse paper

- Paper printed by a thermal transfer printer

- Back side of paper printed by a thermal transfer printer

- Highly textured paper

- Glossy paper

Notes on use of paper

● Only use paper that has fully acclimatized to the environment in which the machine is installed. Using paper

that has been stored under different temperature or humidity conditions may cause paper jams or result in

poor print quality.

Basic Operations

102

Paper handling and storage

● It is r

ecommended that you use paper as soon as possible after unwrapping. Paper remaining unused

should be covered with the original wrapping paper and stored on a at surface.

● Keep the paper wrapped in its original package to protect the paper from moisture or dryness.

● Do not store the paper in such a way that may cause it to curl or fold.

● Do not store the paper vertically or do not stack too much paper.

● Do not store the paper in direct sunlight, or in a place subject to high humidity, dryness, or drastic changes

in temperature or humidity.

When printing on paper that has absorbed moisture

● Steam may emit fr

om the paper output area, or water droplets may form around the paper output area.

There is nothing unusual about any of these occurrences, which occur when the heat generated from xing

toner on the paper causes moisture in the paper to evaporate (most likely to occur at low room

temperatures).

Storing the Paper Printed with the Machine

When handling/storing the paper printed with the machine, tak

e the following precautions.

◼ How to Store the Printed Paper

● Store on a at surface.

● Do not store together with articles made of PVC (polyvinyl chloride) such as clear folders. Toner may melt, resulting

in the paper's sticking to PVC articles.

● Take care that the paper does not get folded or creased. Toner may peel off.

● To store over a long period of time (two years or longer), store in binders or equivalent.

● When the paper is stored over a long period of time, it may become discolored and thus the print may seem to have

undergone a change of color.

● Do not store in a place where the temperature is high.

◼ Precautions When Applying Adhesive

● Always use insoluble adhesive.

● Before applying adhesive, perform a test using a printout no longer required.

● When putting adhesive-applied paper sheets one over another, make sure that the adhesive is completely dried out.

LINKS

Registering a Custom Paper Size(P. 124)

Basic Operations

103

Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer

8054-02F

1660-02Y

Load the paper that you usually use in the paper dr

awer. When you want to print on paper that is not loaded in the

paper drawer, load the paper in the manual feed slot.

Loading Paper in the Manual Feed Slot(P. 110)

Loading Regular Size Paper(P. 104)

Loading Custom Size Paper(P. 107)

● When using A5 size paper, see Loading Custom Size Paper(P. 107) and load it in the landscape

orientation. When loading paper in the portr

ait orientation, follow the steps shown in

Loading Regular

Size Paper

(P. 104) .

Landscape orientation

Portrait orientation

Loading Regular Size Paper

o load paper whose size is found in the paper size markings on the paper drawer, use the following procedure. For

paper whose size is not found in the paper size markings, see

Loading Custom Size Paper(P. 107) .

Pull out the paper drawer until it stops, and remove it while lifting the front side.

Adjust the positions of the paper guides to the paper size you want to use.

● While pr

essing the lock release lever, move the paper guide to align the projection to the appropriate paper

size marking.

Basic Operations

104

When loading Legal size paper

● Pr

ess the lock release lever, and extend the paper drawer.

Load the paper so that the edge of the paper stack is aligned against the paper guide

on the fr

ont side of the paper drawer.

● Load the paper with the print side face up.

● Fan the paper stack well, and tap it on a at surface to align the edges of the paper stack.

Do not exceed the load limit line when loading paper

● Mak

e sure that the paper stack does not exceed the load limit line (

). Loading too much paper can

cause paper jams.

Basic Operations

105

● When loading paper with a logo, see Loading Preprinted Paper(P. 115) .

Insert the paper drawer into the machine.

● When you insert the paper dr

awer with <Notify to Check Paper Settings> set to <On>, a conrmation screen

is displayed.

<Notify to Check Paper Settings>(P. 367)

When loading Legal size paper

● When

the extended paper drawer is inserted, its front side is not ush with the machine. Place the legal

dust cover over the open part of the paper drawer.

Continue to Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer(P. 118)

When changing the paper size or type

● The

factory default settings for paper size and type are <LTR> and <Plain 2>, respectively. If you load a

different size or type of paper into the machine, make sure to change the settings. If you do not change

the settings, the machine cannot print properly.

Printing on the Back Side of Printed Paper (Manual 2-Sided Printing)

● Y

ou can print on the back side of printed paper. Flatten any curls on the printed paper and insert it into the

paper drawer or manual feed slot ( Loading Paper in the Manual Feed Slot(P. 110) ), with the side to

print face up (previously printed side face down).

- When using the manual feed slot, load one sheet of paper each time you print.

- You can use only the paper printed with this machine.

- You cannot print on the side that has previously been printed on.

Basic Operations

106

- If the printouts look faded, set the target paper source to <On> in <Manual Back Side Print (2-Sided Only)>.

<Manual Back Side Print (2-Sided Only)>(P. 297)

If you are using A5 size paper, the reverse side may not be printed correctly.

Loading Custom Size Paper

o load custom size paper or other paper whose size is not found in the paper size markings on the paper drawer, use

the following procedure.

Pull out the paper drawer until it stops, and remove it while lifting the front side.

Spread the paper guides apart.

● Pr

ess the lock release lever to slide the paper guides outward.

When loading longer paper than A4 size

● Pr

ess the lock release lever, and extend the paper drawer.

Basic Operations

107

Load the paper so that the edge of the paper stack is aligned against the rear side of

the paper dr

awer.

● Load the paper with the print side face up.

● Fan the paper stack well, and tap it on a at surface to align the edges of the paper stack.

Do not exceed the load limit line when loading paper

● Mak

e sure that the paper stack does not exceed the load limit line (

). Loading too much paper can

cause paper jams.

● When loading envelopes or paper with a logo, see Loading Preprinted Paper(P. 115) .

Align the paper guides against the edges of the paper.

● Press the lock release lever and slide the paper guides inward until they are aligned securely against the

edges of the paper.

Align the paper guides securely against the edges of the paper

● Paper guides that ar

e too loose or too tight can cause misfeeds or paper jams.

Basic Operations

108

Insert the paper drawer into the machine.

● When you insert the paper dr

awer with <Notify to Check Paper Settings> set to <On>, a conrmation screen

is displayed.

<Notify to Check Paper Settings>(P. 367)

When loading longer paper than A4 size

● When

the extended paper drawer is inserted, its front side is not ush with the machine. Place the legal

dust cover over the open part of the paper drawer.

Continue to Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer(P. 118)

When changing the paper size or type

● The factory default settings for paper size and type are <LTR> and <Plain 2>, respectively. If you load a

different size or type of paper into the machine, make sure to change the settings. If you do not change

the settings, the machine cannot print properly.

Printing on the Back Side of Printed Paper (Manual 2-Sided Printing)

● Y

ou can print on the back side of printed paper. Flatten any curls on the printed paper and insert it into the

paper drawer or manual feed slot (

Loading Paper in the Manual Feed Slot(P. 110) ), with the side to

print face up (pr

eviously printed side face down).

- When using the manual feed slot, load one sheet of paper each time you print.

- You can use only the paper printed with this machine.

- You cannot print on the side that has previously been printed on.

- If the printouts look faded, set the target paper source to <On> in <Manual Back Side Print (2-Sided Only)>.

<Manual Back Side Print (2-Sided Only)>(P. 297)

If you are using A5 size paper, the reverse side may not be printed correctly.

LINKS

Available Paper(P. 416)

Basic Operations

109

Loading Paper in the Manual Feed Slot

8054-02H

1660-030

When you want to print on paper that is not loaded in the paper dr

awer, load the paper in the manual feed slot. Load

the paper that you usually use in the paper drawer.

Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 104)

Make sure to insert the paper drawer

● The machine only prints when the paper dr

awer is inserted, even if paper is loaded in the manual feed slot.

An error message is displayed if you attempt to print without inserting the paper drawer.

Load only one sheet of paper at a time

● Only one sheet of paper can be loaded each time you print.

When loading A5 size paper

● When setting the paper size, make sure the current paper orientation. Specifying Paper Size and Type in

the Manual Feed Slot

(P. 120)

Landscape orientation

Portrait orientation

Spread the paper guides apart.

● Slide the paper guides outwar

Insert the paper and align the paper guides against the width of the paper.

● Load the paper with the print side face up.

● Insert the paper 3/8" to 3/4" (10 mm to 20 mm) into the manual feed slot, and then slide the paper guides

inward until they are aligned securely against the edges of the paper.

Basic Operations

110

Align the paper guides securely against the edges of the paper

● Paper guides that ar

e too loose or too tight can cause misfeeds or paper jams.

Insert the paper slowly into the manual feed slot until it reaches the back of the slot.

● The paper is pulled slightly into the machine after it r

eaches the back of the slot.

● T

o ensure that the paper is loaded squarely, hold it with both hands until the pull-in operation is complete.

● When

loading envelopes or paper with a logo, see

Loading Envelopes(P. 112) or Loading Preprinted

Paper(P

. 115) .

Continue to

Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Manual Feed Slot(P. 120)

Printing on the Back Side of Printed Paper (Manual 2-Sided Printing)

● Y

ou can print on the back side of printed paper. Flatten any curls on the printed paper and insert it into the

paper drawer (

Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 104) ) or manual feed slot, with the side to print

face up (pr

eviously printed side face down).

- You can use only the paper printed with this machine.

- You cannot print on the side that has previously been printed on.

- If the printouts look faded, set the target paper source to <On> in <Manual Back Side Print (2-Sided Only)>.

<Manual Back Side Print (2-Sided Only)>(P. 297)

If you are using A5 size paper, the reverse side may not be printed correctly.

LINKS

Available Paper(P. 416)

Basic Operations

111

Loading Envelopes

8054-02J

Mak

e sure to atten any curls on envelopes before loading them. Also pay attention to the orientation of envelopes

and which side is face up.

Before Loading Envelopes(P. 112)

In the Paper Drawer(P. 113)

In the Manual Feed Slot(P. 113)

● This section describes ho

w to load envelopes in the orientation you want, as well as procedures that you

need to complete before loading envelopes. For a description of the general procedure for loading

envelopes in the paper drawer or manual feed slot, see

Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 104) or

Loading Paper in the Manual Feed Slot(P. 110) .

Before Loading Envelopes

Follo

w the procedure below to prepare the envelopes before loading.

● Only one envelope at a time can be loaded in the manual feed slot. Follo

w steps 1 to 3 in the procedure

below to prepare the envelope for loading.

Close the ap of each envelope.

Flatten them to release any remaining air, and make sure that the edges are pressed

tightly

Loosen any stiff corners of the envelopes and atten any curls.

Basic Operations

112

Align the edges of the envelopes on a at surface.

In the Paper Drawer

Load the envelopes Monar

ch, COM10, DL, or ISO-C5 in portrait orientation (with the long edges on either side), with

the non-glued side (front side) face up. You cannot print on the reverse side of envelopes.

● Load the envelopes so that the edge with the ap is to

ward the left side as shown in the illustration.

In the Manual Feed Slot

Load the envelopes Monar

ch, COM10, DL, or ISO-C5 in portrait orientation (with the short edge toward the machine),

with the non-glued side (front side) face up. You cannot print on the reverse side of envelopes.

● Load the envelopes so that the edge with the ap is to

ward the left side as shown in the illustration.

Basic Operations

113

Basic Operations

114

Loading Preprinted Paper

8054-02K

When you use paper that has been pr

eprinted with a logo, pay attention to the orientation of the paper when loading.

Load the paper properly so that printing is performed on the correct side of the paper with a logo.

Making 1-Sided Printouts on Paper with Logos(P. 115)

Making 2-Sided Printouts on Paper with Logos(P. 115)

● This section mainly describes ho

w to load preprinted paper with the proper facing and orientation. For a

description of the general procedure for loading paper in the paper drawer or manual feed slot, see

Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 104) or Loading Paper in the Manual Feed Slot(P. 110) .

Making 1-Sided Printouts on Paper with Logos

Load the paper with the logo side (the side to print the document) face up.

Printing on Paper with Logos in Portr

ait Orientation

Printing on Paper with Logos in Landscape Orientation

Making 2-Sided Printouts on Paper with Logos

Load the paper with the fr

ont logo side (the side to print the rst page of the document) face down.

Basic Operations

115

Printing on Paper with Logos in Portrait Orientation

Printing on Paper with Logos in Landscape Orientation

The <Switch Paper Feed Method> setting

● When you print on pr

eprinted paper, you need to change the facing of the paper to load each time you

perform 1-sided and 2-sided printing. However, if <Switch Paper Feed Method> is set to <Print Side Priority>,

the facing that you use for loading preprinted paper for 2-sided printing can also be used for 1-sided

printing. This setting is especially useful if you frequently perform both 1-sided and 2-sided printing.

<Switch Paper Feed Method>(P. 307)

Basic Operations

116

Specifying Paper Size and Type

8054-02L

ou must specify the paper size and type settings to match the paper that is loaded. Make sure to change the paper

settings when you load the paper that is different from the previously loaded paper.

Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer(P. 118)

Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Manual Feed Slot(P. 120)

Registering Default Paper Settings for the Manual Feed Slot(P. 122)

Registering a Custom Paper Size(P. 124)

Limiting the Paper Sizes Displayed(P. 126)

Automatically Selecting an Appropriate Paper Source for Each Function(P. 127)

● If the setting does not match the size and type of loaded paper, a paper jam or printing err

or may occur.

Basic Operations

117

Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer

8054-02R

Select <Paper Settings> in the Home screen.

Home Screen(P. 91)

Select the target paper drawer.

Select the paper size.

● If the loaded paper size is not displayed, select <Other Sizes>.

When loading A5 size paper

● In the landscape orientation, select <A5>. In the portrait orientation, select <A5R>.

Landscape orientation

Portrait orientation

About <Free Size>

● If

you frequently need to change the paper to be loaded, set to <Free Size>; this will reduce the number of

steps required to change the setting each time. You can also display an error message when the setting in

the printer driver is signicantly different from the size of the loaded paper.

<Action When Free Paper

Size Mismatch>(P

. 310)

Select the paper type.

About <Free>

Basic Operations

118

● If

you frequently need to change the paper to be loaded, set to <Free>; this will reduce the number of

steps required to change the setting each time. However, take note that this setting lets the machine

perform printing even if there is mismatch between the paper type setting in the printer driver and the

paper type actually loaded in the machine.

● When the paper type setting in the printer driver is [Auto], the machine operates the same way as when

the paper type is [Plain 1].

LINKS

Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 104)

Limiting the Paper Sizes Displayed(P. 126)

Available Paper(P. 416)

<Notify to Check Paper Settings>(P. 367)

Basic Operations

119

Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Manual Feed Slot

8054-02S

The scr

een shown here is displayed when paper is loaded in the manual feed slot. Follow the on-screen instructions to

specify settings that match the size and type of the loaded paper.

If the screen shown above is not displayed when paper is loaded

● If you always load the same paper in the manual feed slot, you can skip the paper setting oper

ations by

registering the paper size and type as the default setting. When the default setting is registered, however,

the screen shown above is not displayed. To display the screen, select <Specify When Loading Paper> (

Registering Default Paper Settings for the Manual Feed Slot(P. 122) ).

Select the paper size.

● If the loaded paper size is not displayed, select <Other Sizes>.

When loading custom size paper

Select <Custom>.

Specify the length of the <X> side and <Y> side.

● Ex

ecute the following steps in sequence: <X>

enter the length of the <X> side using / , with

/ to move the cursor between the digits for inputting whole numbers and

actions

<Y> enter the length of the <Y> side

Select <Apply>.

When loading A5 size paper

● In the landscape orientation, select <A5>. In the portr

ait orientation, select <A5R>.

Landscape orientation

Portrait orientation

Basic Operations

120

About <Free Size>

● If

you frequently need to change the paper to be loaded, set to <Free Size>; this will reduce the number of

steps required to change the setting each time. You can also display an error message when the setting in

the printer driver is signicantly different from the size of the loaded paper.

<Action When Free Paper

Size Mismatch>(P

. 310)

Select the paper type.

About <Free>

● If

you frequently need to change the paper to be loaded, set to <Free>; this will reduce the number of

steps required to change the setting each time. However, take note that this setting lets the machine

perform printing even if there is mismatch between the paper type setting in the printer driver and the

paper type actually loaded in the machine.

● When the paper type setting in the printer driver is [Auto], the machine operates the same way as when

the paper type is [Plain 1].

LINKS

Loading Paper in the Manual Feed Slot(P. 110)

Limiting the Paper Sizes Displayed(P. 126)

Available Paper(P. 416)

Basic Operations

121

Registering Default Paper Settings for the Manual Feed

Slot

8054-02U

ou can register default paper settings for the manual feed slot. Registering default settings can save yourself the

effort of having to specify the settings each time you load the same paper into the manual feed slot.

● After the default paper setting is r

egistered, the paper setting screen is not displayed when paper is loaded,

and the same setting is always used. If you load a different paper size or type without changing the paper

settings, the machine may not print properly. To avoid this problem, select <Specify When Loading Paper> in

step 3, and then load the paper.

Select <Paper Settings> in the Home screen.

Home Screen(P. 91)

Select <Multi-Purpose Tray>.

Select the paper size.

● If the loaded paper size is not displayed, select <Other Sizes>.

Registering a custom paper size

Select <Custom>.

Specify the length of the <X> side and <Y> side.

● Ex

ecute the following steps in sequence: <X>

enter the length of the <X> side using / , with

/ to move the cursor between the digits for inputting whole numbers and

fractions <Y> enter the length of the <Y> side

Select <Apply>.

Basic Operations

122

When loading A5 size paper

● In the landscape orientation, select <A5>. In the portr

ait orientation, select <A5R>.

Landscape orientation

Portrait orientation

About <Free Size>

● If

you frequently need to change the paper to be loaded, set to <Free Size>; this will reduce the number of

steps required to change the setting each time. You can also display an error message when the setting in

the printer driver is signicantly different from the size of the loaded paper.

<Action When Free Paper

Size Mismatch>(P

. 310)

Select the paper type.

About <Free>

● If you frequently need to change the paper to be loaded, set to <Free>; this will reduce the number of

steps required to change the setting each time. However, take note that this setting lets the machine

perform printing even if there is mismatch between the paper type setting in the printer driver and the

paper type actually loaded in the machine.

● When the paper type setting in the printer driver is [Auto], the machine operates the same way as when

the paper type is [Plain 1].

LINKS

Loading Paper in the Manual Feed Slot(P. 110)

Limiting the Paper Sizes Displayed(P. 126)

Available Paper(P. 416)

Basic Operations

123

Registering a Custom Paper Size

8054-02W

ou can register up to three frequently used custom paper sizes.

Select <Paper Settings> in the Home screen.

Home Screen(P. 91)

Select <Register Custom Paper>.

Select the registration number.

● If you have selected the registered number, continue on to select <Edit>.

Deleting a setting

● Select the registered number, and then select <Delete> <Yes>.

Specify the length of the <X> side and <Y> side.

● Ex

ecute the following steps in sequence: <X>

enter the length of the <X> side using / , with /

to move the cursor between the digits for inputting whole numbers and fractions <Y> enter the

length of the <Y> side

Select <Apply>.

Select the paper type.

About <Free>

● If

you frequently need to change the paper to be loaded, set to <Free>; this will reduce the number of

steps required to change the setting each time. However, take note that this setting lets the machine

perform printing even if there is mismatch between the paper type setting in the printer driver and the

paper type actually loaded in the machine.

● When the paper type setting in the printer driver is [Auto], the machine operates the same way as when

the paper type is [Plain 1].

Basic Operations

124

Setting to the r

egistered custom size

The paper sizes that are registered in the procedure above are displayed on the paper size selection screen

for the paper dr

awer or manual feed slot.

Example for manual feed slot:

LINKS

Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 104)

Loading Paper in the Manual Feed Slot(P. 110)

Basic Operations

125

Limiting the Paper Sizes Displayed

8054-02X

ou can ensure that only frequently used paper sizes are shown in the screen for selecting the paper size setting.

Select <Paper Settings> in the Home screen.

Home Screen(P. 91)

Select <Select Frequently Used Paper Sizes>.

Select the paper source you want to limit the paper sizes to be displayed for.

Clear the check boxes for paper sizes you do not want displayed.

● Ensur

e that only the check boxes for frequently used paper sizes are selected.

● Paper

sizes that are not selected can be viewed by selecting <Other Sizes> in the paper size setting

selection screen.

Select <Apply>.

LINKS

Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer(P. 118)

Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Manual Feed Slot(P. 120)

Registering Default Paper Settings for the Manual Feed Slot(P. 122)

Basic Operations

126

Automatically Selecting an Appropriate Paper Source

for Each Function

8054-02Y

Enable or disable the automatic paper sour

ce selection feature for each paper source. If this feature is set to <On>, the

machine automatically selects a paper source that is loaded with paper of the appropriate size for each print job. Also,

when the paper in the selected paper source runs out, this feature enables continuous printing by switching from that

paper source to another that is loaded with the same paper size.

Select <Menu> in the Home screen.

Home Screen(P. 91)

Select <Function Settings> <Common> <Paper Feed Settings>.

Select <Drawer Auto Selection On/Off>.

Select the target function.

● When the tar

get function is report/list printing or memory media print, select <Other>.

For each paper source to which you want to apply the automatic paper source

selection featur

e, specify <On>.

● Select the tar

get paper source

<On>.

Select <Apply>.

Basic Operations

127

Customizing the Display

8054-030

In or

der to make the Home screen easier to use, you can customize it.

Customizing the Home Screen

You can rearrange the displayed items and customize the screen to make it easier to select functions.

Customizing the Home Screen(P. 129)

Basic Operations

128

Customizing the Home Screen

8054-031

o make the buttons easier to use, you can freely change the item display order.

Select <Display Order (Home)> in the Home screen.

Home Screen(P. 91)

Use / to select the item to be moved, and press .

Use / to move to the target position, and press .

When the buttons are rearranged in the way you want, press

LINKS

Basic Operation(P. 96)

Basic Operations

129

Changing the Default Settings for Functions

8054-032

The default settings ar

e the settings that are displayed when you turn ON the machine. If you change these default

settings to match the operations that you perform frequently, you can eliminate the need to specify the same settings

every time you perform an action.

◼ Memory Media Print

For information about changeable setting items, see

<Access Stored Files Settings>(P. 356) .

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Access Files> <Memory Media Settings> <Access Stored

Files Settings> <Change Default Settings (Memory Media Print)> Select the setting Change

the default value of the selected item <Apply>

● If you select <Initialize> on each setting scr

een, you can restore the default settings.

LINKS

Printing from a USB Memory Device (Memory Media Print)(P. 149)

Basic Operations

130

Setting Sounds

8054-033

The machine pr

oduces sounds in a variety of situations, such as when a paper jam or error occurs. You can set the

volume of each of these sounds individually.

Select <Menu>

<Preferences> <Volume Settings>.

Select a setting.

Setting Description Action

<Entry Tone> Conrmation sound each time a k

ey on the

operation panel or button on the display is

pressed

Select <On> (produce a tone) or

<Off> (not produce a tone).

<Invalid Entry Tone> Sound produced when an invalid key operation is

performed, such as when you enter a number

outside the valid setting range

<Restock Supplies Tone> Sound produced when a toner cartridge is almost

empty

<Warning Tone> Sound telling that a trouble has occurred on the

machine, such as a paper jam, incorrect

operation, or press of an inoperable key

<Job Done Tone> Sound produced when an operation such as

printing is complete

<Energy Saver Alert> Sound produced when the machine enters or

exits sleep mode

Basic Operations

131

Entering Sleep Mode

8054-034

The sleep mode function r

educes the amount of power consumed by the machine by disabling power ow to the

operation panel. If no operations will be performed on the machine for a while, such as during a lunch break, you can

save power simply by pressing

on the operation panel.

When in sleep mode

● When the machine enters sleep mode, lights up yellow green.

Situations in which the machine does not enter sleep mode

● The machine will not enter sleep mode in the follo

wing situations:

- When the machine is in operation

- When the Data indicator is lit up or blinking

- When the machine is performing an operation such as adjustment or cleaning

- When a paper jam occurs

- When the menu screen is displayed

- When an error message is displayed on the screen (There are some exceptions. The machine sometimes

enters sleep mode when an error message is displayed.)

- When the SSID/network key screen for Direct Connection is displayed

- When settings are being imported or exported

● If the situation preventing the machine from entering sleep mode continues, the machine performs

automatic adjustment (automatic calibration) to maintain print quality. Calibration uses toner and may

therefore result in a decrease in the lifetime of the toner cartridges.

Changing the Auto Sleep Time Value

Auto Sleep Time is a function that automatically puts the machine into the sleep mode if it remains idle for a

specied length of time. We recommend using the factory default settings ( <Timer/Energy

Settings>(P. 272) ) to reduce power usage. If you want to change the amount of time that elapses before the

machine enters the auto sleep mode, perform the procedure below.

Basic Operations

132

<Menu> <Preferences> <Timer/Energy Settings> <Auto Sleep Time> Set the amount of

time that elapses befor

e the machine automatically enters sleep mode

Changing the Sleep Mode Setting to the Specied Time

You can congur

e a setting so that the machine is placed into the sleep mode at the specied time. You can also

congure a setting so that the sleep mode is released at the specied time.

<Menu> <Preferences> <Timer/Energy Settings> Select <Auto Sleep Daily Timer> or <Sleep

Mode Exit Time Settings> <On> Enter the time

Exiting Sleep Mode

You can press or any other key on the operation panel to exit the sleep mode.

Basic Operations

133

Using a USB Memory Device

8054-035

When using a USB memory

, insert it into the USB port on the machine.

Before using a USB memory device

● The supported formats of USB memory de

vice are FAT16 and FAT32.

The following devices and uses are not supported:

● USB memory devices that have security functions installed

● USB memory devices that do not meet the USB standards

● Memory card readers connected via USB

● USB memory devices that are used with extension cables

● USB memory devices used via a USB hub

Handling of USB memory devices

● Make sure that the USB memory device is correctly oriented before inserting it. If you attempt to insert it in

incorrect orientation, the memory device and the machine may be damaged.

● Do not remove, bump or otherwise move the USB memory device while data is being imported or exported.

Also, do not turn OFF the machine while processing is in progress.

● You may not be able to save data properly on some USB memory devices.

● If <Scr

een When Memory Media Connected> is set to <On>, the screen of whether to start the memory

media print is displayed when you insert a USB memory device while the Home screen is displayed.

<Screen When Memory Media Connected>(P. 361)

Basic Operations

134

● Because scr

eens may not appear in sleep mode, exit sleep mode before inserting a USB memory device.

◼ Remo

ve the USB Memory Device

● Always use the follo

wing procedure when removing USB memory devices. Using other methods to remove

USB memory devices may result in damage to the device and the machine.

Press

Select <Device Status>.

Select <Remove Memory Media>.

➠ W

ait until the <The memory media can be safely removed.> message is displayed.

Disconnect the USB memory device.

LINKS

Printing from a USB Memory Device (Memory Media Print)(P. 149)

Basic Operations

135

Printing

Printing ................................................................................................................................................................

137

Printing from a Computer ................................................................................................................................ 138

Canceling Prints ........................................................................................................................................... 140

Checking the Printing Status and Log ........................................................................................................... 142

Various Printing Methods ................................................................................................................................. 144

Printing a Document Secured by a PIN (Secure Print) ................................................................................... 145

Printing via Secure Print ........................................................................................................................ 146

Printing from a USB Memory Device (Memory Media Print) ......................................................................... 149

Receiving I-Faxes for Printing ....................................................................................................................... 156

Printing

136

Printing

8054-036

Ther

e are many ways to use the machine as a printer. You can print documents on your computer by using the printer

driver or print image les from a USB memory device. Make full use of the print functions to suit your needs.

◼ Printing from a Computer

You can print a document made on your computer by using the printer driver.

Printing from a Computer(P. 138)

◼ Useful Functions When Printing

ou can assign a PIN to the print data to enhance security or directly print les stored in a USB memory device.

Various Printing Methods(P. 144)

Printing from Mobile Devices

● Linking mobile de

vices such as smartphones or tablets to this machine provides a quick and easy way to

print photos and web pages.

Linking with Mobile Devices(P. 160)

Printing

137

Printing from a Computer

8054-037

ou can print a document made with an application on your computer by using the printer driver. There are useful

settings on the printer driver, such as enlarging/reducing and 2-sided printing, that enable you to print your

documents in various ways. Before you can use this function, you need to complete some procedures, such as

installing the printer driver on your computer. For more information, see the manuals for the relevant drivers on the

online manual website.

About the Printer Driver Help(P. 138)

Basic Printing Operations(P. 138)

About the Printer Driver Help

Clicking [Help] on the printer driver screen displays the Help screen. On this screen, you can see the detailed

descriptions that are not in the User's Guide.

Basic Printing Operations

This section describes how to print a document on your computer by using the printer driver.

Paper settings on the machine

● Normally

, it is necessary to specify the paper size and type for the paper loaded in each paper source before

proceeding to printing.

Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box.

Select the printer driver for this machine, and click [Preferences] or [Properties].

Specify the print settings as necessary, and click [OK].

● Switch the tab accor

ding to the settings.

Printing

138

Click [Print] or [OK].

➠ Printing starts.

● If you want to cancel printing, see

Canceling Prints(P. 140) .

LINKS

Checking the Printing Status and Log(P. 142)

When Printing from the Windows Store App(P. 439)

Printing

139

Canceling Prints

8054-038

ou can cancel printing from your computer or on the operation panel of the machine.

From a Computer(P. 140)

From the Operation Panel(P. 141)

From a Computer

You can cancel printing from the printer icon displayed on the system tray on the desktop.

Double-click the printer icon.

When the printer icon is not displayed

● Open

the printer folder (

Displaying the Printer Folder(P

. 433) ), right-click the printer driver icon for

this machine, and click [See what's printing] (or double-click the icon of the printer driver for this machine).

Select the document you want to cancel, and click [Document]

[Cancel].

Click [Yes].

➠ Printing of the selected document is canceled.

● Se

veral pages may be output after you cancel printing.

Canceling from the Remote UI

● Y

ou can cancel printing from the [Job Status] page on the Remote UI:

Checking Current Status of Print

Documents

(P. 242)

Canceling from an application

● On some applications, a screen like shown below appears. You can cancel printing by clicking [Cancel].

Printing

140

From the Operation Panel

Cancel printing using

or .

◼ Pr

ess

to Cancel

If the Screen Displays a List of Documents When is Pressed

Select the document you want to cancel, and select <Cancel> <Yes>.

◼ Check the Print Job Status Befor

e Canceling

<Print Job> <Job Status> Select the document <Cancel> <Yes>

● Se

veral pages may be output after you cancel printing.

LINKS

Basic Printing Operations(P. 138)

Checking the Printing Status and Log(P. 142)

Printing

141

Checking the Printing Status and Log

8054-039

ou can check the current print statuses and the logs for printed documents.

● When <Display Job Log> is set to <Off>, you cannot check the print logs. <Display Job Log>(P. 366)

Useful in the Following Cases

● When your documents ar

e not printed for a long time, you may want to see the waiting list of the

documents waiting to be printed.

● When you cannot nd your printouts that you thought had been printed, you may want to see whether an

error has occurred.

Press .

Select <Print Job>.

Check the print statuses and logs.

To check the print statuses

<Job Status> Select the document whose status you want to check.

➠ Displays detailed information about the document.

To check the print logs

Select the document whose log you want to check.

● <OK> is displayed when a document was printed successfully

, and <Error> is displayed when a

document failed to be printed because it was canceled or there was some error.

➠ Displays detailed information about the document.

● The displayed document name or user name may not r

eect the actual document or user name.

Printing

142

When a three-digit number is shown in the case of <Error>

● This number r

epresents an error code. For more information, see "Troubleshooting (FAQ)" on the

online manual website.

LINKS

Basic Printing Operations(P. 138)

Canceling Prints(P. 140)

Printing

143

Various Printing Methods

8054-03A

This section describes ho

w to print a document by adding a PIN, how to print a le stored on a USB memory device

without using the printer driver, and how to receive and print I-Faxes.

Printing a Document Secured by

a PIN (Secur

e Print)(P. 145)

Printing from a USB Memory

vice (Memory Media Print)

(P. 149)

Receiving I-Faxes for

Printing

(P. 156)

Printing

144

Printing a Document Secured by a PIN (Secure Print)

8054-03C

By setting a PIN to a document when printing fr

om a computer, the document is held in the memory of the machine,

and is not printed until the correct PIN is entered on the operation panel of the machine. This function is called "Secure

Print," and the document that is protected by a PIN is called a "secured document." Using Secure Print keeps printouts

of condential documents from being left unattended.

Printing via Secure Print(P. 146)

Printing

145

Printing via Secure Print

8054-03E

This section describes ho

w to print a document from an application as a secured document. The rst part of this

section describes how to send a secured document to the machine, and the second part of this section describes how

to print the secured document on the machine.

Sending a Secured Document from a Computer to the Machine(P. 146)

Printing Out Secured Documents(P. 147)

Changing the Valid Time Period for Secured Documents(P. 147)

Sending a Secured Document from a Computer to the Machine

Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box.

Select the printer driver for this machine, and click [Preferences] or [Properties].

Select [Secured Print] in [Output Method].

➠ The [Information] pop-up scr

een is displayed. Check the message, and click [Yes] or [No].

Specify the print settings as necessary, and click [OK].

● Switch the tab accor

ding to the settings.

Click [Print] or [OK].

➠ After the secur

ed document is sent to the machine, it is held in the memory of the machine waiting to be

printed.

Printing

146

Printing Out Secured Documents

Prints secured documents sent to the machine. After a valid time period ( Changing the Valid Time Period for

Secur

ed Documents(P. 147) ) has elapsed, the secured document will be deleted from the memory of the machine

and can no longer be printed.

● If secur

ed documents are left unprinted, they occupy the memory and may prevent the machine from

printing even ordinary (not secured) documents. Make sure that you print your secured documents as soon

as you can.

● You can check how much memory is being used for secured documents.

Select <Secure Print> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 91)

Select the secured document to print.

If a screen for user selection is displayed

● If

secured documents from two or more users are stored in memory, the screen for user selection is

displayed prior to the screen for le selection. Select your user name.

Enter the PIN, and press

➠ Printing starts.

● If you want to cancel printing, select <Cancel> <Yes>.

Changing the Valid Time Period for Secured Documents

ou can change the valid time period from the time secured document data is sent to the machine until the time it is

deleted within a certain period of time.

Select <Menu> in the Home screen.

Home Screen(P. 91)

Select <Function Settings>.

Select <Secure Print>.

● If the login scr

een appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.

Logging in to the Machine(P. 101)

Select <Secure Print Deletion Time>.

Printing

147

When <Secure Print Deletion Time> cannot be selected

● Set <Use Secur

e Print> to <On>, restart the machine, and then start the setting procedure again.

Disabling Secure Print

● Set <Use Secure Print> to <Off>, and then restart the machine.

Specify how long the machine holds secured documents.

● The secur

ed document is deleted from the memory of the machine unless it is printed before the time

specied here elapses.

Press

LINKS

Checking the Printing Status and Log(P. 142)

Restricting Printing from a Computer(P. 232)

Printing

148

Printing from a USB Memory Device (Memory Media

Print)

8054-03F

ou can print les directly by connecting a USB memory device to the machine. Using this function, you can print

without using a computer. For more information about the available USB memory devices and how to insert/remove

the USB memory device, see

Using a USB Memory Device(P. 134) .

● It is necessary to set <Use Print Function> to <On>. <Memory Media Settings>(P. 361)

Select <Memory Media Print> in the Home screen.

Home Screen(P. 91)

● If <Scr

een When Memory Media Connected> is set to <On>, the screen of whether to start the memory media

print is displayed when you insert a USB memory device while the Home screen is displayed. Selecting

<Memory Media Print> displays the Memory Media Print screen.

Using a USB Memory Device(P. 134)

<Screen When Memory Media Connected>(P. 361)

Select <Select File and Print>.

● Y

ou can print thumbnails of the JPEG les stored in a USB memory device. To print the images in

thumbnails, select <Index Print> on the screen, and proceed to the next step.

● You can change the le sort order when selecting a le to be printed.

● For information about how to display les based on the same criteria every time, see

<File Sort Default

Settings>(P

. 360) .

Select the le to print, and pr

ess

● Y

ou can select multiple les.

● T

o clear a selection, select the le you have selected (

) again, and press .

Printing

149

● Selecting a folder displays its contents. T

o return to the folder in the upper level, select

● Folders and les lo

wer than the third directory are not displayed.

● When you move to another folder, the previous le selections will be cleared.

To select all les

Select <Select All>.

● T

o clear all selections, select <Clear All>.

If le types are mixed, select <JPEG/TIFF> or <PDF>.

Select <Apply>.

Specify the print settings as necessary.

● Select the item you want to set.

Specify the number of copies. Enter a quantity using numeric keys, and press .

Select whether to print data in black and white or color.

<Paper>

Select the paper source that contains the paper to use for printing.

Uses the paper that is loaded in the manual feed slot to print les.

Uses the paper that is loaded in the paper drawer (Drawer 1) of the machine to print les.

Printing

150

● <N on 1> is not available for printing TIFF les.

Prints data for multiple pages of image data on the same side of a sheet of paper. You can specify the number

of pages to print on one side of a sheet of paper. For example, to print four pages on one side of a sheet of

paper, select <4 on 1>.

<2-Sided>

You can make 2-sided printouts. Select the binding position.

Prints on both sides of paper in such a way that the printed pages ar

e opened horizontally when bound.

Prints on both sides of paper in such a way that the printed pages ar

e opened vertically when bound.

● <2-Sided> may not be available with some sizes or types of paper. Available Paper(P. 416)

You can change the print settings for JPEG and TIFF images.

ou can select the type of original depending on the image to print.

Gives priority to printing photo images smoothly

Gives priority to printing text clearly.

Printing

151

ou can adjust the brightness of images. Adjust the brightness, and press

● Y

ou can set the <Brightness> of TIFF les only when they are JPEG-compressed.

You can select the printing method used to reproduce halftones (the intermediate range between the lighter

and darker areas of an image) for optimal image quality.

Prints images with ne gr

adation, such as digital camera images, with a smooth nish.

This mode is suitable for printing data with text and thin lines and the curved lines of CAD data, etc.

● The stability of the te

xture and xed toner may be reduced when <Error Diffusion> is used.

You can change the print settings for PDFs.

ou can adjust the brightness of images. Adjust the brightness, and press

Specify pages you want to print.

Prints all pages.

<Specied Pages>

Specify the r

ange of pages you want to print. Enter the desired value in each of <First Page> and <Last Page>

using the numeric keys, and select <Apply>.

Printing

152

● When the specied page r

ange does not match any of the pages of the PDF le, printing is not performed.

Specify whether to enlarge or reduce the original according to the print range of paper. Note that size

enlargement/reduction will not affect the aspect ratio of the original.

Specify whether to extend the print range to the paper size.

● If you set to <On>, part of print data may not be printed in edge ar

eas or paper may be partly smudged

depending on the document.

This setting species whether to print annotations in the PDF le.

<Off>

Prints no annotations.

<Auto>

Prints only those annotations that ar

e specied to be printed in the PDF le.

Specify whether to use processing that standardizes the thickness of ne lines.

<On>

Standar

dizes the thickness of ne lines.

Standardizes and slims down the thickness of ne lines. Lines may become too ne and/or indistinct.

<Off>

Does not standardize the thickness of ne lines. Depending on drawing position and the angle of the line, ne

lines may be drawn thicker or may not be uniform.

ou can print password protected PDF les by entering the password required to open them. Enter the

password, and select <Apply>.

<Other>

Printing

153

You can select the printing method used to reproduce halftones (the intermediate range between the lighter

and dark

er areas of an image) for optimal image quality. You can make this setting for each of the types of

image contained in one document. See

<Halftones>(P. 347) for the description of the setting.

<Pur

e Black Text>

You can print black text of which color information is "R=G=B=0%," "C=M=Y=100%," or "C=M=Y=0%/K=100%,"

using only the K (black) toner. See

<Pure Black Text>(P. 343) for the description of the setting.

Specify the printing method used when black te

xt overlaps a colored background or gure. See

<Black

Overprint>(P

. 343) for the description of the setting.

Select the source prole for color matching to print RGB data, according to the monitor you are using. See

<RGB Source Pr

ole>(P. 343) for the description of the setting.

This setting allows you to specify the simulation target to print the CMYK (Cyan Magenta Yellow blacK) data.

The machine converts CMYK data into a device dependent CMYK color model based on this simulation. See

<CMYK Simulation Pr

ole>(P. 344) for the description of the setting.

Specify whether to convert gray data to CMYK (cyan, magenta, yellow, and black) data using the grayscale

prole of the machine. See

<Use Grayscale Pr

ole>(P. 345) for the description of the setting.

Select the appropriate prole for print data. This option can be specied for each image type in one

document. See

<Output Pr

ole>(P. 345) for the description of the setting.

Select the element to be prioritized when making color adjustment in <RGB Source Prole>. See

<Matching Method>(P. 346) for the description of the setting.

Specify whether to o

verprint CMYK data, with overprint specied, as composite output. See

<Composite

Overprint>(P

. 348) for the description of the setting.

Specify the way of printing color data in black and white. See

<Grayscale Conversion>(P. 348) for the

description of the setting.

Adjust the toner density to be used for printing. See <Density>(P. 312) for the description of the setting.

oner Volume Correction>

When the toner volume for text or lines exceeds the limit value of the machine, make a correction so that

the toner volume does not exceed the limit value. See

<Toner Volume Correction>(P. 315) for the

description of the setting.

Selecting <On> prints in toner saving mode. Select <On> when you want to check the layout or other

appearance characteristics before proceeding to nal printing of a large job. See <Toner Save>(P. 313)

for the description of the setting.

Specify the processing method used to reproduce gradation. <High 2> gives ner gradation than <High

1>. See <Gradation>(P. 313) for the description of the setting.

When ne lines or small te

xt are faded, increase the density to give less faded print. See

<Density Fine

Adjustment>(P

. 313) for the description of the setting.

Specify the resolution to process print data. See

<Resolution>(P. 314) for the description of the setting.

Specify the mode to print data with a smooth nish. If the quality of the printout is not acceptable in

<Mode 1> (default), try another mode. See

<Special Smoothing Mode>(P. 314) for the description of

the setting.

<Line Contr

ol>

Printing

154

Specify the processing method used to reproduce lines. See <Line Control>(P. 315) for the description

of the setting.

Congur

e a setting to print text or ne lines in bold. See

<Width Adjustment>(P. 315) for the

description of the setting.

Congur

e the smoothing setting to print the outline of graphics (e.g., illustrations created using

applications) or text with a smooth nish. <Level 2> applies a stronger smoothing effect than <Level 1>.

You can apply the setting separately for text and graphics. See

<Advanced Smoothing>(P. 316) for the

description of the setting.

<Gr

adation Smoothing>

Congure the smoothing setting to print the gradation (color density) of graphics (e.g., illustrations

created using applications) or bit map images with a smooth nish. <Level 2> applies a stronger

smoothing effect than <Level 1>. You can apply the setting separately for graphics and images. See

<Gradation Smoothing>(P. 317) for the description of the setting.

Select <Start Printing>.

➠ Printing starts.

● If you want to cancel printing, select <Cancel> <Yes>.

● If you always want to print with the same settings: Memory Media Print(P. 130)

LINKS

<Access Files>(P. 356)

Printing

155

Receiving I-Faxes for Printing

8054-03H

Internet Fax (I-Fax) is a function that attaches a le to an e-mail as a TIFF image le and tr

ansfers it. This machine can

receive I-Faxes and print them. I-Faxes can be received automatically at the specied intervals, and also received

manually.

Conguring the I-Fax RX Settings

(P. 156)

Receiving I-Faxes Manually(P. 158)

Conguring the I-Fax RX Settings

Congure the I-Fax RX setting from a computer, and the print settings from the operation panel of this machine.

● For mor

e information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the

Remote UI, see

Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 248) .

From a Computer

Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P

. 238)

Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.

Remote UI Screen(P. 239)

Select [Network Settings]

[E-Mail/I-Fax Settings].

Click [Edit].

Specify the required settings.

Printing

156

[POP Server]

Enter alphanumeric char

acters as the POP3 server name or IP address for receiving I-Faxes.

[User Name]

Enter alphanumeric characters as the user name for the specied e-mail account.

[Set/Change Password]

To set or change the password, select the check box and enter alphanumeric characters in [Password].

[POP RX]

Select the check box to receive I-Faxes.

[POP Interval]

This sets the interval (in minutes) used for automatically connecting to the POP3 server. If there are any I-Fax

documents on the server, they are automatically received and printed.

To disable automatic reception

● Set

[POP Interval] to [0]. When [0] is set, you receive I-Faxes manually.

Receiving I-Faxes

Manually

(P. 158)

[Use APOP Authentication]

Select the check box to use APOP to encrypt the password during the authentication process.

[Use TLS for POP]

Select the check box to encrypt communication with the POP3 server using TLS. Select the check box for

[Verify Certicate] or [Add CN to Verication Items] depending on your needs.

Click [OK].

Restart the machine.

Restarting the Machine(P. 87)

From the Operation Panel

Specify the print settings as necessary.

Specifying the setting for 2-sided printing

<Print on Both Sides>(P. 354)

Printing

157

Specifying the paper size

<RX Print Size>(P. 355)

● Depending on the network you ar

e using, you may need to change the POP3 port setting (

Changing Port

Numbers(P

. 202) ). For more information, contact your Internet service provider or Network Administrator.

Receiving I-Faxes Manually

If the I-Fax RX setting is completely congur

ed from the POP3 server, you can manually receive I-Faxes and

print them. When you want to connect to the server before receiving I-Faxes automatically, or when the

machine is congured so that it does not receive I-Faxes automatically, use the method below to receive I-Faxes

manually.

Press

Select <RX Job>.

Select <Check E-Mail RX>.

➠ Connect to the POP3 server. If ther

e is a document on the server, printing begins.

● Printing a Received Document on Both Sides of Paper: <Print on Both Sides>(P. 354)

● Continuing printing e

ven when toner is running low:

<Continue Print. When Amount in Cart.

w>(P. 354)

Printing

158

Linking with Mobile Devices

Linking with Mobile Devices ....................................................................................................................

160

Connecting with Mobile Devices ...................................................................................................................... 161

Connecting via a Wireless LAN Router (LAN Connection) .............................................................................. 162

Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode) ...................................................................................................... 163

Utilizing the Machine through Applications .................................................................................................... 166

Using AirPrint .................................................................................................................................................... 169

Printing with AirPrint .................................................................................................................................... 174

If AirPrint Cannot Be Used ............................................................................................................................ 177

Managing the Machine by the Remote Control .............................................................................................. 178

Linking with Mobile Devices

159

Linking with Mobile Devices

8054-03J

Linking the machine with mobile de

vices such as smart phones and tablets enables you to use an appropriate

application to perform printing, or other operation with ease. In addition, you can operate the machine from mobile

devices via remote control to conrm printing status and change the settings of the machine.

Connecting with Mobile Devices(P. 161)

Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode)(P. 163)

Utilizing the Machine through Applications(P. 166)

Using AirPrint(P. 169)

Managing the Machine by the Remote Control(P. 178)

● Depending on your mobile de

vice, the machine may not operate correctly.

● When [Restrict IPP Port (Port Number: 631)] or [Restrict mDNS Port (Port Number: 5353)] is enabled in

Security Policy (

Security Policy(P. 251) ), you can use neither Mopria

or AirPrint.

Linking with Mobile Devices

160

Connecting with Mobile Devices

8054-03K

Ther

e are two methods used to connect a mobile device with the machine: connecting via a wireless LAN router, and

communicating wirelessly and directly with the machine. Select a connection method in accordance with the

communication environment and the device you are using. Perform communication with mobile devices from <Mobile

Portal> (

Home Screen(P. 91) ).

◼ Connecting via a Wir

eless LAN Router

Just as connecting a computer to the machine, connect a mobile device to the machine via a wireless LAN router.

Connecting via a Wireless LAN Router (LAN Connection)(P. 162)

◼ Connecting Dir

ectly

Directly connect a mobile device to the machine wirelessly without using wireless LAN. It is possible to immediately

connect to the machine wirelessly even outside of a wireless LAN environment.

Connecting Directly (Access Point

Mode)(P

. 163)

Linking with Mobile Devices

161

Connecting via a Wireless LAN Router (LAN Connection)

8054-03L

If a wir

eless LAN router is connected to the network connected to the machine, you can establish a communication

with a mobile device via the wireless LAN router in the same way for a computer. For information about how to

connect a mobile device to your wireless LAN router, see the instruction manuals for your networking devices or

contact your manufacturer. Connect the machine to a router via the wired or wireless LAN.

Setting Up the Network

Envir

onment(P. 11)

● T

o perform the procedures below, use the IPv4 address.

Setting IPv4 Address(P. 28)

● Select <LAN Connection> and pr

oceed with the procedure, if the Direct Connection screen is displayed after

<Mobile Portal> is selected in the procedure below.

● For information about the operating systems compatible with Canon PRINT Business, the detailed setting

procedure, and the operating procedure, please see the application's Help or the Canon website (https://

global.canon/gomp/).

Select <Mobile Portal> in the Home screen.

Home Screen(P. 91)

Select <Display Device Name/IP Address>.

Connect from the mobile device to the IP address that appears on the screen.

Linking with Mobile Devices

162

Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode)

8054-03R

1660-068

Even in an envir

onment without a wireless LAN router, using "Access Point Mode," which can directly connect a mobile

device to the machine wirelessly, enables you to connect the mobile device on hand to the machine without dicult

settings.

Preparing for Direct Connection (Access Point Mode)(P. 163)

Connecting Directly(P. 164)

Preparing for Direct Connection (Access Point Mode)

Establish a connection by using Access Point Mode in the following order.

Check the network settings of the machine.

● Set the IPv4 addr

ess.

Setting IPv4 Address(P. 28)

Preparing the mobile device

● Congur

e settings to connect the mobile device to Wi-Fi.

Put the machine into the connection standby status.

● <Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <Direct Connection Settings> set

<Use Dir

ect Connection> to <On>.

Specifying the value for time until auto termination

● Y

ou can specify the time to automatically establish a disconnection when the direct connection is enabled.

<Time Until Direct Connection Termination>(P. 278)

Connecting multiple mobile de

vices at the same time

● Congure the machine's SSID and network key arbitrarily.

<Access Point Mode Settings>(P. 278)

Linking with Mobile Devices

163

Canon PRINT Business

● For information about the oper

ating systems compatible with Canon PRINT Business, the detailed setting

procedure, and the operating procedure, please see the application's Help or the Canon website (https://

global.canon/gomp/).

Connecting Directly

● It may tak

e time until a connection of the machine and the mobile device is established.

Select <Mobile Portal> in the Home screen.

Home Screen(P. 91)

● When any mobile de

vice is already connected, press

, and proceed to step 3.

Select <Connect>.

Select <Display SSID/Network Key>.

Congure the Wi-Fi settings fr

om the mobile device using the SSID and network key

information that appear on the display.

When the target operation is completed, press , then select <Disconnect> <Yes>.

● Select <Connection Information> on the screen under the direct connection to check the connected mobile

device.

● When <Keep Enabled If SSID/Ntwk Key Spcfd> is set to <On>, it is not necessary to perform the operation of

selecting <Connect>. <Keep Enabled If SSID/Ntwk Key Spcfd>(P. 278)

● While connecting via dir

ect connection, you may not be able to connect to the Internet depending on the

mobile device you are using.

● If a wireless connection from the mobile device is not performed within 5 minutes while the SSID and

network key are displayed, the connection waiting state terminates.

● If the status without data transmission between the mobile device and the machine continues during

communication by direct connection, the communication may end.

● Power saving performance of sleep mode degrades while connecting via direct connection.

● If the machine is used with a wireless LAN, you need to keep the machine connected to the wireless LAN

when using direct connection. When the machine is not connected to a wireless LAN or the connection

Linking with Mobile Devices

164

process is not complete yet, the direct connection process cannot begin. If the connection between the

machine and the wir

eless LAN is lost during communication through direct connection, the communication

may end.

● When you nish the desired operation, be sure to terminate the connection between the machine and the

mobile device. If they remain connected, power saving performance of sleep mode degrades.

● If you use the direct connection, do not set the IP address manually on the mobile device. Doing so may

prevent proper communication after using the direct connection.

Linking with Mobile Devices

165

Utilizing the Machine through Applications

8054-03S

Perform printing and other oper

ations from the mobile device connected to the machine using applications. Various

applications including those exclusive to Canon are supported. Use properly in accordance with your device, the

application, and the situation.

◼ Using Canon PRINT Business

This application is used to perform printing and other operations from mobile devices that support iOS/Android. When

printing, it is not necessary to perform operations on the machine. For more information on supported operating

systems, detailed setting methods, and operations, see the application's Help or the Canon website (https://

global.canon/gomp/).

● Y

ou can download Canon PRINT Business for free, but you will be charged the Internet connection fee.

◼ Printing with Canon Print Service

ou can easily print from the menu of applications that support the Android print subsystem. For more information on

supported operating systems and detailed settings and procedures, see the Canon website (https://global.canon/).

◼ Using Mopria

The machine also supports Mopria

. Mopria

enables you to perform printing and other operations from a mobile

Android device using common operations and settings regardless of the manufacturer or model. For example,

businesses using multiple Mopria

compatible devices from different manufacturers can print from the same printer

and businesspeople on-the-go can use a Mopria

compatible device with a local certied printer without having to

install a separate application. For more information on supporting models or operation environments, see http://

www.mopria.org.

Conrming Mopria

Settings

Registr

ation]

[Network Settings] [Mopria Settings] [Edit] Check that the [Use Mopria]

check bo

x is selected

[OK]

Linking with Mobile Devices

166

If you enable the Mopria

setting, the follo

wing settings in <Network> are set to

<On>.

● Use HTTP

● IPP Print Settings

● IPv4Use mDNS

● IPv6Use mDNS

◼ Printing fr

om Chrome OS

You can perform printing from Chrome OS without downloading a dedicated application or installing a driver. To print

with the machine, it is necessary to enable Mopria

Conrming Mopria

Settings

Registr

ation]

[Network Settings] [Mopria Settings] [Edit] Check that the [Use Mopria]

check bo

x is selected

[OK]

If you enable the Mopria

setting, the follo

wing settings in <Network> are set to

<On>.

● Use HTTP

● IPP Print Settings

● IPv4Use mDNS

● IPv6Use mDNS

Printing

Before printing, make sure that the machine is turned ON and connected to a

Chromebook.

● For information on checking the connection status, see Setting Up the Network Environment(P. 11) .

● See the Chr

omebook Help page (https://support.google.com/chromebook/answer/7225252) for more

information on printing.

● Y

ou can also connect the machine to a Chromebook using a USB cable. See the Chromebook website

(https://support.google.com/chromebook/answer/7225252) for information on the connection

procedure.

Linking with Mobile Devices

167

● Printing fr

om Chrome OS may not be supported, depending on your country or region.

Linking with Mobile Devices

168

Using AirPrint

8054-03U

This section describes the settings r

equired to use AirPrint and the procedures to be performed using Apple devices.

AirPrint Settings

Conguring AirPrint Settings(P

. 169)

Displaying the Screen for AirPrint(P. 171)

Functions of the AirPrint

Printing with AirPrint(P. 174)

Troubleshooting

If AirPrint Cannot Be Used(P. 177)

Conguring AirPrint Settings

ou can register information, including the name of the machine and installation location, that is used for identifying

the machine. You can also disable the AirPrint function of the machine. Use the Remote UI to change these settings.

● For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the

Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 248) .

Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.

Starting Remote

UI(P

. 238)

Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.

Remote UI Screen(P. 239)

● If you ar

e using a mobile device, such as an iPad, iPhone, or iPod touch, read "click" as "tap" in this section.

Select [Network Settings]

[AirPrint Settings].

Click [Edit].

Linking with Mobile Devices

169

Specify the required settings.

[Use AirPrint]

Select the check bo

x to enable AirPrint. To disable AirPrint, clear the check box.

[Printer Name]

Enter the name of the machine. If an mDNS name has already been registered in [mDNS Settings] (

Conguring DNS(P

. 51) ), the registered name is displayed.

[Location]

Enter the location of the machine. If a location has already been registered in [Device Information Settings]

([Device Management] in [Management Settings] (Settings/Registration)), the registered name is displayed.

[Latitude]

Enter the latitude of the location where the machine is installed.

[Longitude]

Enter the longitude of the location where the machine is installed.

Click [OK].

If you select [Use AirPrint], the following settings in <Network> are set to <On>.

● Use HT

● IPP Print Settings

● IPv4 Use mDNS

● IPv6 Use mDNS

● If you change [Printer Name] that you have once specied, you may be unable to print any mor

e from the

Mac that has been able to be used for printing so far. This phenomenon occurs because <mDNS Name> (

Conguring DNS

(P. 51) ) of IPv4 is also changed automatically. In this case, add the machine to the Mac

again.

● Entering the printer name makes it easier to identify multiple printers that support AirPrint.

Linking with Mobile Devices

170

◼ Changing the Setting of Functions Available with AirPrint

If you want to disable functions that you ar

e not going to use with AirPrint or encrypt communications, congure the

necessary setting using the operation panel.

Changing Print Settings

To perform printing with AirPrint, IPP protocol is used.

Turning the Function On/Off

You can specify whether to perform printing with AirPrint. The factory default setting is <On>.

<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <TCP/IP Settings> <IPP Print Settings> <Use

IPP Printing> Select <Off> or <On>

Changing the TLS Setting

ou can specify whether to encrypt communications using TLS when performing printing with AirPrint. The

factory default setting is <Off>.

<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <TCP/IP Settings> <IPP Print

Settings> <Allow IPP Printing Only When Using TLS> Select <Off> or <On>

Displaying the Screen for AirPrint

ou can display the screen for AirPrint, on which you can not only access the AirPrint Settings but also view

information about consumables, such as paper and toner cartridge. Further, you can congure security function

settings.

Select [System Preferences]

[Printers & Scanners], then add the machine to the Mac

you ar

e using.

● If the machine has alr

eady been added, this operation is not required.

Select this machine from the list of printers in [Printers & Scanners].

Click [Options & Supplies].

Click [Show Printer Webpage].

Linking with Mobile Devices

171

● T

o change the AirPrint settings, it is necessary to log in as an administrator.

◼ AirPrint-Dedicated Page

When you log in with administrator privileges, the AirPrint-dedicated page is displayed as shown below.

[AirPrint Settings]

Enables you to check the values enter

ed in the AirPrint settings, such as the name and location of the

machine. You can click [Edit] to change the settings.

[Other Settings]

[Print Security Settings]

Congur

e the print security settings using TLS or authentication.

[TLS Settings]

Enables you to change the key and certicate used for TLS.

Conguring the Ke

y and Certicate for

TLS(P. 205)

[Key and Certicate Settings]

Enables you to generate and install a key and certicate, or request a certicate to be issued.

Conguring the Ke

y and Certicate for TLS(P. 205)

[Consumables Information]

Enables you to check the information of each paper sour

ce and consumables of the machine and the device

version.

Linking with Mobile Devices

172

Trademarks

Apple, Bonjour, iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, Mac, macOS, OS X and Safari are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the

U.S. and other countries. AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple Inc.

Linking with Mobile Devices

173

Printing with AirPrint

8054-03W

ou can print from an iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, or Mac without using a printer driver.

Printing from an iPad, iPhone, or iPod touch(P. 174)

Printing from a Mac(P. 175)

System Requir

ements

One of the following Apple devices is required to print with AirPrint.

● iPad (all models)

● iPhone (3GS or later)

● iPod touch (3r

d generation or later)

● Mac (Mac OS X 10.7 or later)

OS X v10.9 or later when using a USB connection

Network Environment

One of the following environments is required.

● An envir

onment where an Apple device and the machine are connected to the same LAN

● An environment where an Apple device and the machine are connected directly

● An environment where a Mac is connected to the machine via USB

● For printing, it is r

equired to set <Use IPP Printing> to <On>.

Changing the Setting of Functions

Available with AirPrint(P

. 171)

Printing from an iPad, iPhone, or iPod touch

Make sure that the machine is turned ON and connected to the Apple device.

● For ho

w to make sure of this, see

Setting Up the Network Environment(P. 11) .

● For information on the Dir

ect Connection, see

Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode)(P. 163) .

Linking with Mobile Devices

174

From the application on your Apple device, tap to display the menu options.

Tap [Print].

Select this machine from [Printer].

● The printers connected to the network are displayed here. Select this machine in this step.

● The

screen for selecting this machine in [Printer] is not displayed on applications that do not support

AirPrint. You cannot print by using those applications.

Specify the print settings as necessary.

● The available settings and paper sizes differ depending on the application you ar

e using.

Tap [Print].

➠ Printing starts.

Checking the print status

● During printing, pr

ess the Home button of the Apple device twice

tap [Print].

Printing from a Mac

Make sure that the machine is turned ON and connected to the Mac.

● For ho

w to make sure of this, see

Setting Up the Network Environment(P. 11) .

Add the machine to the Mac from [System Preferences] [Printers & Scanners].

● If the machine has alr

eady been added, this operation is not required.

Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box.

● Ho

w to display the print dialog box differs for each application. For more information, see the instruction

manual or Help for the application you are using.

Select the machine in the print dialog box.

● The printers connected to the Mac ar

e displayed. Select this machine in this step.

Linking with Mobile Devices

175

Specify the print settings as necessary.

● The available settings and paper sizes differ depending on the application you ar

e using.

Click [Print].

➠ Printing starts.

Linking with Mobile Devices

176

If AirPrint Cannot Be Used

8054-03X

If AirPrint cannot be used, try taking the follo

wing solutions.

● Make sure that the machine is turned ON. If the machine is turned ON, rst turn it OFF, then wait for at least 10

seconds and then turn it back ON to check if the problem is solved.

● Make sure that no error messages are displayed on the machine.

● Make sure that Apple devices and the machine are connected to the same LAN. If the machine is turned ON, it may

take several minutes before the machine is ready for communication.

● Make sure that Bonjour on your Apple device is enabled.

● Make sure that the machine is congured to enable execution of jobs from a computer even when no department

ID and password are entered.

Blocking Jobs When Department ID Is Unknown(P. 189)

● For

printing, make sure that the paper is loaded in the machine and that the machine contains a sucient amount

remaining in the toner cartridges.

Displaying the Screen for AirPrint(P. 171)

Linking with Mobile Devices

177

Managing the Machine by the Remote Control

8054-03Y

ou can use the Remote UI from a smart phone or tablet Web browser. You can conrm the machine status or

perform various settings from a mobile device. Note that the Remote UI screen may not be displayed properly for

some devices and environments.

Starting the Remote UI from Mobile Devices

Enter the IP addr

ess of the machine on the Web browser to start the Remote UI. Prior to operation, conrm the IP

address set for the machine (

Viewing Network Settings(P. 34) ). If it is unkno

wn, ask your network administrator.

Start the Web browser of the mobile device.

Enter "http://<the IP address of the machine>/" in the address entry column.

● If you want to use an IPv6 addr

ess, enclose the IPv6 address with brackets.

Example: http://[fe80:2e9e:fcff:fe4e:dbce]/

● For

a "Smartphone Version" of the Remote UI, a portion of items displayed are omitted. If you want to

conrm all of the items, see the "PC Version."

LINKS

Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI)(P. 237)

Linking with Mobile Devices

178

Managing the Machine

Managing the Machine ...............................................................................................................................

180

Setting Access Privileges .................................................................................................................................. 182

Setting the System Manager ID and PIN ...................................................................................................... 183

Setting the Department ID Management ..................................................................................................... 185

Setting a Remote UI PIN ............................................................................................................................... 191

Conguring the Network Security Settings .................................................................................................... 193

Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls ............................................................................................. 195

Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Settings ......................................................................................... 196

Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Settings ..................................................................................... 199

Changing Port Numbers ............................................................................................................................... 202

Setting a Proxy ............................................................................................................................................. 203

Conguring the Key and Certicate for TLS .................................................................................................. 205

Generating the Key and Certicate for Network Communication .......................................................... 209

Conguring the Expiration Check Method for Received Certicates ...................................................... 212

Generating a Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR) ........................................................................ 214

Registering the Key and Certicate for Network Communication .......................................................... 217

Conguring IPSec Settings ........................................................................................................................... 219

Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings ......................................................................................... 226

Restricting the Machine's Functions ................................................................................................................ 230

Restricting Printing from a Computer ........................................................................................................... 232

Restricting USB Functions ............................................................................................................................. 233

Disabling HTTP Communication ................................................................................................................... 234

Disabling Remote UI ..................................................................................................................................... 235

Restricting Use of the Operation Panel ......................................................................................................... 236

Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI) ................................................................................... 237

Starting Remote UI ....................................................................................................................................... 238

Checking the Status and Logs ....................................................................................................................... 242

Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI ................................................................................................... 248

Security Policy .............................................................................................................................................. 251

Importing/Exporting the Setting Data .......................................................................................................... 256

Updating the Firmware ..................................................................................................................................... 259

Initializing Settings ........................................................................................................................................... 262

Managing the Machine

179

Managing the Machine

8054-040

o reduce the various risks associated with the use of this machine, such as leaks of personal information or

unauthorized use by third parties, constant and effective security measures are required. An administrator should

manage important settings, such as access privileges and security settings, to ensure that the machine is used safely.

◼ Conguring the Basic Management System

Setting Access Privileges(P. 182) Conguring the Network Security Settings(P

. 193)

◼ Pr

eparing for Risks from Negligence or Misuse

Restricting the Machine's Functions(P. 230)

◼ Ensuring Effective Management

Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI)(P. 237)

Managing the Machine

180

◼ Managing the System Congur

ation and Settings

Updating the Firmware(P. 259) Initializing Settings(P. 262)

Managing the Machine

181

Setting Access Privileges

8054-041

otect the machine from unauthorized access by only allowing users with access privileges to use the machine.

Access privileges are set separately for system administrators, general users, and the Remote UI. When privileges are

set, the user must enter an ID and PIN to print or change settings.

Set up an account with full access privileges called "System Manager ID" for a system manager. Registering an account

called "Department ID" allo

ws you to manage general users. Using a Department ID, you can set a PIN for using this

machine as well as keep track of the number of pages printed for each department ID. And by setting a Remote UI

Access PIN, you can restrict use of the Remote UI.

System Manager ID

System Manager ID is an account with full access privileges. If you specify a System Manager ID, you need to

log on to the machine using the System Manager ID information in or

der to access items that requires

administrator privileges such as <Network> and <Management Settings>. We recommend that you set and

System Manager ID can be registered.

Setting the System Manager ID and PIN(P. 183)

Department ID (Department ID Management)

You can specify access privileges for a user (or group of users) by registering a Department ID. You can register

multiple Department IDs. If a user tries to oper

ate the machine when Department IDs are enabled, a login

screen is displayed, and the user must enter their own Department ID and PIN to use the machine. Information

such as how many pages have been printed for each Department ID can be compiled.

Setting the

Department ID Management

(P. 185)

Remote UI PIN (Remote UI Access PIN)

This is a PIN for using the Remote UI. Only users who know the PIN can access the Remote UI. Setting a

Remote UI PIN

(P. 191)

Managing the Machine

182

Setting the System Manager ID and PIN

8054-042

Set the system manager account, "System Manager ID

." You can also set a PIN for the System Manager ID. If the

System Manager ID is specied, you can access items that require administrator privileges, for example, <Network>

and <Management Settings>, only when the System Manager ID and PIN have been entered correctly. The System

Manager ID settings information is critical to the security of the machine, so make sure that only Administrators know

the System Manager ID and PIN.

Select <Menu> in the Home screen.

Home Screen(P. 91)

Select <Management Settings>.

If the System Manager ID has already been set

● If the login scr

een appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.

Logging in to the Machine(P. 101)

Select <User Management> <System Manager Information Settings>.

Select <System Manager ID and PIN>.

Specify the System Manager ID and PIN.

● Specify the <System Manager ID> <System Manager PIN>.

● Enter numbers for each item, and pr

ess

● The Conrm scr

een is displayed. Enter the PIN once again to conrm.

● Y

ou cannot register an ID or PIN that consists only of zeros, such as "00" or "0000000."

● To cancel the System Manager ID and PIN settings, clear the information you entered in

and press

with the elds blank.

Setting the System Manager Name

Select <System Manager Name>.

Enter the System Manager Name, and select <Apply>.

● On ho

w to enter text, see

Entering Text(P. 98) .

Managing the Machine

183

● Do not for

get your PIN. If you forget your PIN, contact your dealer or service representative.

Conguring settings via the Remote UI

● Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Click [Settings/Registr

ation]

[User Management]

[System Manager Information] [Edit] and specify the necessary settings on the displayed screen.

● By using the Remote UI, you can r

egister a variety of information, including contact information,

Administrator comments, the installation location of the machine, as well as the settings that you can

page of the Remote UI.

Checking System Manager Information(P. 245)

Logging in to the machine

● If you try to access items that r

equire administrator privileges, for example, <Network> and <Management

Settings>, when the System Manager ID is specied, the Login screen is displayed.

Logging in to the

Machine(P

. 101)

● You must also enter the System Manager ID and PIN to log in using the Remote UI in System Manager

Mode.

Starting Remote UI(P. 238)

LINKS

Setting Access Privileges(P. 182)

Setting the Department ID Management(P. 185)

Managing the Machine

184

Setting the Department ID Management

8054-043

ou can control access to the machine by using multiple IDs for multiple users or groups. If a user tries to operate the

machine when Department ID Management is enabled, a login screen is displayed, and the user must enter their own

Department ID and PIN to use the machine. When Department ID Management is enabled, usage of functions, such as

printing, is recorded for each Department ID. To congure Department ID Management, register department IDs as

necessary and then enable Department ID Management function. Additional settings are required if you want to

enable Department ID Management for operation from a computer.

Registering/Editing Department ID and PIN(P. 185)

Enabling the Department ID Management(P. 187)

Enabling the Department ID Management for Jobs from a Computer(P. 188)

Blocking Jobs When Department ID Is Unknown(P. 189)

● For mor

e information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the

Remote UI, see

Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 248) .

Registering/Editing Department ID and PIN

Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P

. 238)

Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.

Remote UI Screen(P. 239)

Select [User Management] [Department ID Management].

Registering a Department ID

Click [Register New Department].

Specify the required settings.

Managing the Machine

185

[Department ID]

Enter the Department ID number to be r

egistered.

[Set PIN]

To set a PIN, select the check box and enter the same number both in the [PIN] and [Conrm] text boxes.

[Restrict Functions]

You can restrict the number of pages to print and the available functions for departments to be

registered. To restrict the number of pages to print, select the check box for the target type, and enter

the appropriate number of pages in [Number of Pages]. Select the check box for the target functions to

restrict functions.

Click [OK].

Editing the settings of the registered Department ID

Click the corresponding text link under [Department ID] to edit.

Change the settings as necessary and click [OK].

Deleting a Department ID

● Click [Delete] on the right of the Department ID you want to delete click [OK].

[Department ID Page Total]

● Y

ou can check the total number of pages for jobs that have been executed to date on a department ID basis.

● If you want to return the counts to zero, click the corresponding text link under [Department ID] and click

[Clear Count]

[OK]. If you want to return the counts of all Department IDs to zero, click [Clear All Counts]

[OK].

Managing the Machine

186

Enabling the Department ID Management

After you r

egister as many Department IDs as necessary, enable Department ID Management.

Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.

Starting Remote

UI(P

. 238)

Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.

Remote UI Screen(P. 239)

Select [User Management]

[Department ID Management].

Click [Edit].

Select the [Department ID Management] check box.

[Department ID Management]

Select the check bo

x to enable Department ID Management. If you do not want to use Department ID

Management, clear the check box.

● For

information about [Allow Print Jobs with Unknown IDs], see

Blocking Jobs When Department ID Is

Unkno

wn(P. 189) .

Click [OK].

Managing the Machine

187

Using the operation panel

● Department ID Management settings can also be accessed fr

om <Menu> in the Home screen.

<Department ID Management>(P. 364)

Logging in to the machine

● When you try to oper

ate the machine when Department ID Management is enabled, the login screen is

displayed.

Logging in to the Machine(P. 101)

Enabling the Department ID Management for Jobs from a Computer

When you want to enable Department ID Management for jobs fr

om a computer, you need to specify the department

ID and PIN using the driver pre-installed on each computer.

● T

o perform the following procedure, log in to your computer with an administrator account.

Open the printer folder.

Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 433)

Right-click the driver icon for this machine, and click [Printer properties] or

[Pr

operties].

Click the [Device Settings] tab.

Select [Department ID Management] under [User Management].

Click [Settings] found to the right.

Specify the settings as necessary and click [OK].

[Allow PIN Setting]

Select the check bo

x to enable the PIN setting.

[Department ID]

Enter the Department ID number.

[PIN]

Enter the PIN corresponding to the Department ID as necessary.

Managing the Machine

188

[Verify]

Click to verify that the corr

ect ID and PIN are entered. This function is not available if the machine and the

computer are connected via a USB or WSD (Web Services on Devices) port.

[Conrm Department ID/PIN When Printing]

Select the check box to display the [Conrm Department ID/PIN] pop-up screen each time you send job from

a computer.

[Do Not Use Department ID Management When B&W Printing]

Select the check box to send black and white print data as an unknown ID job.

[Authenticate Department ID/PIN at Device]

Select the check box if the machine and the computer are connected via a USB or WSD port.

Click [OK].

Logging in to the machine

● When you try to send job fr

om a computer when Department ID

Management is enabled, the following pop-up screen is displayed

(unless the [Conrm Department ID/PIN When Printing] check box is

cleared):

Blocking Jobs When Department ID Is Unknown

"Printing fr

om computer" is congured by default so that the user can execute jobs without entering an ID and PIN

even while Department ID Management is enabled. When you want to congure a setting so that functions cannot be

used unless the ID and PIN are entered, perform the following procedure.

Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.

Starting Remote

UI(P

. 238)

Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.

Remote UI Screen(P. 239)

Select [User Management]

[Department ID Management].

Click [Edit].

Clear the check boxes as necessary.

Managing the Machine

189

[Allow Print Jobs with Unknown IDs]

In or

der to send job from a computer when Department ID Management is enabled, you need to enter the

correct ID and PIN (

Enabling the Department ID Management for Jobs from a Computer(P. 188) ).

wever, if the check box is selected for this setting, jobs are executed even when the ID and PIN are not

entered. When you want to congure a setting so that no jobs are executed unless the correct department ID

and PIN are entered, clear the check box.

Click [OK].

LINKS

Setting Access Privileges(P. 182)

Setting the System Manager ID and PIN(P. 183)

Managing the Machine

190

Setting a Remote UI PIN

8054-044

ou can set a PIN for access to the Remote UI. All users use a common PIN.

● When Department ID Management is enabled, setting her

e is not required.

Setting the Department ID

Management(P

. 185)

Select <Menu> in the Home screen.

Home Screen(P. 91)

Select <Management Settings>.

● If the login scr

een appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.

Logging in to the Machine(P. 101)

Select <Remote UI Settings/Update Firmware>

<Remote UI Settings> <Remote UI

Access Security Settings>.

Select <On>.

Specify the Remote UI Access PIN.

● Enter a PIN, and pr

ess

● The Conrm scr

een is displayed. Enter the PIN once again to conrm.

● You cannot register a PIN that consists only of zeros, such as "00" or "0000000."

● Do not for

get your PIN. If you forget your PIN, use the procedure above to set a new PIN.

If <Management Settings> are initialized

● The Remote UI Access PIN is also initialized. After an initialization, r

eset the PIN.

<Initialize

Menu>(P

. 371)

Managing the Machine

191

LINKS

Setting Access Privileges(P. 182)

Setting the System Manager ID and PIN(P. 183)

Managing the Machine

192

Conguring the Network Security Settings

8054-045

Authorized users may incur unanticipated losses fr

om attacks by malicious third parties, such as sning, spoong,

and tampering of data as it ows over a network. To protect your important and valuable information from these

attacks, the machine supports the following features to enhance security and secrecy.

Firewall Settings

Unauthorized access by third parties, as well as network attacks and intrusions, can be blocked by limiting

communication only to de

vices that have a specic IP address or MAC address.

Restricting Communication

y Using Firewalls(P. 195)

Changing Port Numbers

A protocol that is used to exchange information with other devices is assigned port numbers that are

edetermined according to the type of protocol. The port number must be the same for all communication

devices; therefore, changing it to an arbitrary number is important to prevent hacking from outside.

Changing Port Numbers(P. 202)

Proxy Settings

When the client devices are connected to an external network, communication is established through the proxy

server. When the pr

oxy server is used, websites can be browsed more safely, therefore, security can be

expected to be enhanced.

Setting a Proxy(P. 203)

TLS Encrypted Communication

TLS is a protocol for encryption for data sent over a network and is often used for communication via a Web

browser or an e-mail application. TLS enables secure network communication when you access the machine

from a computer via the Remote UI. Conguring the Ke

y and Certicate for TLS(P. 205)

Managing the Machine

193

IPSec Communication

While TLS only encrypts data used on a specic application, such as a W

eb browser or an e-mail application,

IPSec encrypts the whole (or payloads of) IP packets. This enables IPSec to offer a more versatile security system

than TLS.

Conguring IPSec Settings(P

. 219)

IEEE 802.1X Authentication

IEEE 802.1X is a standard and mechanism for blocking unauthorized access to the network by collectively

managing user authentication information. If a de

vice tries to connect to the 802.1X network, the device must

go through user authentication in order to prove that the connection is made by an authorized user.

Authentication information is sent to and checked by a RADIUS server, which permits or rejects communication

to the network depending on the authentication result. If authentication fails, a LAN switch (or an access point)

blocks access from the outside of the network. The machine can connect to an 802.1X network as a client

device.

Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings

(P. 226)

Managing the Machine

194

Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls

8054-046

Without pr

oper security, unauthorized third parties can access computers and other communication devices that are

connected to a network. To prevent this unauthorized access, specify the settings for packet lter, a feature that

restricts communication to devices with specied IP addresses or MAC addresses.

Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Settings(P. 196)

Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Settings(P. 199)

Managing the Machine

195

Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Settings

8054-047

ou can either limit communication to only devices with specied IP addresses, or block devices with specied IP

addresses but permit other communications. You can specify a single IP address or a range of IP addresses.

● For mor

e information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the

Remote UI, see

Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 248) .

Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P

. 238)

Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.

Remote UI Screen(P. 239)

Select [Network Settings] [Firewall Settings].

Click [Edit] for the target IP address lter.

● Select the lter that matches the tar

get IP address. To restrict data sent from the machine to a computer,

select [Outbound Filter]. To restrict data received from a computer, select [Inbound Filter].

Specify the settings for packet ltering.

● Select the default policy to allo

w or reject the communication of other devices with the machine, and then

specify IP addresses for exceptions.

Select the [Use Filter] check box and click the [Reject] or [Allow] radio button for the [Default Policy].

[Use Filter]

Managing the Machine

196

Select the check box to restrict communication. Clear the check box to disable the restriction.

[Default Policy]

Select the pr

econdition to allow or reject the communication of other devices with the machine.

[Reject]

Select to pass communication packets only when they are sent to or received from

vices whose IP addresses are entered in [Exception Addresses]. Communications

with other devices are prohibited.

[Allow]

Select to block communication packets when they are sent to or received from

devices whose IP addresses are entered in [Exception Addresses]. Communications

with other devices are permitted.

Specify address exceptions.

● Enter the IP addr

ess (or the range of IP addresses) in the [Address to Register] text box and click

[Add].

Check for entry errors

● If IP addr

esses are incorrectly entered, you may be unable to access the machine from the Remote UI,

in which case you need to set <IPv4 Address Filter> or <IPv6 Address Filter> to <Off>.

<IPv4 Address Filter>(P. 288)

<IPv6 Address Filter>(P. 288)

Entry form for IP addresses

Description Example

Entering a single address

IPv4:

Delimit numbers with periods.

192.168.0.10

IPv6:

Delimit alphanumeric char

acters with

colons.

fe80::10

Specifying a range of addresses Insert a hyphen between the addresses. 192.168.0.10-192.168.0.20

Specifying a range of addresses with a prex

Enter the address, followed by a slash and

a number indicating the prex length.

192.168.0.32/27

fe80::1234/64

When [Reject] is selected for an outbound lter

● Outgoing multicast and br

oadcast packets cannot be ltered.

Deleting an IP address from exceptions

● Select an IP address and click [Delete].

Managing the Machine

197

Click [OK].

Restart the machine.

Restarting the Machine(P. 87)

Using the operation panel

● Y

ou can also enable or disable IP address ltering from <Menu> in the Home screen.

<IPv4 Address Filter>(P. 288)

<IPv6 Address Filter>(P. 288)

LINKS

Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Settings(P. 199)

Managing the Machine

198

Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Settings

8054-048

ou can limit communication to only devices with specied MAC addresses, or block devices with specied MAC

addresses but permit other communications.

This function is unavailable when the machine is connected to a wireless LAN.

● For mor

e information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the

Remote UI, see

Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 248) .

Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.

Starting Remote

UI(P

. 238)

Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.

Remote UI Screen(P. 239)

Select [Network Settings] [Firewall Settings].

Click [Edit] for the target MAC address lter.

● T

o restrict data sent from the machine to a computer, select [Outbound Filter]. To restrict data received from

a computer, select [Inbound Filter].

Specify the settings for packet ltering.

● Select the pr

econdition (default policy) to allow or reject the communication of other devices with the

machine, and then specify MAC addresses for exceptions.

Managing the Machine

199

Select the [Use Filter] check box and click the [Reject] or [Allow] radio button for the [Default Policy].

[Use Filter]

Select the check bo

x to restrict communication. Clear the check box to disable the restriction.

[Default Policy]

Select the precondition to allow or reject other devices to communicate with the machine.

[Reject]

Select to pass communication packets only when they are sent to or received from

vices whose MAC addresses are entered in [Exception Addresses].

Communications with other devices are prohibited.

[Allow]

Select to block communication packets when they are sent to or received from

devices whose MAC addresses are entered in [Exception Addresses].

Communications with other devices are permitted.

Specify address exceptions.

● Enter the MA

C address in the [Address to Register] text box and click [Add].

● You do not need to delimit the address with hyphens or colons.

Check for entry errors

● If MA

C addresses are incorrectly entered, you may become unable to access the machine from the

Remote UI, in which case you need to set <MAC Address Filter> to <Off>.

<MAC Address

Filter>(P

. 288)

When [Reject] is selected for an outbound lter

● Outgoing multicast and br

oadcast packets cannot be ltered.

Deleting a MAC address from exceptions

● Select a MAC address and click [Delete].

Managing the Machine

200

Click [OK].

Restart the machine.

Restarting the Machine(P. 87)

Using the operation panel

● Y

ou can also enable or disable MAC address ltering from <Menu> in the Home screen.

<MAC Address

Filter>(P

. 288)

LINKS

Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Settings(P. 196)

Managing the Machine

201

Changing Port Numbers

8054-049

Ports serve as endpoints for communicating with other de

vices. Typically, conventional port numbers are used for

major protocols, but devices that use these port numbers are vulnerable to attacks because these port numbers are

well-known. To enhance security, your Network Administrator may change the port numbers. When a port number has

been changed, the new number must be shared with the communicating devices, such as computers and servers.

Specify the port number settings depending on the network environment.

● T

o change the port number for proxy server, see

Setting a Proxy(P. 203) .

Select <Menu> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 91)

Select <Preferences>

<Network>.

● If the login scr

een appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.

Logging in to the Machine(P. 101)

Select <TCP/IP Settings>

<Port Number Settings>.

Selecting the protocol of which you want to change the port number.

Learning more about the protocols

● <LPD>/<RA

W>/<WSD Multicast Discovery>

Conguring Printing Pr

otocols and WSD Functions(P. 37)

● <HTTP>

Disabling HTTP Communication(P. 234)

● <POP3>

Receiving I-Faxes for Printing(P. 156)

● <SNMP> Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP(P. 59)

● <Multicast Disco

very>

Monitoring the Machine from the Device Management Systems(P. 64)

Enter the port number, and press .

Restart the machine. Restarting the Machine(P. 87)

LINKS

Conguring Printer Ports(P

. 40)

Managing the Machine

202

Setting a Proxy

8054-04A

A pr

oxy (or HTTP proxy server) refers to a computer or software that carries out HTTP communication for other

devices, especially when communicating with resources outside the network, such as when browsing Web sites. The

client devices connect to the outside network through the proxy server, and do not communicate directly to the

resources outside. Setting a proxy not only facilitates management of trac between in-house and outside networks

but also blocks unauthorized access and consolidates anti-virus protection for enhanced security. When setting a

proxy, make sure that you have the necessary proxy information, including the IP address, port number, and a user

name and password for authentication.

● For mor

e information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the

Remote UI, see

Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 248) .

Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P

. 238)

Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.

Remote UI Screen(P. 239)

Select [Network Settings] [Proxy Settings].

Click [Edit].

Select the [Use Proxy] check box and specify the required settings.

[Use Proxy]

Select the check bo

x to use the specied proxy server when communicating with an HTTP server.

[HTTP Proxy Server Address]

Enter the address of the proxy server. Specify the IP address or host name depending on the environment.

Managing the Machine

203

[HTTP Proxy Server Port Number]

Change the port number as necessary

[Use Proxy within Same Domain]

Select the check box to also use the specied proxy server for communication with devices in the same

domain.

[Use Proxy Authentication]

To enable authentication by the proxy server, select the check box and enter alphanumeric characters for the

user name in the [User Name] text box.

[Set/Change Password]

To set or change the password for the proxy authentication, when it is enabled, select the check box and

enter alphanumeric characters for the new password in the [Password] text box.

Click [OK].

Managing the Machine

204

Conguring the Ke

y and Certicate for TLS

8054-04C

ou can encrypt communication between the machine and a Web browser on the computer by using Transport Layer

Security (TLS). TLS is a mechanism for encrypting data sent or received over the network. TLS must be enabled when

the Remote UI is used for specifying settings for IPSec (Pre-Shared Key Method), IEEE 802.1X authentication (TTLS/

PEAP), or SNMPv3. To use TLS encrypted communication for the Remote UI, you need to specify a "key and certicate"

(server certicate) you want to use before enabling TLS. Generate or install the key and certicate for TLS before

enabling TLS (

Management Functions(P. 422) ).

● For mor

e information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the

Remote UI, see

Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 248) .

Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P

. 238)

Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.

Remote UI Screen(P. 239)

Select [Network Settings] [TLS Settings].

Click [Key and Certicate].

Click [Register Default Key] on the right of the key and certicate you want to use.

Viewing details of a certicate

● You can check the details of the certicate or verify the certicate by clicking the corresponding text link

under [Key Name], or the certicate icon.

Click [Edit].

Congure detailed TLS settings.

Managing the Machine

205

[Allowed Versions]

Specify [Maximum V

ersion] and [Minimum Version] of TLS.

[Algorithm Settings]

Select the check box for the algorithm to use for TLS. Depending on the TLS version, some algorithms may

not be available.

: Available 　 : Unavailable

Algorithm TLS Version

[TLS 1.3] [TLS 1.2] [TLS 1.1] [TLS 1.0]

[Encryption Algorithm]

[AES-CBC (256-bit)]

[AES-CBC (128-bit)]

[AES-GCM (256-bit)]

[AES-GCM (128-bit)]

[3DES-CBC]

[CHACHA20-POLY1305]

[Key Exchange Algorithm]

[RSA]

[ECDHE]

[X25519]

[Signature Algorithm]

[RSA]

[ECDSA]

Managing the Machine

206

Algorithm TLS Version

[TLS 1.3] [TLS 1.2] [TLS 1.1] [TLS 1.0]

[HMAC Algorithm]

[SHA1]

[SHA256]

[SHA384]

Click [OK].

Select [License/Other]

[Remote UI Settings].

Click [Edit].

Select the [Use TLS] check box and click [OK].

Restart the machine.

Restarting the Machine(P. 87)

Using the operation panel

● You can also enable or disable TLS encrypted communication from <Menu> in the Home screen. <Use

Remote UI>

(P. 368)

Managing the Machine

207

Starting the Remote UI with TLS

● If you try to start the Remote UI when TLS is enabled, a security alert may be displayed r

egarding the

security certicate. In this case, check that the correct URL is entered in the address eld, and then proceed

to display the Remote UI screen.

Starting Remote UI(P. 238)

Using TLS to encrypt I-Fax r

eception

● If the POP3 server supports TLS, you can enable TLS for communication with the POP3 server (

Conguring the I-Fax RX Settings

(P. 156) ). For more information about the POP3 server, contact your

Internet service provider or Network Administrator.

LINKS

Generating the Key and Certicate for Network Communication

(P. 209)

Generating a Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR)

(P. 214)

Registering the Key and Certicate for Network Communication

(P. 217)

Conguring the Expir

ation Check Method for Received Certicates(P. 212)

Conguring IPSec Settings

(P. 219)

Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings(P

. 226)

Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP(P. 59)

Managing the Machine

208

Generating the Key and Certicate for Network

Communication

8054-04E

A k

ey and certicate can be generated with the machine when it is required for encrypted communication via

Transport Layer Security (TLS). You can use TLS when accessing the machine via the Remote UI. Self-signed certicates

are used with the key and certicate generated in "Network Communication."

● If you want to use a server certicate that has a CA signatur

e, you can generate a CSR together with a key

instead of a certicate.

Generating a Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR)

(P. 214)

● For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the

Remote UI, see

Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 248) .

Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P

. 238)

Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.

Remote UI Screen(P. 239)

Select [Device Management] [Key and Certicate Settings].

Click [Generate Key].

Deleting a registered key and certicate

● Click [Delete] on the right of the k

ey and certicate you want to delete

click [OK].

● A

key and certicate cannot be deleted if it is currently used for some purpose, such as when "[TLS]" or

"[IEEE 802.1X]" is displayed under [Key Usage]. In this case, disable the function or replace the other key

and certicate before deleting it.

Select [Network Communication] and click [OK].

Specify settings for the key and certicate.

Managing the Machine

209

[Ke

y Settings]

[Key Name]

Enter alphanumeric characters for naming the key. Set a name that will be easy for you to nd later in a

list.

[Signature Algorithm]

Select the signature algorithm from the drop-down list.

[Key Algorithm]

Select the key generation algorithm from [RSA] or [ECDSA], then select the key length from the drop-

down list. In either case, the larger the number for the key length is, the higher the security level

becomes. However, the communication speed becomes slower.

● When [SHA384] or [SHA512] is selected in [Signatur

e Algorithm], [512-bit] cannot be selected as the

key length when [RSA] is selected in [Key Algorithm].

[Certicate Settings]

alidity Start Date (YYYY/MM/DD)]

Enter the validity start date of the certicate, in the order of: year, month, day.

[Validity End Date (YYYY/MM/DD)]

Enter the validity end date of the certicate, in the order of: year, month, day. A date earlier than

[Validity Start Date (YYYY/MM/DD)] cannot be set.

[Country/Region]

Click the [Select Country/Region] radio button and select the country/region from the drop-down list.

You can also click the [Enter Internet Country Code] radio button and enter a country code, such as "US"

for the United States.

[State]/[City]

Enter alphanumeric characters for the location as necessary.

[Organization]/[Organization Unit]

Enter alphanumeric characters for the organization name as necessary.

[Common Name]

Enter alphanumeric characters for the common name of the certicate as necessary. "Common Name"

is often abbreviated as "CN."

Managing the Machine

210

Click [OK].

● Gener

ating a key and certicate may take some time.

● After the key and certicate is generated, it is automatically registered to the machine.

LINKS

Registering the Key and Certicate for Network Communication

(P. 217)

Conguring the Ke

y and Certicate for TLS(P. 205)

Conguring IPSec Settings

(P. 219)

Managing the Machine

211

Conguring the Expir

ation Check Method for Received

Certicates

8054-04F

ou can verify whether the certicate received from the other party during communication is valid by sending a query

to the OCSP (online certicate status protocol) responder (a server that supports OCSP). Congure the certicate

verication level and the OCSP responder to connect to. These should be registered by the administrator.

Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.

Starting Remote

UI(P

. 238)

Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.

Remote UI Screen(P. 239)

Select [Device Management] [OCSP (Online Certicate Status Pr

otocol) Settings].

Click [Edit].

Select the check box for [Use OCSP (Online Certicate Status Pr

otocol)], and

congure the online certicate status protocol (OCSP).

[Certicate V

erication Level]

Set whether to disable certicates in situations such as the following:

● When the machine cannot connect to the OCSP responder

● When a timeout occurs

● When expiration cannot be checked, such as when the result of checking the expiration of a certicate via

the OCSP responder is unknown

[OCSP Responder Settings]

Specify the URL for connecting to the OCSP responder.

[Custom URL]

Managing the Machine

212

When [Use Custom URL] or [Use Certicate URL (Use Custom URL If Certicate URL Cannot Be Retrie

ved)] is

selected, enter the URL of the OCSP responder (ASCII code only, maximum 255 characters).

[Communication Timeout]

Set the time until communication with the OCSP responder times out. The connection is canceled if there is

no response from the OCSP responder within the set time.

Click [OK].

Managing the Machine

213

Generating a Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR)

8054-04H

Because certicates gener

ated on the machine do not have a CA signature, a communication error may result

depending on devices it communicates with. To have the certicate authority issue the certicate with the CA

signature, you need to obtain data of CSR (Certicate Signing Request), which the administrator can generate from

Remote UI. When the certicate is issued, register it in the key with the CSR generated.

Generating a Key and CSR(P. 214)

Registering a Certicate to a Ke

y(P. 216)

● For mor

e information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the

Remote UI, see

Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 248) .

Generating a Key and CSR

Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P

. 238)

Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.

Remote UI Screen(P. 239)

Select [Device Management] [Key and Certicate Settings].

Click [Generate Key].

Deleting a registered key and certicate

● Click [Delete] on the right of the k

ey and certicate you want to delete

click [OK].

● A

key and certicate cannot be deleted if it is currently used for some purpose, such as when "[TLS]" or

"[IEEE 802.1X]" is displayed under [Key Usage]. In this case, disable the function or replace the key and

certicate before deleting it.

Select [Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR)] and click [OK].

Specify settings for the key and CSR.

Managing the Machine

214

[Ke

y Settings]

[Key Name]

Enter alphanumeric characters for naming the key. Set a name that will be easy for you to nd later in a

list.

[Signature Algorithm]

Select the signature algorithm from the drop-down list.

[Key Algorithm]

Select the key generation algorithm from [RSA] or [ECDSA], then select the key length from the drop-

down list. In any case, the larger the number for the key length, the slower the communication.

However, the security is tighter.

● When [SHA384] or [SHA512] is selected in [Signatur

e Algorithm], [512-bit] cannot be selected as the

key length when [RSA] is selected in [Key Algorithm].

[Certicate Signing Request (CSR) Settings]

[Country/Region]

Click the [Select Country/Region] r

adio button and select the country/region from the drop-down list.

You can also click the [Enter Internet Country Code] radio button and enter a country code, such as "US"

for the United States.

[State]/[City]

Enter alphanumeric characters for the location as necessary.

[Organization]/[Organization Unit]

Enter alphanumeric characters for the organization name as necessary.

[Common Name]

Enter alphanumeric characters for the common name of the certicate as necessary. "Common Name"

is often abbreviated as "CN."

Click [OK].

● Gener

ating a key and CSR may take some time.

Managing the Machine

215

Click [Store in File].

● A dialog bo

x for storing the le appears. Choose where to store the le and click [Save].

➠ The CSR le is stored on the computer.

Attach the stored le and submit the application to the certication authority

Registering a Certicate to a Ke

The key with the CSR generated cannot be used until the certicate issued from the certicate authority based on the

CSR is registered in the key. Once the certication authority has issued the certicate, register it using the procedure

below.

Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.

Starting Remote

UI(P

. 238)

Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.

Remote UI Screen(P. 239)

Select [Device Management]

[Key and Certicate Settings].

Click [Key Name] or [Certicate] r

equired to register the certicate.

Click [Register Certicate].

Click [Browse], specify the le for the certicate signing r

equest, and click [Register].

LINKS

Conguring the Key and Certicate for TLS(P. 205)

Generating the Key and Certicate for Network Communication(P. 209)

Registering the Key and Certicate for Network Communication(P. 217)

Conguring IPSec Settings(P. 219)

Managing the Machine

216

Registering the Key and Certicate for Network

Communication

8054-04J

ou can obtain the key and certicate, and the CA certicate from a certication authority (CA) for use with the

machine. Install and register the obtained key and certicate le and CA certicate le in this machine using Remote

UI. Check the key and certicate, and CA certicate conditions that are required for the machine in advance (

Management Functions(P. 422) ).

● For mor

e information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the

Remote UI, see

Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 248) .

Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P

. 238)

Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.

Remote UI Screen(P. 239)

Select [Device Management] [Key and Certicate Settings] or [CA Certicate

Settings].

● Click [Ke

y and Certicate Settings] to install a key and certicate, or [CA Certicate Settings] to install a CA

certicate.

Click [Register Key and Certicate] or [Register CA Certicate].

Deleting a registered key and certicate or CA certicate

● Click

[Delete] on the right of the key and certicate or CA certicate you want to delete

click

[OK]. You

cannot delete the preinstalled CA certicates.

● A key and certicate cannot be deleted if it is currently used for some purpose, such as when "[TLS]" or

"[IEEE 802.1X]" is displayed under [Key Usage]. In this case, disable the function or replace the key and

certicate before deleting it.

Disabling or enabling the preinstalled CA certicates

● Click [Disable] on the right of the preinstalled CA certicate you want to disable. To enable the certicate

again, click [Enable] on the right of the certicate.

Click [Install].

Managing the Machine

217

Deleting the key and certicate le or CA certicate le

● Click [Delete] on the right of the le you want to delete click [OK].

Click [Browse], specify the le to install, and click [Start Installation].

➠ The k

ey and certicate le or the CA certicate le is installed on the machine from a computer.

Registering a key and certicate

Click [Register] on the right of the key and certicate le you want to r

egister.

Enter the name of the key and password.

[Key Name]

Enter alphanumeric char

acters for the name of the key to be registered.

[Password]

Enter alphanumeric characters for the password of the private key set for the le to be registered.

Click [OK].

Registering a CA certicate

Click [Register] on the right of the CA certicate le you want to r

egister.

LINKS

Generating the Key and Certicate for Network Communication

(P. 209)

Conguring the Ke

y and Certicate for TLS(P. 205)

Conguring IPSec Settings

(P. 219)

Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings(P

. 226)

Managing the Machine

218

Conguring IPSec Settings

8054-04K

Internet Pr

otocol Security (IPSec or IPsec) is a protocol suite for encrypting data transported over a network, including

Internet networks. While TLS only encrypts data used on a specic application, such as a Web browser or an e-mail

application, IPSec encrypts either whole IP packets or the payloads of IP packets, offering a more versatile security

system. The IPSec of the machine works in transport mode, in which the payloads of IP packets are encrypted. With

this feature, the machine can connect directly to a computer that is in the same virtual private network (VPN). Check

the system requirements (

Management Functions(P. 422) ) and set the necessary congur

ation on the computer

before you congure the machine.

Using IPSec with IP address lter

● IP addr

ess lter settings are applied before the IPSec policies.

Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall

Settings(P

. 196)

Conguring IPSec Settings

Befor

e using IPSec for encrypted communication, you need to register security policies (SP). A security policy consists

of the groups of settings described below. After registering policies, specify the order in which they are applied.

Selector

Selector denes conditions for IP pack

ets to apply IPSec communication. Selectable conditions include IP

addresses and port numbers of the machine and the devices to communicate with.

IKE

IKE congur

es the IKEv1 that is used for key exchange protocol. Note that instructions vary depending on the

authentication method selected.

[Pre-Shared Key Method]

This authentication method uses a common key word, called Shared Key, for communication between the

machine and other devices. Enable TLS for the Remote UI before specifying this authentication method (

Conguring the Key and Certicate for TLS(P. 205) ).

[Digital Signature Method]

The machine and the other devices authenticate each other by mutually verifying their digital signatures.

Generate or install the key and certicate beforehand ( Registering the Key and Certicate for Network

Communication

(P. 217) ).

AH/ESP

Specify the settings for AH/ESP, which is added to packets during IPSec communication. AH and ESP can be used

at the same time. Y

ou can also select whether or not to enable PFS for tighter security.

Managing the Machine

219

● For mor

e information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the

Remote UI, see

Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 248) .

Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P

. 238)

Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.

Remote UI Screen(P. 239)

Select [Network Settings] [IPSec Settings].

Click [Edit].

Select the [Use IPSec] check box and click [OK].

● If you want the machine to only r

eceive packets that match one of the security policies that you dene in the

steps below, clear the [Receive Non-Policy Packets] check box.

Click [Register New Policy].

Specify the Policy Settings.

In the [Policy Name] text box, enter alphanumeric characters for a name that is used for identifying the

policy

Select the [Enable Policy] check box.

Specify the Selector Settings.

Managing the Machine

220

[Local Address]

Click the r

adio button for the type of IP address of the machine to apply the policy.

[All IP Addresses] Select to use IPSec for all IP packets.

[IPv4 Address] Select to use IPSec for all IP packets that are sent to or from the IPv4 address of the

machine.

[IPv6 Address] Select to use IPSec for all IP packets that are sent to or from an IPv6 address of the

machine.

[Remote Address]

Click the r

adio button for the type of IP address of the other devices to apply the policy.

[All IP Addresses] Select to use IPSec for all IP packets.

[All IPv4 Addresses] Select to use IPSec for all IP packets that are sent to or from IPv4 addresses of the

other de

vices.

[All IPv6 Addresses] Select to use IPSec for all IP packets that are sent to or from IPv6 addresses of the

other devices.

[IPv4 Manual Settings] Select to specify a single IPv4 address or a range of IPv4 addresses to apply IPSec.

Enter the IPv4 address (or the range) in the [Addresses to Set Manually] text box.

[IPv6 Manual Settings] Select to specify a single IPv6 address or a range of IPv6 addresses to apply IPSec.

Enter the IPv6 address (or the range) in the [Addresses to Set Manually] text box.

[Addresses to Set Manually]

If [IPv4 Manual Settings] or [IPv6 Manual Settings] is selected for [Remote Addr

ess], enter the IP address to

apply the policy. You can also enter a range of addresses by inserting a hyphen between the addresses.

Entering IP addresses

Managing the Machine

221

Description Example

Entering a single address IPv4:

Delimit numbers with periods.

192.168.0.10

IPv6:

Delimit alphanumeric char

acters with colons.

fe80::10

Specifying a range of addresses Insert a hyphen between the addresses. 192.168.0.10-192.168.0.20

[Subnet Settings]

When manually specifying IPv4 addr

ess, you can express the range by using the subnet mask. Enter the

subnet mask using periods to delimit numbers (example:"255.255.255.240").

[Prex Length]

Specifying the range of IPv6 addresses manually also allows you to specify the range using prexes. Enter a

range between 0 and 128 as the prex length.

[Local Port]/[Remote Port]

If you want to create separate policies for each protocol, such as HTTP or WSD, click the [Single Port] radio

button and enter the appropriate port number for the protocol to determine whether to use IPSec.

IPSec is not applied to the following packets

● Loopback, multicast, and br

oadcast packets

● IKE packets (using UDP on port 500)

● ICMPv6 neighbor solicitation and neighbor advertisement packets

Specify the IKE Settings.

[IKE Mode]

The mode used for the k

ey exchange protocol is displayed. The machine supports the main mode, not the

aggressive mode.

[Authentication Method]

Select [Pre-Shared Key Method] or [Digital Signature Method] for the method used when authenticating the

machine. You need to enable TLS for the Remote UI before selecting [Pre-Shared Key Method]. You need to

generate or install the key and certicate before selecting [Digital Signature Method].

Conguring the

Key and Certicate for TLS(P. 205)

[Valid for]

Specify how long a session lasts for IKE SA (ISAKMP SA). Enter the time in minutes.

Managing the Machine

222

[Authentication]/[Encryption]/[DH Group]

Select an algorithm fr

om the drop-down list. Each algorithm is used in the key exchange.

[Authentication] Select the hash algorithm.

[Encryption] Select the encryption algorithm.

[DH Group] Select the Die-Hellman gr

oup, which determines the key strength.

Authenticating a machine using a pre-shared key

Click the [Pre-Shared Key Method] radio button for [Authentication Method] and then click [Shared Key

Settings].

Enter alphanumeric characters for the pre-shared key and click [OK].

Specify the [Valid for] and [Authentication]/[Encryption]/[DH Group] settings.

Authenticating a machine using digital signature method

Click the [Digital Signature Method] radio button for [Authentication Method] and then click [Key and

Certicate].

Click [Register Default Key] on the right of the key and certicate you want to use.

Viewing details of a certicate

● Y

ou can check the details of the certicate or verify the certicate by clicking the corresponding text

link under [Key Name], or the certicate icon.

Specify the [Valid for] and [Authentication]/[Encryption]/[DH Group] settings.

Specify the IPSec Network Settings.

[Use PFS]

Select the check bo

x to enable Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS) for IPSec session keys. Enabling PFS enhances

the security while increasing the load on the communication. Make sure that PFS is also enabled for the other

devices.

[Specify by Time]/[Specify by Size]

Set the conditions for terminating a session for IPSec SA. IPSec SA is used as a communication tunnel. Select

either or both of the check boxes as necessary. If both check boxes are selected, the IPSec SA session is

terminated when either of the conditions has been satised.

Managing the Machine

223

[Specify by Time] Enter a time in minutes to specify how long a session lasts.

[Specify by Size] Enter a size in megabytes to specify how much data can be transported in a session.

[Select Algorithm]

Select the [ESP], [ESP (AES-GCM)], or [AH (SHA1)] check bo

x(es) depending on the IPSec header and the

algorithm used. AES-GCM is an algorithm for both authentication and encryption. If [ESP] is selected, also

select algorithms for authentication and encryption from the [ESP Authentication] and [ESP Encryption] drop-

down lists.

[ESP Authentication] To enable the ESP authentication, select [SHA1] for the hash algorithm. Select [Do Not

Use] if you want to disable the ESP authentication.

[ESP Encryption] Select the encryption algorithm for ESP. You can select [NULL] if you do not want to

specify the algorithm, or select [Do Not Use] if you want to disable the ESP encryption.

[Connection Mode]

The connection mode of IPSec is displayed. The machine supports tr

ansport mode, in which the payloads of

IP packets are encrypted. Tunnel mode, in which whole IP packets (headers and payloads) are encapsulated

is not available.

Click [OK].

● If you need to r

egister an additional security policy, return to step 6.

Arrange the order of policies listed under [Registered IPSec Policies].

● Policies ar

e applied from one at the highest position to the lowest. Click [Up] or [Down] to move a policy up or

down the order.

Editing a policy

● Click the corr

esponding text link under [Policy Name] for the edit screen.

Deleting a policy

● Click [Delete] on the right of the policy name you want to delete

click [OK].

Restart the machine. Restarting the Machine(P. 87)

Managing the Machine

224

Using the operation panel

● Y

ou can also enable or disable IPSec communication from <Menu> in the Home screen.

<Use

IPSec>

(P. 284)

LINKS

Conguring the Ke

y and Certicate for TLS(P. 205)

IPSec Policy List(P. 399)

Managing the Machine

225

Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings

8054-04L

The machine can connect to an 802.1X network as a client de

vice. A typical 802.1X network consists of a RADIUS server

(authentication server), LAN switch (authenticator), and client devices with authentication software (supplicants). If a

device tries to connect to the 802.1X network, the device must go through user authentication in order to prove that

the connection is made by an authorized user. Authentication information is sent to and checked by a RADIUS server,

which permits or rejects communication to the network depending on the authentication result. If authentication fails,

a LAN switch (or an access point) blocks access from the outside of the network.

IEEE 802.1X Authentication Method

Select the authentication method from the options below. If necessary, install or register a key and certicate or

a CA certicate befor

e conguring IEEE 802.1X authentication (

Registering the Key and Certicate for

Network Communication

(P. 217) ).

TLS

The machine and the authentication server authenticate each other b

y mutually verifying their certicates. A

key and certicate issued by a certication authority (CA) is required for the client authentication (when

authenticating the machine). For the server authentication, a CA certicate installed via the Remote UI can be

used in addition to a CA certicate preinstalled in the machine.

TTLS

This authentication method uses a user name and passwor

d for the client authentication and a CA certicate

for the server authentication. MSCHAPv2 or PAP can be selected as the internal protocol. TTLS can be used

with PEAP at the same time. Enable TLS for the Remote UI before conguring this authentication method (

Conguring the Ke

y and Certicate for TLS(P. 205) ).

PEAP

The r

equired settings are almost the same as those of TTLS. MSCHAPv2 is used as the internal protocol.

Enable TLS for the Remote UI before conguring this authentication method (

Conguring the Ke

y and

Certicate for TLS(P. 205) ).

● For mor

e information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the

Remote UI, see

Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 248) .

Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P

. 238)

Managing the Machine

226

Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.

Remote UI Screen(P. 239)

Select [Network Settings] [IEEE 802.1X Settings].

Click [Edit].

Select the [Use IEEE 802.1X] check box, and enter the login name in the [Login Name]

xt box.

[Use IEEE 802.1X]

Select the check bo

x to enable IEEE 802.1X authentication.

[Login Name]

Enter alphanumeric characters for a name (EAP identity) that is used for identifying the user.

Congure the r

equired settings according to the specied authentication method.

Setting TLS

Select the [Use TLS] check box and click [Key and Certicate].

● Y

ou cannot use TLS with TTLS or PEAP.

Click [Register Default Key] on the right of the key and certicate you want to use for the client

authentication.

Viewing details of a certicate

● Y

ou can check the details of the certicate or verify the certicate by clicking the corresponding text

link under [Key Name], or the certicate icon.

Managing the Machine

227

Setting TTLS/PEAP

Select the [Use TTLS] or [Use PEAP] check box.

Internal protocol for TTLS

● Y

ou can select MSCHAPv2 or PAP.

Click [Change User Name/Password].

● T

o specify a user name other than the login name, clear the [Use Login Name as User Name] check

box. Select the check box if you want to use the login name as the user name.

Set the user name/password.

[User Name]

Enter alphanumeric char

acters for the user name.

[Change Password]

To set or change the password, select the check box and enter alphanumeric characters for the new

password both in the [Password] and [Conrm] text boxes.

Click [OK].

Restart the machine.

Restarting the Machine(P. 87)

Using the operation panel

● Y

ou can also enable or disable IEEE 802.1X authentication from <Menu> in the Home screen.

<IEEE 802.1X

Settings>(P

. 287)

Managing the Machine

228

LINKS

Conguring the Ke

y and Certicate for TLS(P. 205)

Managing the Machine

229

Restricting the Machine's Functions

8054-04R

Some of the functions of the machine may r

arely be used or provide opportunities for misuse. For security purposes,

the machine can be set to limit its capabilities by partially or completely disabling these functions.

Restricting Printing from a Computer

You can limit "printing from computer" only to secure documents so that no print jobs can be executed unless

the PIN is enter

ed on the machine side.

Restricting Printing from a Computer(P. 232)

Restricting USB Functions

The USB connection allows an easy connection with peripheral devices, but it may cause a security risk such as

an information leakage. Y

ou can restrict a USB connection with a computer or saving to a USB memory device.

Restricting USB Functions(P. 233)

Disabling HTTP Communication

When not performing operations via the network, for example, when using the machine via USB connection,

you can disable HT

TP communication to prevent a hacking via the HTTP port.

Disabling HTTP

Communication

(P. 234)

Disabling Remote Management

When not using Remote UI, you can disable functions to prevent an unauthorized remote operation via Remote

UI. Disabling Remote UI(P. 235)

Restricting Use of the Operation Panel

You can protect the machine settings from inadvertent changes by restricting use of the keys on the operation

panel.　 Restricting Use of the Operation Panel(P. 236)

Managing the Machine

230

Managing the Machine

231

Restricting Printing from a Computer

8054-04S

ou can drastically reduce information leakage risks by limiting the documents printable from a computer to the

Secure Print documents (

Printing a Document Secured by a PIN (Secure Print)(P. 145) ).

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Secure Print> <Restrict Printer Jobs> <On> Restart the

machine

Managing the Machine

232

Restricting USB Functions

8054-04U

USB is a convenient way of connecting peripher

al devices and storing or relocating data, but USB can also be a source

of information leakage if it is not properly managed. Be especially careful when handling USB memory devices. This

section describes how to restrict connection via the USB port of the machine and how to prohibit use of USB memory

devices.

Restricting the USB Connection with a Computer(P. 233)

Restricting the USB Print Function(P. 233)

Restricting the USB Connection with a Computer

ou can disable the computer connection USB port located on the back side of the machine. If this port is disabled, the

machine cannot communicate with a computer via USB. This setting does not affect the front USB port, which is for

attaching USB memory devices.

Restart the machine

Restricting the USB Print Function

You can disable printing data from a USB memory device. The data in the USB memory device cannot be printed.

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Access Files> <Memory Media Settings> <Use Print

Function> <Off> Restart the machine

LINKS

Printing from a USB Memory Device (Memory Media Print)(P. 149)

Managing the Machine

233

Disabling HTTP Communication

8054-04W

TP is used for communications over the network, such as when you access the machine via the Remote UI. If you

are using a USB connection or are otherwise not using HTTP, you can disable HTTP to block malicious third-party

intrusions via the unused HTTP port.

● Disabling HT

TP disables some of the network capabilities, such as the Remote UI and WSD printing.

LINKS

Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI)(P. 237)

Changing Port Numbers(P. 202)

Conguring Printing Pr

otocols and WSD Functions(P. 37)

Managing the Machine

234

Disabling Remote UI

8054-04X

The Remote UI is useful because the machine settings can be specied b

y using a Web browser on a computer. To use

the Remote UI, the machine must be connected to a computer over the network. If the machine is connected to a

computer via USB, or if you do not need to use the Remote UI, you might want to disable the Remote UI to reduce the

risk of having your machine controlled remotely over the network by malicious third parties.

<Menu> <Management Settings> <Remote UI Settings/Update Firmware> <Remote UI

Settings> <Use Remote UI> <Off> Restart the machine

LINKS

Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI)(P. 237)

Disabling HTTP Communication(P. 234)

Managing the Machine

235

Restricting Use of the Operation Panel

8054-04Y

ou can protect the machine settings from inadvertent changes by restricting use of the keys on the operation panel.

● For mor

e information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the

Remote UI, see

Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 248) .

Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P

. 238)

Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.

Remote UI Screen(P. 239)

Select [Device Management] [Key Lock Settings].

Click [Edit].

Select the [Enable Key Lock] check box [OK].

● Even when the k

eylock function is activated, the following keys can be used.

- [Home] key

- [Back] key

- [Energy Saver] key

- [Stop] key

Managing the Machine

236

Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI)

8054-050

Using a W

eb browser to operate the machine remotely, you can check the documents waiting to be printed or the

status of the machine. You can also make various settings. You can do this without leaving your desk, making system

management easier. For more information about the system requirements for the Remote UI, see

System

Envir

onment(P. 424) .

Functions of the Remote UI

Checking the Status and Logs(P. 242)

Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 248)

Security Policy(P. 251)

Importing/Exporting the Setting Data(P. 256)

Basics of the Remote UI

Starting Remote UI(P. 238)

Managing the Machine

237

Starting Remote UI

8054-051

o operate remotely, you need to input the IP address of the machine into a Web browser and start the Remote UI.

Check the IP address set to the machine in advance (

Viewing Network Settings(P. 34) ). If you have any questions,

ask your Network Administr

ator.

When the Department ID Management is disabled

● T

o log in to the Remote UI, you need to set a Remote UI Access PIN on the machine beforehand.

Setting a

Remote UI PIN

(P. 191)

Start the Web browser.

Enter "http://<the IP address of the machine>/" in the address eld, and pr

ess the

[ENTER] key.

● If you want to use an IPv6 addr

ess, enclose the IPv6 address with brackets (example: http://

[fe80::2e9e:fcff:fe4e:dbce]/).

If a security alert is displayed

● A

security alert may be displayed when the Remote UI communication is encrypted (

Conguring

the

Key and Certicate for TLS(P. 205) ). When certicate settings or TLS settings have no errors, continue

browsing the Web site.

When the Department ID Management is disabled

Select [System Manager Mode] or [Gener

al User Mode], and enter a value in [Remote UI Access PIN] as

necessary.

[System Manager Mode]

Managing the Machine

238

You can perform all the Remote UI operations and settings. Enter the appropriate ID in [System Manager ID]

and PIN in [System Manager PIN]. Setting the System Manager ID and PIN(P. 183)

[Gener

al User Mode]

You can check the status of documents or the machine, and you can also change some of the settings. When

you want to check if a specic document of yours is in the print queue or cancel the printing of a document

of yours in the print queue, enter the user name of the document in [User Name]. The user name is

automatically set to print documents based on information such as your computer name or computer login

name.

[Remote UI Access PIN]

In the following situations, enter a Remote UI Access PIN.

Setting a Remote UI PIN(P. 191)

● When no System Manager ID is set and you ar

e logging in to System Manager Mode

● When you are logging in to General User Mode

When the Department ID Management is enabled

Enter the appr

opriate ID in [Department ID] and PIN in [PIN].

Setting the Department ID

Management(P

. 185)

Click [Log In].

➠ The Portal page (main page) will be displayed.

Remote UI Screen(P. 239)

Setting the Timeout Time after Logging In to the Remote UI

The user is automatically logged out if no oper

ations are performed for a certain period of time after logging in to the

Remote UI. You can set the time until the user is logged out.

Set [Timeout After Logging in to Remote UI] [OK]

Remote UI Screen

When you log in to the Remote UI, the follo

wing Portal page appears. This section describes the items displayed on

the Portal page and the basic operations.

Managing the Machine

239

[Device Basic Information]

Displays the curr

ent status of the machine and error information. If an error has occurred, the link to the

Error Information page will be displayed.

[Consumables Information]

Displays paper information and the amount r

emaining in the toner cartridges.

[Support Link]

Displays the support link specied in [Support Link] under [License/Other].

Refresh Icon

Refr

eshes the currently displayed page.

[Language]

Selects the display language used for the Remote UI scr

eens.

[Log Out]

Logs off fr

om the Remote UI. The Login page will be displayed.

[Mail to System Manager]

Displays a windo

w for creating an e-mail to the system manager specied in [System Manager Information]

under [User Management].

[Status Monitor/Cancel]

Displays the [Status Monitor/Cancel] page. For any of the waiting documents, you can check the status/

history or cancel the processing.

Managing the Machine

240

[Settings/Registration]

Displays [Settings/Registr

ation] page. When you have logged in to System Manager Mode, you can change

the settings items and save/load the registered data.

Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 248)

Managing the Machine

241

Checking the Status and Logs

8054-052

Checking Current Status of Print Documents(P. 242)

Checking Current Status of Received Documents(P. 243)

Checking History of Documents(P. 243)

Checking Error Information(P. 243)

Checking Consumables(P. 244)

Checking Device Specications(P

. 244)

Checking System Manager Information(P. 245)

Checking Print Total Counter(P. 245)

Checking History of Toner Cartridges(P. 246)

Checking Usage Status of the Machine(P. 246)

● A le name of a document may not be displayed in full. The printed application name may be added to the

le name.

Checking Current Status of Print Documents

The list of the documents curr

ently printing or waiting to be printed is displayed.

in [Print]

● Y

ou can delete a document job by clicking [Cancel].

● Regar

dless of the Department ID Management setting, all the print documents currently printing and

waiting to be printed will be listed.

● If you entered your user name when you logged on in General User Mode, your user name will only

be displayed on the documents that you printed.

Managing the Machine

242

● Click [

Job Number] on the paused documents and secure documents to display detailed information.

You can check the user name and the page count of the printed document.

Checking Current Status of Received Documents

ou can check the logs of received I-Fax documents.

in [RX]

Checking History of Documents

The job logs of print or r

eceiving (RX) are displayed.

Checking Error Information

When an err

or occurs, this page will be displayed by clicking the message displayed under [Error Information] on the

Portal page (main page).

Remote UI Screen(P. 239)

Information]

Managing the Machine

243

Checking Consumables

Paper size and paper type for the paper sour

ce, toner cartridge model number, etc. are displayed. You can also click

[Check Consumables Details] in the Portal page (main page) to display this page (

Remote UI Screen(P. 239) ).

[Consumables]

Checking Device Specications

The maximum print speed and machine features are displayed.

Featur

es]

Managing the Machine

244

Checking System Manager Information

Information about the machine and the system manager is displayed. The de

vice name and other system manager

information displayed here correspond to the settings in [System Manager Information] on the [User Management]

page or in [Device Information Settings] on the [Device Management] page.

Information]

Checking Print Total Counter

The total number of pages that have been printed is displayed.

Counter]

Managing the Machine

245

Checking History of Toner Cartridges

ou can check the usage logs of toner cartridges and other logs. The display can be changed for each color of the

toner cartridge.

Log]

Checking Usage Status of the Machine

The monthly total volume of printouts and monthly total power consumption are displayed. You can display the Eco

Information screen and change the settings to save paper and power consumption.

Information]

Managing the Machine

246

LINKS

Remote UI Screen(P. 239)

Managing the Machine

247

Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI

8054-053

ou can change the various machine settings by using the Remote UI. Most of the settings can be set also on the

machine, but some settings can only be set using the Remote UI. This section describes the basic ow of changing the

settings of the machine using the Remote UI.

● Some settings can only be changed when you have logged in to System Manager Mode.

● Some settings may r

equire operations that differ from the procedure described here.

Start the Remote UI.

Starting Remote UI(P. 238)

Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.

Remote UI Screen(P. 239)

Click the setting you want to congur

e in the menu on the left side of the screen.

Click the link to display the desired page as necessary.

Managing the Machine

248

Click [Edit].

Specify the required settings.

Click [OK].

Managing the Machine

249

Restart the machine as necessary.

Restarting the Machine(P. 87)

● For information about whether you need to r

estart the machine, view the message on the edit screen.

Managing the Machine

250

Security Policy

8054-054

It is a common pr

actice for organizations to adopt a security policy that denes basic information security objectives

and standards, which requires information devices such as computers and printers to be operated accordingly. If you

have a security policy to be applied in your organization, apply it to this machine as well.

Viewing the Security Policy(P. 251)

Security Policy Items(P. 251)

To Apply the Security Policy to the Machine(P. 255)

Viewing the Security Policy

You can view the security policy set in the machine using the Remote UI.

Start the Remote UI.

Starting Remote UI(P. 238)

Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 239)

Click [Security Settings] [Conrm Security Policy].

Security Policy Items

The follo

wing items are displayed by the Remote UI. The items for functions unavailable on this machine are also

displayed, but do not affect the machine operation.

◼ [Interface]

[Wireless Connection Policy]

Prevent unauthorized access by prohibiting wireless connections.

[Prohibit Use of Direct Connection] <Use Direct Connection> is set to <Off>. It is not possible to access

the machine fr

om mobile devices.

<Direct Connection

Settings>(P

. 278)

[Prohibit Use of Wireless LAN] <Select Wired/Wireless LAN> is set to <Wired LAN>. It is not

possible to establish a wireless connection with the machine via a

wireless LAN router or access point.

<Select Wired/Wireless

LAN>(P

. 276)

[USB Policy]

event unauthorized access and data breaches by prohibiting USB connection.

Managing the Machine

251

[Prohibit Use as USB Device] <Use as USB Device> is set to <Off>. It is not possible to

connect to a computer via USB

<Use as USB

vice>(P. 290)

[Prohibit Use as USB Storage Device] <Use USB Storage Device> is set to <Off>. It is not possible to

use USB memory devices.

<Use USB Storage

vice>(P. 290)

◼ [Network]

[Communication Oper

ational Policy]

Increase the security of communications by requiring the verication of signatures and certicates.

[Always Verify Signatures for SMS/

ebDAV Server Functions]

This function is not available on this machine, giving no

change to the security le

vel.

[Always Verify Server Certicate When

Using TLS]

The following settings in [Use TLS for POP] are set to [On].

● [V

erify Certicate]

● [Add CN to Verication Items]

Receiving I-Faxes for

Printing

(P. 156)

[Prohibit Cleartext Authentication for

Server Functions]

<Dedicated Port Authentication Method> is set to <Mode

2>. When using the machine as a server, plain text

authentication and functions that use plain text

authentication are not available.

<Dedicated Port

Authentication

Method>(P

. 286)

[Prohibit Use of SNMPv1] In <SNMP Settings>, <SNMPv1 Settings> is set to <Off>. It

is not possible to use SNMPv1 when obtaining device

information from the computer.

<SNMP

Settings>(P

. 285)

● This setting does not apply to communication with IEEE 802.1X networks, e

ven if [Always Verify Server

Certicate When Using TLS] is set to [On].

● If [Prohibit Cleartext Authentication for Server Functions] is set to [On] and your device management

software or driver version is old, it may not be possible to connect to the machine. Ensure that you are using

the latest versions.

[Port Usage Policy]

event external breaches by closing unused ports.

[Restrict LPD Port (Port Number: 515)] In <LPD Settings>, <LPD Print Settings> is set to <Off>. It is

not possible to perform LPD printing.

<LPD Settings>(P. 283)

[Restrict RAW Port (Port Number: 9100)] In <RAW Settings>, <RAW Print Settings> is set to <Off>. It

is not possible to perform RA

W printing.

<RAW

Settings>(P

. 283)

[Restrict FTP Port (Port Number: 21)] This function is not available on this machine, giving no

change to the security level.

[Restrict WSD Port (Port Number: 3702,

60000)]

The following settings in <WSD Settings> are set to <Off>.

It is not possible to use WSD functions.

● <Use WSD Printing>

● <Use WSD Br

owsing>

● <Use Multicast Discovery>

<WSD

Settings>(P

. 283)

[Restrict BMLinkS Port (Port Number:

1900)]

This function is not available on this machine, giving no

change to the security level.

Managing the Machine

252

[Restrict IPP Port (Port Number: 631)] Part of the settings to enable printing from mobile devices

using applications will be turned <Off>, disabling part of

printing fr

om mobile devices using applications.

Linking with Mobile

vices(P. 160)

[Restrict SMB Port (Port Number: 137, 138,

139, 445)]

This function is not available on this machine, giving no

change to the security level.

[Restrict SMTP Port (Port Number: 25)] This function is not available on this machine, giving no

change to the security le

vel.

[Restrict Dedicated Port (Port Number:

9002, 9006, 9007, 9011-9015, 9017-9019,

9022, 9023, 9025, 20317, 47545-47547)]

<Dedicated Port Settings> is set to <Off>. It is not possible

to use dedicated ports.

<Dedicated Port

Settings>(P

. 286)

[Restrict Remote Operator's Software Port

(Port Number: 5900)]

This function is not available on this machine, giving no

change to the security le

vel.

[Restrict SIP (IP Fax) Port (Port Number:

5004, 5005, 5060, 5061, 49152)]

This function is not available on this machine, giving no

change to the security le

vel.

[Restrict mDNS Port (Port Number: 5353)] The following settings will be turned <Off>, and part of the

settings to enable printing fr

om mobile devices using

applications will also be turned <Off>. It will be disabled to

search the network or perform automatic settings using

mDNS. In addition, part of printing from mobile devices

using applications will be disabled as well.

● <mDNS Settings> (IPv4)

● <mDNS Settings> (IPv6)

<IPv4

Settings>(P

. 279)

<IPv6

Settings>(P

. 281)

Linking with Mobile

vices(P. 160)

[Restrict SLP Port (Port Number: 427)] In [Multicast Discovery Settings], [Discovery Response] is

set to [Off]. It is not possible to search the network or

perform automatic settings using SLP.

Conguring SLP

Communication with

vice Management

Software(P. 65)

[Restrict SNMP Port (Port Number: 161)] In <SNMP Settings>, the <SNMPv1 Settings> and <SNMPv3

Settings> are set to <Off>. It is not possible to obtain

device information from the computer or congure

settings using SNMP.

<SNMP

Settings>(P

. 285)

◼ [Authentication]

[Authentication Oper

ational Policy]

[Prohibit Guest Users to Use Device] This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to the security level.

[Force Setting of Auto Logout] This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to the security level.

[Passwor

d Operational Policy]

[Prohibit Caching of Password for External Servers] This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to the

security le

vel.

[Display Warning When Default Password Is in Use] This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to the

security le

vel.

[Prohibit Use of Default Password for Remote Access] This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to the

security le

vel.

Managing the Machine

253

[Passwor

d Settings Policy]

[Minimum Number of Characters for Password] This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to

the security le

vel.

[Password Validity Period] This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to

the security le

vel.

[Prohibit Use of 3 or More Identical Consecutive

Char

acters]

This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to

the security level.

[Force Use of at Least 1 Uppercase Character] This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to

the security le

vel.

[Force Use of at Least 1 Lowercase Character] This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to

the security le

vel.

[Force Use of at Least 1 Digit] This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to

the security le

vel.

[Force Use of at Least 1 Symbol] This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to

the security le

vel.

[Lock

out Policy]

Block users from logging in for a specied period of time after a certain number of consecutive invalid login attempts.

[Enable Lockout] In <Lockout Settings>, <Enable Lockout> is set to <On>. Specify the

values for <Lock

out Threshold> and <Lockout Period>.

<Lockout

Settings>(P

. 372)

◼ [Ke

y/Certicate]

Protect important data by preventing the use of weak encryption, or by saving encrypted user passwords and keys in a

designated hardware component.

[Prohibit Use of Weak Encryption] <Prohibit Use of Weak Encryption> is set to <On>. It is not

possible to use weak encryption.

<Encryption

Settings>(P. 372)

[Prohibit Use of Key/Certicate with Weak

Encryption]

In <Prohibit Use of Weak Encryption>, <Prohibit Key/Cert.

with Weak Encryption> is set to <On>. It is not possible to

use a key or certicate with weak encryption.

<Encryption

Settings>(P. 372)

[Use TPM to Store Password and Key] This function is not available on this machine, giving no

change to the security level.

◼ [Log]

[Force Recording of Audit Log] This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to the security level.

[Force SNTP Settings] This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to the security level.

◼ [

Job]

[Printing Policy]

Managing the Machine

254

[Prohibit Immediate Printing of Received Jobs] This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to the

security le

vel.

[Sending/Receiving Policy]

[Allow Sending Only to Registered Addresses] This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to the

security le

vel.

[Force Conrmation of Fax Number] This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to the

security le

vel.

[Prohibit Auto Forwarding] This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to the

security le

vel.

◼ [Stor

age]

[Force Complete Deletion of Data] This function is not available on this machine, giving no change to the security level.

To Apply the Security Policy to the Machine

You can import the security policy edited on the imageRUNNER ADVANCE Series or using Device Management

Software to apply it to this machine. In addition, you can export the security policy as applied to this machine to apply

it to other machines

. Importing/Exporting the Setting Data(P. 256)

Only Canon devices that are compatible with security policy settings

● The security policy settings can only be imported if the security policy setting passwor

d on the exporting

machine matches that of the importing machine, or if no password has been set for the importing machine.

If no password has been set for the importing machine, the password congured for the exporting machine

is set to the importing machine.

● You cannot set or change the security policy on this machine.

Managing the Machine

255

Importing/Exporting the Setting Data

8054-055

Machine settings data can be saved on your computer (export). Data that is saved on your computer can also be

egistered in the machine (import). Data exported from this machine can be imported to another machine of the

same model. So you can easily copy a variety of settings data to multiple machines. To use these features, it is

required that you have logged in to System Manager Mode.

Exporting the Setting Data(P. 256)

Importing the Setting Data(P. 257)

Do not turn OFF the machine until the import or export process is complete

● It may tak

e a few minutes to complete the process. If the machine is turned OFF during the process, it may

result in damage to data or the machine.

Do not operate the machine during the import or export process

● Before importing/exporting, check that no operation such as printing documents is currently proceeding.

● For the settings that cannot be imported/e

xported, see

Setting Menu List(P. 265) .

● Y

ou can also import/export settings data via a USB memory device by using the operation panel of the

machine.

<Import/Export>(P. 370)

● For mor

e information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the

Remote UI, see

Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 248) .

Exporting the Setting Data

ou can export machine settings data, and save them on a computer. It is recommended that you regularly back up

important settings.

Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.

Starting Remote

UI(P

. 238)

Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.

Remote UI Screen(P. 239)

Select [Data Management] [Export].

Specify the encryption password.

Managing the Machine

256

[Encryption Password]

Enter a passwor

d to encrypt the export data using alphanumeric characters. Enter the same password in

[Conrm]. To export the data, you must set an encryption password.

● The passwor

d is required when exported data is imported.

Importing the Setting Data(P. 257)

Click [Start Exporting].

Follow the on-screen instructions to specify the location where to save the exported

data.

➠ The setting data will be saved.

Importing the Setting Data

Load (import) data that was e

xported from the machine. You can also import machine settings data from another

machine to your machine if the models are the same.

Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.

Starting Remote

UI(P

. 238)

Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.

Remote UI Screen(P. 239)

Select [Data Management]

[Import].

Specify the le to import, and enter the passwor

Managing the Machine

257

[File Path]

Click [Br

owse] and select the le. You can only import a device conguration information le (*.dcm).

[Decryption Password]

Enter the password set when the settings were exported.

Click [Start Importing].

Click [OK].

➠ The selected settings data is loaded into the machine.

Click [OK].

➠ The machine automatically r

estarts.

Managing the Machine

258

Updating the Firmware

8054-056

For the rmwar

e, select the method of update depending on the installation condition of the machine. There are two

methods of update: the one is to access the latest rmware version on the Internet from the machine and perform the

update if the version currently installed in the machine is not the latest, and the other is to access the latest rmware

version on the Internet from a computer and perform the update from the computer if the version currently installed

in the machine is not the latest. In an environment where connection to the Internet cannot be established via a

wireless LAN, establish connection via a wired LAN or USB and perform the update from the computer.

Installation Condition of the Machine How to Install the Update

Wireless LAN connection Updating via the Internet(P. 259)

Wired LAN connection Updating via the Internet(P. 259)

Updating from a Computer(P. 260)

USB connection Updating from a Computer(P. 260)

● If you ar

e in an IPv6 environment, you cannot perform rmware update. Use USB to re-establish connection,

and perform the update from the computer.

Checking the rmwar

e version

● You can check the rmware version from the operation panel of the machine. After completion of the

rmware update operation, make sure that the update was performed correctly.

Checking the Firmware

ersion(P. 260)

Updating via the Internet

ou can access the Canon server from the machine to update the rmware to the latest version.

Select <Menu> in the Home screen.

Home Screen(P. 91)

Select <Management Settings>.

● If the login scr

een appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.

Logging in to the Machine(P. 101)

Select <Remote UI Settings/Update Firmware> <Update Firmware>.

Select <Via Internet>.

➠ A check for e

xistence of the latest rmware is performed.

Managing the Machine

259

● If the <This is the latest rmwar

e version.> message is displayed, there is no need to update the rmware.

Check the message and select <Yes>.

When a license screen appears, press

Select <OK>.

➠ When the rmwar

e update is complete, the machine restarts automatically.

● Do not turn OFF the machine while the r

estart is in progress.

Updating from a Computer

When you have downloaded the latest rmware version from the Canon website, use "User Support Tool" utility

software to update the rmware from a computer. For how to perform rmware update from a computer, see the

"User Support Tool Operation Guide" included with the rmware.

To Put the Machine into a Firmware Update Waiting State

<Menu> <Management Settings> <Remote UI Settings/Update Firmware> <Update

Firmwar

Checking the Firmware Version

Select <Menu> in the Home screen.

Home Screen(P. 91)

Select <Management Settings>.

● If the login scr

een appears, enter the correct ID and PIN.

Logging in to the Machine(P. 101)

Select <Remote UI Settings/Update Firmware> <Update Firmware>.

Select <Version Information>.

➠ The curr

ent rmware version is displayed.

Managing the Machine

260

Managing the Machine

261

Initializing Settings

8054-057

You can restore the following settings:

Initializing Menu(P. 262)

Initializing Key and Certicate(P

. 262)

Initializing All Data/Settings(P. 263)

Initializing Menu

You can restore the settings of the machine ( Setting Menu List(P. 265) ). Depending on the settings selected, you

may need to r

estart the machine after initialization.

<Menu> <Management Settings> <Data Management> <Initialize Menu> Select the item

you want to initialize <Yes> (Restart the machine if necessary)

● Y

ou can restore the settings only for <Network> in <Preferences>.

<Menu>

<Preferences> <Network> <Initialize Network Settings> <Yes> Restart the machine

Initializing Key and Certicate

ou can restore the settings of the key and certicate and the CA certicate. Note that all the keys and certicates and

CA certicates that you registered in the machine (except the preinstalled keys and CA certicates) will be deleted after

initializing.

● After initializing, functions that r

equire a key and certicate such as TLS encrypted communication and IKE

of IPSec communication are not available. To use these functions, congure the settings for the key and

certicate and activate the functions again.

<Menu> <Management Settings> <Data Management> <Initialize Key and

Certicate>

<Yes>

Managing the Machine

262

Initializing All Data/Settings

This enables restoration of all data and machine settings, including logs, to the factory default values. This prevents

sensitive data from being leaked when replacing or disposing of the machine. When the initialization process nishes,

the machine automatically restarts.

● Befor

e initializing, make sure that there are no documents being processed or waiting to be processed.

These documents will be deleted when initialization is performed.

● To use the machine after initializing it, you need to congure all settings from the beginning.

LINKS

Conguring the Ke

y and Certicate for TLS(P. 205)

Managing the Machine

263

Setting Menu List

Setting Menu List ...........................................................................................................................................

265

<Preferences> .................................................................................................................................................... 266

<Display Settings> ........................................................................................................................................ 267

<English Keyboard Layout> .......................................................................................................................... 271

<Timer/Energy Settings> .............................................................................................................................. 272

<Network> .................................................................................................................................................... 276

<External Interface> ..................................................................................................................................... 290

<Accessibility> .............................................................................................................................................. 291

<Volume Settings> ........................................................................................................................................ 293

<Adjustment/Maintenance> ............................................................................................................................. 295

<Adjust Image Quality> ................................................................................................................................ 296

<Maintenance> ............................................................................................................................................. 305

<Function Settings> .......................................................................................................................................... 306

<Common> ................................................................................................................................................... 307

<Printer> ...................................................................................................................................................... 310

<Receive> ..................................................................................................................................................... 354

<Access Files> ............................................................................................................................................... 356

<Secure Print> .............................................................................................................................................. 362

<Management Settings> ................................................................................................................................... 363

<User Management> .................................................................................................................................... 364

<Device Management> ................................................................................................................................. 365

<Remote UI Settings/Update Firmware> ...................................................................................................... 368

<Data Management> .................................................................................................................................... 370

<Security Settings> ....................................................................................................................................... 372

Setting Menu List

264

Setting Menu List

8054-058

ou can customize the machine based on your environment and needs by conguring settings described in this

chapter. To start conguration, select <Menu> on the Home screen (

Home Screen(P. 91) ). This section describes

what each item in the setting menu can congur

● Refer to the PDF le included in the User

's Guide that summarizes the setting menu.

Menu Route

Map

(P. 440)

<Preferences>(P. 266) This section describes the display and network settings.

<Adjustment/Maintenance>(P. 295) This section describes how to adjust print image quality and the cleaning functions of the

machine.

<Function Settings>(P. 306) This section describes the settings for the individual functions.

<Management Settings>(P. 363) This section describes the user and hardware information management, security

settings, etc.

● You can print the setting menu in list form to check the current settings: Printing Lists of

Settings(P. 398)

Setting Menu List

265

8054-059

Item Description

<Display Settings>(P. 267) This section describes the settings related to viewing of the display.

<English Keyboard Layout>(P. 271) This section describes the USB keyboard settings.

<Timer/Energy Settings>(P. 272) This section describes the timer settings and energy settings.

<Network>(P. 276) This section describes the network settings.

<External Interface>(P. 290) This section describes the USB settings and other relevant settings.

<Accessibility>(P. 291) This section describes settings for improving accessibility, such as inverting the screen

colors and setting the message display time.

<Volume Settings>(P. 293) This section describes the sound volume settings.

Setting Menu List

266

8054-05A

All the settings r

elated to viewing of the display are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger

(

<Default Screen After Startup/Restoration>(P. 267)

<Button Display Order on Home Screen>(P. 267)

<Language>(P. 267)

<Remote UI Language>(P. 268)

<Millimeter/Inch Entry Switch>(P. 268)

<Gram/Pound Switch>(P. 269)

<Displ. Timing for Cartridge Prep. Notif.>(P. 269)

<Show Warnings>(P. 269)

<Action When Warning>(P. 270)

<Display IP Address>(P. 270)

Asterisks (

)

● Settings mark

ed with "

" cannot be imported or exported.

● Settings marked with "

" may be unavailable or vary or have different defaults depending on your country

or region.

By default, the Home scr

een is displayed immediately after the machine is turned ON or when the Auto Reset function

is performed. Specify the setting to change the default screen and display the main screen of a different function.

<Home>

<Menu> <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Default Screen After Startup/

Restor

ation>

Select a function to display the desired screen

Congur

e the settings for the buttons displayed in the Home screen.

Customizing the Home Screen(P. 129)

Select the display language used for the display, reports, and lists.

Setting Menu List

267

<Español>

<Fr

ançais>

<Português>

<日本語>

<中文(繁體)>

<中文(简体)>

<한국어>

<Menu> <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Language> Select a language <Yes>

Select the display language used for the Remote UI scr

eens.

<Fr

ench>

<Menu> <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Remote UI Language> Select a

language

Select the unit of measur

ement.

<Inch>

<Menu> <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Millimeter/Inch Entry Switch> Select

Setting Menu List

268

Select the unit of measur

ement for the basis weight. This setting is available when <Select Country/Region> is set to

<United States (US)>.

<Gram>

<Pound>

<Menu> <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Gram/Pound Switch> Select <Gram> or

<Pound>

<Displ. Timing for Cartridge Prep. Notif.>

Set the display timing for the message notifying you that the amount r

emaining in the toner cartridges is low.

<Auto>

<Custom> Enter toner level

Specify whether to display a message telling that the amount r

emaining in the toner cartridges is low.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Show Warnings> <Low Cartridge

vel>

Select <Off> or <On>

● When <Action When W

arning> is set to <Stop Printing>, you cannot set this item to <Off>.

● When <Continue Print. When Amount in Cart. Low> is set to <Off>, the message will appear even if you set

this item to <Off>.

<Continue Print. When Amount in Cart. Low>(P. 354)

Setting Menu List

269

Specify whether to continue printing when the amount remaining in the toner cartridges is low.

<Menu> <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Action When Warning> <Low Cartridge

vel>

Select <Continue Printing> or <Stop Printing>

● If you change the setting of this item fr

om <Continue Printing> to <Stop Printing>, <Show Warnings> is set

to <On>.

Specify whether to display the machine

's IPv4 address on the <Status Monitor> screen.

Scr

een(P. 93)

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Display IP Address> Select <Off> or

<On>

Setting Menu List

270

8054-05C

Specify the layout of an USB k

eyboard if connected to the machine. The factory default settings differ depending on

the country or region where the machine was purchased.

<Menu> <Preferences> <English Keyboard Layout> Select <USA Layout> or <UK Layout>

Setting Menu List

271

8054-05E

All the settings r

elated to the timer and energy are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger

(

<Current Date/Time Settings>(P. 272)

<Date/Time Settings>(P. 272)

<Date Format>(P. 273)

<Time Format>(P. 273)

<Auto Reset Time>(P. 274)

<Function After Auto Reset>(P. 274)

<Auto Sleep Time>(P. 275)

<Auto Sleep Daily Timer>(P. 275)

<Time Settings for Auto Adjust Gradation>(P. 275)

<Sleep Mode Exit Time Settings>(P. 275)

Asterisks (

)

● Settings mark

ed with "

" cannot be imported or exported.

● Settings marked with "

" may be unavailable or vary or have different defaults depending on your country

or region.

Set the curr

ent date and time.

Setting the Date/Time(P. 9)

● Set <Time Zone> befor

e setting the current date and time. If the <Time Zone> setting is changed, the current

date and time are also changed accordingly.

● The curr

ent date and time cannot be changed for 1 hour after daylight saving time is in effect.

Specify the date and time standar

d of the region in which the machine is to be installed.

Setting Menu List

272

Select the time zone. If the time zone setting is changed, the values set in <Current Date/Time Settings> are also

changed accor

dingly.

Setting the Date/Time(P. 9)

<(UTC-12:00) International Date Line West> to <(UTC-05:00) Eastern Time (US & Canada)> to

<(UT

C+14:00) Kiritimati Island>

UTC

● Coor

dinated Universal Time (UTC) is the primary time standard by which the world regulates clocks

and time. The correct UTC time zone setting is required for Internet communications.

Enable or disable daylight saving time. If daylight saving time is enabled, specify the dates from which and to

which daylight saving time is in effect.

<Off>

<On>

Start: Month, W

eek, Day

End: Month, Week, Day

<Menu> <Preferences> <Timer/Energy Settings> <Date/Time Settings> <Daylight Saving

Time Settings> Select <On>, and specify the dates <Apply>

Select the date format (or

der of year, month, and day).

<Menu> <Preferences> <Timer/Energy Settings> <Date Format> Select the date format

Select the 12- or 24-hour clock display setting.

<12 Hour (AM/PM)>

Setting Menu List

273

<24 Hour>

<Menu> <Preferences> <Timer/Energy Settings> <Time Format> Select the display

setting

If a key is not pressed for a specied period of time, the scr

een and the settings are initialized to display the

default screen (Auto Reset). Specify the interval at which the Auto Reset is performed. The Auto Reset is not

performed in the following cases:

● The setting menu is displayed.

● The machine is processing data, such as when printing documents.

● An error message is displayed and the Error indicator is blinking (However, Auto Reset is performed when the

error does not prevent the user from continuing to use a function.)

0 (Auto Reset is disabled.)

1 to 2

to 9 (min.)

<Menu> <Preferences> <Timer/Energy Settings> <Auto Reset Time> Specify the Auto

Reset time

● The scr

een displayed after the Auto Reset is performed can be selected in <Function After Auto Reset>.

Select whether to r

eturn the display to the default screen after the Auto Reset is performed. If <Default Function> is

selected, the main screen of the function selected in <Default Screen After Startup/Restoration> is displayed (

<Default Screen After Startup/Restoration>(P. 267) ). If <Selected Function> is selected, the display r

eturns to the

main screen of the function that was selected.

<Menu> <Preferences> <Timer/Energy Settings> <Function After Auto Reset> Select

Setting Menu List

274

If the machine has not been operated or has had no data to process for a specied period of time, the machine enters

sleep mode to save energy consumption (Auto Sleep). Specify the period of time after which auto sleep is performed.

Auto Sleep is not performed when the setting menu is displayed. We recommend using the factory default settings to

save the most power. Entering Sleep Mode(P. 132)

1 to 60 (min.)

ou can specify the time when the machine is automatically set to the sleep mode.

Entering Sleep Mode(P. 132)

<Off>

<On>

(0:00 to 23:59)

The automatic gr

adation adjustment (quick adjustment) can be performed at a specied time every day. Set the time

to automatically perform quick adjustment in this option.

<Off>

<On>

(0:00 to 23:59)

<On> Enter the time

Specify the time when the machine is r

ecovered from the sleep mode.

Entering Sleep Mode(P. 132)

<Off>

<On>

(0:00 to 23:59)

Setting Menu List

275

8054-05F

All the settings r

elated to the network are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger (

<Select Wired/Wireless LAN>(P. 276)

<Wireless LAN Settings>(P. 276)

<Direct Connection Settings>(P. 278)

<Easy Connection via PC>(P. 279)

<TCP/IP Settings>(P. 279)

<SNMP Settings>(P. 285)

<Dedicated Port Settings>(P. 286)

<Dedicated Port Authentication Method>(P. 286)

<Waiting Time for Connection at Startup>(P. 286)

<Ethernet Driver Settings>(P. 287)

<IEEE 802.1X Settings>(P. 287)

<Firewall Settings>(P. 287)

<Device Settings Management On/Off>(P. 289)

<Monitoring Service>(P. 289)

<RMT-SW>(P. 289)

<Initialize Network Settings>(P. 289)

Asterisks (

)

● Settings mark

ed with "

" cannot be imported or exported.

● Settings marked with "

" may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options, or other

setting items.

When switching the machine fr

om Wireless LAN to Wired LAN, you need to specify the setting. Conversely, when

switching the machine from Wired LAN to Wireless LAN, you do not need to specify this setting (You can switch using

the following <Wireless LAN Settings>).

Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN(P. 13)

Wir

eless LAN routers that can access the machine are automatically located, so you can select from the list. You must

manually enter a network key, such as a WEP key or a PSK.

Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless

Router

(P. 21)

Select to congur

e the settings your wireless router is equipped with Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) or you want

to manually specify authentication and encryption settings.

Setting Menu List

276

Select to congur

e a wireless connection by manually entering the network name. By using this method, you

can specify authentication and encryption settings in detail.

Setting Up Connection by Specifying

Detailed Settings(P

. 23)

<None>

<WEP>

WEP Key 1 to 4

<Shar

ed Key>

WEP Key 1 to 4

<Auto>

<AES-CCMP>

Select to automatically congur

e a wireless connection by using the button on a WPS wireless router.

Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode(P. 17)

Select to congure a wireless connection by entering a PIN code for a WPS wireless router. Setting Up

Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode(P. 19)

Select to specify the setting for saving power consumption or check the current wireless LAN settings.

Select whether or not the machine enters Power Save Mode based on signals emitted from the wireless

router.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <Wireless LAN Settings> Read the displayed

message

<OK> <Power Save Mode> Select <Off> or <On>

Select to vie

w the current wireless LAN settings.

Viewing Network Settings(P. 34)

<Wir

eless LAN Status>

Setting Menu List

277

Set whether to connect dir

ectly. By enabling this function, connecting directly with the machine is possible even in an

environment without an access point or wireless LAN router.

Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode)(P. 163)

<Off>

<On>

Specify the time to automatically disconnect after Direct Connection is established.

0 (Do not terminate session automatically)

1 to 60 (min.)

<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <Direct Connection Settings> <Time Until Direct

Connection T

ermination>

Enter the time

Congure the SSID/network k

ey arbitrarily. If you want to connect multiple mobile devices to the machine at the

same time, you need to congure both SSID and network key arbitrarily.

<Off>

<On>

<SSID>

<Use Custom Network Ke

<Off>

<On>

<Network Ke

<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <Direct Connection Settings> <Access Point Mode

Settings> <Use Custom SSID>/<Use Custom Network Key> <On> Enter the SSID/network

<Apply>

Specify whether to keep the machine waiting for Direct Connection.

<Off>

<On>

Setting Menu List

278

<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <Direct Connection Settings> <Keep Enabled If SSID/

Ntwk Ke

y Spcfd>

Select <Off> or <On> Restart the machine

● When setting this item to <On>, congur

e in advance a custom SSID or network key using <Access

Point Mode Settings>.

<Cong. IP Addr

ess For Direct Conn.>

Manually enter the machine's IP address at the time of Direct Connection.

192.168.22.1

<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <Direct Connection Settings> <Cong. IP Addr

ess For

Direct Conn.>

Enter an arbitrary IP address

Start the pr

ocedure for Easy Connection via PC (cableless setup mode). You can use Canon Laser NW Device Setup

Utility to congure network settings via a computer.

<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <Easy Connection via PC> <Yes> ( ) The

connection pr

ocess starts

● Do

wnload Canon Laser NW Device Setup Utility from the Canon website (https://global.canon/).

Specify settings for using the machine in a T

CP/IP network, such as IP address settings.

Specify settings for using the machine in an IPv4 network.

<IP Addr

ess Settings>

Congure the IP address, which is used for identifying devices, such as computers and printers, on a TCP/IP

network.

Setting IPv4 Address(P. 28)

Setting Menu List

279

<Off>

<DHCP>

<Off>

<On>

<IP Address>: 0.0.0.0

<Subnet Mask>: 0.0.0.0

<Gateway Address>: 0.0.0.0

Select to check that the machine is connected to a computer o

ver a network.

Testing the Network

Connection

(P. 29)

Specify settings for Domain Name System (DNS), which provides a host name for IP address resolutions.

Conguring DNS(P

. 51)

<Primary DNS Server>: 0.0.0.0

<Secondary DNS Server>: 0.0.0.0

<Off>

<On>

0 to 24 to 48 (hr.)

Specify settings for using DNS functions without DNS servers.

Conguring DNS(P

. 51)

<Off>

<On>

If DHCP is enabled, use these settings to select whether to use the DHCP optional functions to acquir

e the

DNS server address or the domain name.

Conguring DNS

(P. 51)

Setting Menu List

280

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

<On>

<Acquir

e Domain Name>

<Off>

<On>

<Acquir

e WINS Server Address>

<Off>

<On>

<Acquir

e POP Server Address>

<Off>

<On>

Specify settings for using the machine in an IPv6 network.

Enable or disable IPv6 in the machine. Y

ou can also view the current settings.

Setting IPv6

Addr

esses(P. 31)

<Off>

<On>

<Link-Local Addr

ess>

<Prex Length>

Enable or disable stateless addr

esses.

Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 31)

<Off>

<On>

<Stateless Addr

ess>

<Prex Length>

Enable or disable the stateful addr

ess that is acquired via DHCPv6.

Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 31)

<Off>

Setting Menu List

281

<On>

<Stateful Addr

ess>

<Prex Length>

Specify settings for Domain Name System (DNS), which pr

ovides a host name for IP address resolutions.

Conguring DNS(P

. 51)

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

<On>

<Regist. Manual Addr.>

<Off>

<On>

<Regist. Stateful Addr.>

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

<On>

0 to 24

to 48 (hr.)

Specify settings for using DNS functions without DNS servers.

Conguring DNS(P

. 51)

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

<On>

If DHCP is enabled, use these settings to select whether to use the DHCP optional functions to acquir

e the

DNS server address or the domain name.

Conguring DNS

(P. 51)

<Off>

<On>

Setting Menu List

282

<Off>

<On>

Specify settings for Windows Internet Name Service (WINS), which provides a computer name for IP address

esolutions in a mixed network environment of NetBIOS and TCP/IP.

Conguring WINS(P

. 57)

<Off>

<On>

<WINS Server Address>: 0.0.0.0

Enable or disable LPD, a printing protocol that can be used on any hardware platform or operating system. You

can also set the reception timeout period after which printing is canceled if print data reception is interrupted.

Conguring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions(P. 37)

<Off>

<On>

1 to 5 to 60 (min.)

Enable or disable RAW, a Windows specic printing pr

otocol. You can also set the reception timeout period after

which printing is canceled if print data reception is interrupted.

Conguring Printing Pr

otocols and WSD

Functions(P. 37)

<Off>

<On>

1 to 5 to 60 (min.)

Enable or disable automatic browsing and acquiring information for the printer by using the WSD protocol.

Conguring Printing Pr

otocols and WSD Functions(P. 37)

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

<On>

<Use Multicast Disco

very>

<Off>

<On>

Setting Menu List

283

Enable or disable HTTP, which is required for communications with a computer, such as when using the Remote

UI or WSD printing. Disabling HTTP Communication(P. 234)

<Off>

<On>

Select whether to perform encrypted communication by establishing a virtual private network (VPN) via IPSec.

Conguring IPSec Settings(P

. 219)

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <TCP/IP Settings> <Use IPSec> Select <Off> or

<On> Restart the machine

Change port numbers for protocols according to the network environment. Changing Port Numbers(P. 202)

<LPD>

1 to 515 to 65535

<RA

1 to 9100

to 65535

1 to 3702 to 65535

<HT

TP>

1 to 80

to 65535

<Multicast Disco

very>

1 to 427

to 65535

<POP3>

1 to 110

to 65535

<SNMP>

1 to 161 to 65535

Select the maximum size of packets the machine sends or receives. Changing the Maximum Transmission

Unit(P

. 49)

<1300>

<1400>

<1500>

Setting Menu List

284

Specify the settings for monitoring and controlling the machine from a computer running SNMP-compatible software.

Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP(P. 59)

Enable or disable SNMPv1. When enabling SNMPv1, specify a community name and access privileges to

Management Information Base (MIB) objects.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <SNMP Settings> <SNMPv1 Settings> Select <Off>

or <On> Restart the machine

Enable or disable SNMPv3. Use the Remote UI to specify detailed settings that are applied when SNMPv3 is

enabled.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <SNMP Settings> <SNMPv3 Settings> Select <Off>

or <On> Restart the machine

<Acquir

e Printer Mngt. Info. from Host>

Enable or disable the monitoring of printer management information from a networked computer running

SNMP-compatible softwar

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <SNMP Settings> <Acquire Printer Mngt. Info. from

Host> Select <Off> or <On> Restart the machine

<Format Host Rsr

cs. MIB to RFC2790>

Specify whether to conform to the advanced specications (RFC2790) of the pr

otocol when monitoring the

machine status from the SNMP-compatible software.

<Off>

<On>

Setting Menu List

285

<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <SNMP Settings> <Format Host Resources MIB to

RFC2790> Select <Off> or <On> Restart the machine

Enable or disable the dedicated port. The dedicated port is used when printing fr

om the computer and when browsing

or specifying the machine settings over the network.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <Dedicated Port Settings> Select <Off> or <On>

Restart the machine

Specify whether to limit the authentication method specically to the secur

e one when using the dedicated port. If

<Mode 2> is selected, the authentication method is limited specically to the secure one.

<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <Dedicated Port Authentication Method> Select

● If <Mode 2> is selected, you cannot establish a connection fr

om the device management software or driver

in some cases.

Specify a wait time for connecting to a network. Select the setting depending on the network envir

onment.

Setting a

ait Time for Connecting to a Network(P. 50)

to 300 (sec.)

Setting Menu List

286

Select the Ethernet type (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T) and the communication mode of Ethernet (half-duplex/

full-duplex). You can also view the MAC address for wired LAN.

Select whether to automatically detect or manually select the communication mode and the Ethernet type.

Conguring Ethernet Settings(P

. 47)

<Off>

<Ethernet T

ype>

<10BASE-T>

<100BASE-TX>

<1000BASE-T>

<On>

● When <Communication Mode> is set to <Half Duple

x>, you cannot select <1000BASE-T>.

Check the MAC address of the machine, which is a number unique to each communication device. Viewing

the MAC Address for Wired LAN(P. 34)

*1*2

Enable or disable IEEE 802.1X authentication.

Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings

(P. 226)

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <IEEE 802.1X Settings> Select <Off> or <On> Restart

the machine

Without pr

oper security, unauthorized third parties can access computers and other communication devices that are

connected to a network. To prevent this unauthorized access, specify the settings for packet lter, a feature that

restricts communication to devices with specied IP addresses or MAC addresses.

Setting Menu List

287

Enable or disable settings for ltering pack

ets sent to or received from devices with specied IPv4 addresses.

Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Settings(P. 196)

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <Firewall Settings> <IPv4 Address Filter> Select

<Outbound Filter> or <Inbound Filter> Select <Off> or <On> Restart the machine

<IPv6 Addr

ess Filter>

Enable or disable settings for ltering pack

ets sent to or received from devices with specied IPv6 addresses.

Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Settings(P. 196)

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <Firewall Settings> <IPv6 Address Filter> Select

<Outbound Filter> or <Inbound Filter> Select <Off> or <On> Restart the machine

<MA

C Address Filter>

Enable or disable settings for ltering packets sent to or received from devices with specied MAC addresses.

Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Settings(P. 199)

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

<On>

Setting Menu List

288

<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <Firewall Settings> <MAC Address Filter> Select

<Outbound Filter> or <Inbound Filter> Select <Off> or <On> Restart the machine

Specify whether to use imageW

ARE Enterprise Management Console plug-ins to manage machine data such as

settings. For detailed information on imageWARE Enterprise Management Console, contact your dealer or service

representative.

Conguring Settings for Communication between the Machine and Plug-ins

(P. 66)

<Off>

<On>

Enable communication with a r

emote monitoring server. Execution of this item enables information about the

machine to be periodically sent to the remote monitoring server connected to the machine.

<RMT-SW>

Leave this switch set to <Off>. When the service r

epresentative remotely performs device maintenance, you may be

asked to set the switch to <On>.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Preferences> <Network> <RMT-SW> Select <Off> or <On> Restart the

machine

Select to r

eturn the Network Settings to the factory defaults.

<Initialize Menu>(P. 371)

Setting Menu List

289

8054-05H

All the settings r

elated to the USB are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger (

Specify whether to enable or disable use of the USB port or a USB memory de

vice.

Enable or disable the USB port that is used for connecting the machine to a computer. Restricting the USB

Connection with a Computer

(P. 233)

<Off>

<On>

Specify whether to use a USB memory device.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Preferences> <External Interface> <USB Settings> <Use USB Storage

vice>

Select <Off> or <On> Restart the machine

Setting Menu List

290

8054-05J

All the settings r

elated to accessibility, such as inverting the screen colors and message display time, are listed with

descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger (

<Invert Screen Colors>(P. 291)

<Brightness>(P. 291)

<Contrast>(P. 291)

<Message Display Time>(P. 292)

<Scrolling Speed>(P. 292)

<Cursor Movement Type>(P. 292)

Select <On> to invert the display colors. Select <On> if the display is har

d to view even after the brightness was

adjusted in <Brightness>.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Preferences> <Accessibility> <Invert Screen Colors> Select <Off> or <On>

Adjust the brightness of the display to suit the installation location of the machine.

Five Levels

<Menu> <Preferences> <Accessibility> <Brightness> Adjust the brightness

Adjust the contr

ast (the difference between the light and dark parts) of the display to suit the installation location of

the machine.

Seven Levels

<Menu> <Preferences> <Accessibility> <Contrast> Adjust the contrast

Setting Menu List

291

Specify the interval in seconds at which two different messages are alternately displayed.

1 to 2 to 5 (sec.)

<Menu> <Preferences> <Accessibility> <Message Display Time> Enter a number for the

interval

Adjust the scr

olling speed of the screen by selecting from three levels.

<Slow>

<Standar

<Fast>

<Menu> <Preferences> <Accessibility> <Scrolling Speed> Select the speed

Congur

e how the cursor moves after a character is entered on the screen. If <Auto> is selected, the cursor

automatically moves to the next entry eld after text has been entered. If <Manual> is selected, use

to move the

cursor.

<Auto>

<Menu> <Preferences> <Accessibility> <Cursor Movement Type> Select <Auto> or

Setting Menu List

292

8054-05K

All the settings used to gener

ate the conrmation sound of a key being pressed, the sound indicating completion of

the printing process, and other sounds, are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger (

<Entry Tone>(P. 293)

<Invalid Entry Tone>(P. 293)

<Restock Supplies Tone>(P. 293)

<Warning Tone>(P. 293)

<Job Done Tone>(P. 294)

<Energy Saver Alert>(P. 294)

● For information about the setting pr

ocedures, see

Setting Sounds(P. 131) .

Select whether an entry tone is gener

ated when a key on the operation panel has been pressed.

<Off>

<On>

Select whether a tone is gener

ated when an invalid key operation has been performed, for example, when an invalid

numeric value has been entered.

<Off>

<On>

Select whether a tone is gener

ated that indicates the end of toner cartridge lifetime is approaching.

<Off>

<On>

Select whether to gener

ate a tone telling that a trouble has occurred on the machine, such as a paper jam, incorrect

operation, or press of an inoperable key.

<Off>

<On>

Setting Menu List

293

Select whether a tone is generated when printing has been completed.

<Off>

<On>

Select whether to gener

ate the notication tone when the machine enters or exits sleep mode.

<Off>

<On>

Setting Menu List

294

8054-05L

Item Description

<Adjust Image Quality>(P. 296) This section describes how to adjust image quality for printing.

<Maintenance>(P. 305) This section describes how to use the cleaning functions.

Setting Menu List

295

8054-05R

All the settings r

elated to image quality adjustment are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a

dagger (

<Auto Adjust Gradation>(P. 296)

<Auto Correction Settings>(P. 296)

<Correct Print Color Mismatch>(P. 297)

<Adjust Print Position>(P. 297)

<Special Processing>(P. 297)

Adjust the gr

adation, density, and color in printouts.

Adjusting Gradation(P. 392)

Congur

e the settings to automatically perform a quick gradation adjustment or color mismatch correction.

Select when to make an automatic quick gradation adjustment. If <Off> is selected, quick adjustment is not

made automatically

. You can also perform this adjustment manually (

Quick Adjust(P. 392) ).

<Off>

<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Auto Correction

Settings> <Auto Adjust Image Regularly> Select <Off> or the adjustment timing

Select the timing at which the Correct Print Color Mismatch function is to be performed automatically after the

machine is turned ON. Y

ou can also perform this adjustment manually (

Correcting "Print Color

Mismatch

"(P. 394) ).

<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Auto Correction

Settings> <Timing for Correct Print Color Mismatch> Select <After Printing First Job> or <When

urning Main Power ON>

Setting Menu List

296

Use this function if color shift has blurred the image. Correcting "Print Color Mismatch"(P. 394)

Adjust the print position for each paper source. The print position can be adjusted in the range from -0.20" to +0.20"

(-5.0 mm to +5.0 mm) in increments of 0.01" (0.1 mm). Adjusting Print Position(P. 395)

<Multi-Purpose Tray>

<Adjust V

ertically (Front Side)>

-0.20" to 0.00"

to + 0.20" (-5.0 to 0.0 to + 5.0 (mm))

<Adjust Horizontally (Fr

ont Side)>

-0.20" to 0.00"

to + 0.20" (-5.0 to 0.0 to + 5.0 (mm))

<Adjust V

ertically (Back Side)>

-0.20" to 0.00"

to + 0.20" (-5.0 to 0.0 to + 5.0 (mm))

-0.20" to 0.00"

to + 0.20" (-5.0 to 0.0 to + 5.0 (mm))

<Dr

awer 1>

-0.20" to 0.00"

to + 0.20" (-5.0 to 0.0 to + 5.0 (mm))

<Adjust Horizontally (Fr

ont Side)>

-0.20" to 0.00"

to + 0.20" (-5.0 to 0.0 to + 5.0 (mm))

-0.20" to 0.00" to + 0.20" (-5.0 to 0.0 to + 5.0 (mm))

-0.20" to 0.00"

to + 0.20" (-5.0 to 0.0 to + 5.0 (mm))

If the print r

esults on special types of paper are not satisfactory, the following settings may improve the quality of the

printouts.

When printing on the back side of printed paper, rough paper, or envelopes, the print results may be improved

y adjusting the following settings.

If printouts on the back side of printed paper are too light, select <On>. You can specify this setting

separately for each paper source.

<Multi-Purpose Tray>

<Off>

<On>

<Dr

awer 1>

<Off>

<On>

Setting Menu List

297

<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special

ocessing>

<Special Paper Processing> <Manual Back Side Print (2-Sided Only)> Select the

paper sour

<On>

● If

you set to <On>, image quality may be affected or a paper jam may occur when a certain length of time

elapses after printing on the front side or depending on the ambient humidity.

When printing on rough paper, especially when color images are printed too light, select <On>. You can

specify the settings separately for each paper source.

<Multi-Purpose Tray>

<Off>

<On>

<Dr

awer 1>

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special

ocessing>

<Special Paper Processing> <Rough Surface Paper Mode> Select the paper

sour

<On>

● If you set to <On>, the printing speed may be slo

wer or image quality may be affected.

If envelope aps cling to the envelope bodies when printing, select <On>.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special

ocessing>

( )

● If you set to <On>, toner may not be x

ed suciently, resulting in faded printouts.

Setting Menu List

298

Printouts may wrinkle depending on the paper to use. In this case, setting this item may solve the pr

oblem.

The improvement effect is stronger with <Mode 2> than with <Mode 1>.

<Off>

<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special

ocessing>

<Special Paper Processing> <Paper Wrinkle Correction> Select the

mode <Yes> ( )

● <Mode 1> is effective for envelopes, and <Mode 2>, for envelopes and thin paper.

● When <Mode 1> or <Mode 2> is specied, printed images may be blurry

If the printed paper curls, set this item. The improvement effect is stronger with <Mode 2> than with <Mode

1>. First try with <Mode 1>.

<Off>

<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special

ocessing>

<Special Paper Processing> <Paper Curl Correction> Select the

mode

● Setting a gr

eater improvement effect may result in faded printouts or slower printing speed.

When performing 2-sided printing in color, paper may stick together at the output. Setting to <On> will slow

wn the printing speed of prints that may easily stick together, to reduce sticking.

<Off>

<On>

Setting Menu List

299

Print density may be uneven when the machine is used in an environment with high humidity. In this case,

setting this item to <On> may solve the pr

oblem.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special Processing> <High

Humidity Mode> <On>

● If you set to <On> and use the machine in an envir

onment with low humidity, printed images and text

may be blurry.

When using the machine in an environment with low humidity, printed images and text may be blurry. In this

case, setting this item to <On> may solve the pr

oblem.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special Processing> <Low

Humidity Mode> <On>

● If you set to <On>, print density may be lo

wer or uneven when the machine is used in an environment

with high humidity.

If continuous printing involves generation of ghost images, setting this item to <On> may solve the problem.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special

ocessing>

Setting Menu List

300

● If you set to <On>, print density may be une

ven.

If the printed images are faint due to moisture condensation when performing 2-sided printing, setting to other

than <Off> may solve the pr

oblem.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special

Processing> <Reduce Condensation (Consec. 2-Sd Print)> Select the item

● If you set to <On>, the print may be faded or the printing speed may be slo

wer.

If printing on thin paper produces void in the leading edge of the paper, setting this item to <On> may solve the

oblem.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special

ocessing>

● If you set to <On>, printouts may be faded.

If print density is uneven in a way that the print looks like a water drops pattern, setting this item to <On> may

solve the pr

oblem.

<Off>

<On>

Setting Menu List

301

<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special

ocessing>

● If you set to <On>, print quality may be affected.

If white areas are lightly colored, setting this item to <On> may solve the problem.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special

ocessing>

● If you set to <On>, print density may be lighter.

If color mismatch occurs, setting to <On> may solve the problem.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special

ocessing>

● If you set to <On>, the printing speed may be slo

wer.

If streaks appear on printouts, setting to <On> may solve the problem.

<Off>

<On>

Setting Menu List

302

<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special

ocessing>

Toner may peel off the printed page depending on the paper type or the environmental conditions. In this case,

setting this item may solve the pr

oblem.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special

ocessing>

<Reduce Toner Flaking> Select the item

● If you set to <On>, ghost images may appear in blank ar

eas.

When black and white print data is mixed with color data, specify whether to prioritize the print speed or to

educe the toner usage of the cyan, magenta, and yellow toner cartridges when printing data.

<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special Processing> <Auto

Detect B&W/Color Original> Select the mode

Prioritizes the print speed when printing.

Reduces the toner usage of toner cartridges when printing.

Printouts may be faded immediately after replacement of toner cartridges with new ones. In this case, setting

this item to <On> may solve the pr

oblem.

<Off>

Setting Menu List

303

<On>

<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Special

ocessing>

● If you set to <On>, the setting will become effective with ne

xt replacement of toner cartridges.

● Immediately after cartridge replacement, a certain amount of time is required for toner to be evenly

distributed inside the cartridge.

The machine may make an unusual noise during continuous black and white printing. In this case, setting this

item to <Menu> may solve the pr

oblem.

<Off>

<On>

Setting Menu List

304

8054-05S

The cleaning functions ar

e listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger (

<Clean Fixing Assembly>(P. 305)

<Clean ITB>(P. 305)

<Control Condensation>(P. 305)

Clean the xing assembly after a toner cartridge is r

eplaced or if black streaks appear on printouts.

Cleaning the

Fixing Assembly(P

. 379)

Clean the tr

ansfer belt inside the machine to prevent the print quality from deteriorating.

Cleaning the Transfer

Belt (ITB)(P

. 380)

When the temper

ature changes rapidly in the environment where the machine is installed, condensation occurs, which

may cause fading or bleeding in images and text. Select <On> to remove dew condensation in the machine. When

selecting <On>, specify whether to restrict jobs.

<Off>

<On>

<Allo

w Job Printing During Process>

Check the message Select the item <Yes>

● While condensation r

emoval is being performed, printing may not be performed properly and blank paper

may be output.

● If you set to <On>, you need to keep the machine turned ON to maintain the effect of condensation removal.

Setting Menu List

305

8054-05U

Item Description

<Common>(P. 307) This section describes settings common to each function.

<Printer>(P. 310) This section describes how to specify printer settings.

<Receive>(P. 354) This section describes how to specify settings for receiving I-Faxes.

<Access Files>(P. 356) This section describes the settings for printing stored les.

<Secure Print>(P. 362) This section describes the settings for the Secure Print.

Setting Menu List

306

8054-05W

All the items r

elated to settings common to each function are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with

a dagger (

<Paper Feed Settings>(P. 307)

<Print Settings>(P. 308)

Congur

e paper feed settings.

Enable or disable the automatic drawer selection feature for the paper sources. If automatic drawer selection is

set to <On> when printing documents, the machine automatically selects a paper sour

ce that is loaded with the

appropriate paper size. Also, when the paper runs out, this setting enables continuous printing by switching

from one paper source to another that is loaded with the same paper size.

Automatically Selecting an

Appr

opriate Paper Source for Each Function(P. 127)

<Multi-Purpose Tray>

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

<On>

<Multi-Purpose T

ray>

<Off>

<On>

<Dr

awer 1>

<Off>

<On>

<Other>

<Multi-Purpose T

ray>

<Off>

<On>

<Dr

awer 1>

<Off>

<On>

Specify this setting when you print a document on paper with logos. In general use, to print on paper with

logos, you need to change ho

w the paper loaded in the paper source is facing depending on whether you are

performing 1- or 2-sided printing. However, if you change the setting to <Print Side Priority>, you can just load

the paper with the logo side facing down for 1-sided printing in the same way as for 2-sided printing. For more

information, see

Loading Preprinted Paper(P. 115) .

Setting Menu List

307

<Multi-Purpose Tray>

<Dr

awer 1>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Common> <Paper Feed Settings> <Switch Paper Feed

Method> Select the paper source Select <Speed Priority> or <Print Side Priority>

Paper Sources

Select the paper sour

ce that you want to change the setting for.

When using paper that has been pr

eprinted with a logo, you need to change how it is facing when you

perform 1-sided and 2-sided printing.

● W

e recommend selecting <Speed Priority> if you do not need to consider which side to print on.

o print on a specic side of paper, you do not need to ip over paper in the paper source whether 1- or 2-

sided printing is selected.

● If <Print Side Priority> is set for a paper sour

ce that is loaded with paper you cannot use for 2-sided printing

(

Available Paper(P. 416) ), <Speed Priority> is applied to the paper sour

ce instead. In this case, you need

to load the paper in the same way as when <Speed Priority> is selected (

Loading Preprinted

Paper(P

. 115) ).

● 1-sided printing speed may be slower when <Print Side Priority> is selected.

Congur

e printing operation settings.

You can congur

e so that if the machine stops printing a job due to an error, the job will be automatically

deleted after a specied period of time.

Setting Menu List

308

<Off>

<On>

0 to 5 to 240 (min.)

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Common> <Print Settings> <Auto Delete Suspended

Jobs> <On> Enter the time until deletion Restart the machine

Setting Menu List

309

8054-05X

All the settings r

elated to the printer are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger (

<Printer Settings>(P. 310)

<PDL Selection (Plug and Play)>(P. 352)

Asterisks (

)

● Settings mark

ed with "

" may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options, or other

setting items.

● Settings marked with "

" may be unavailable or vary or have different defaults depending on your country

or region.

● Settings marked with "

" cannot be imported or exported.

Priority of settings

● If a print setting is specied both from the printer driver and the operation panel of the machine, the

specication from the printer driver overrides that from the operation panel. The specication from the

operation panel becomes effective in some specic cases, such as when performing PS/PCL printing and

printing from UNIX or other operating system that does not support printer drivers.

Congur

e settings about printing and printer operations.

When the paper size of each paper source is set to <Free Size> in <Paper Settings>, you can specify the

oper

ation that is to be performed when the size of the loaded paper is signicantly different from the setting in

the printer driver.

<Multi-Purpose Tray>

<For

ce Output>

<Dr

awer 1>

Setting Menu List

310

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Action When Free Paper Size

Mismatch> Select a paper source Select <Force Output> or <Display Error>

Continues printing e

ven if the size setting in the printer driver is signicantly different from the size of the

loaded paper.

Displays an error message and stops printing when the setting in the printer driver is signicantly different

from the size of the loaded paper.

● If the printer driver

's settings do not match the size and type of loaded paper with <On> selected, a

paper jam or printing error may occur.

Set the number of copies to print.

1 to 999

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Copies> Set the number of

copies to print

<2-Sided Printing>

Select whether to make 2-sided printouts.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <2-Sided Printing> Select

Set the default paper size and type. Printing will be performed with paper of the size and type set here when

you want to print fr

om an OS not supporting printer drivers or from a mobile device or other device not

supporting paper size and type settings.

Available Paper(P. 416)

Setting Menu List

311

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Default Paper> Select the

paper size Select the paper type

Select whether to switch between printing on A4 and Letter size paper if one of these paper sizes is loaded but

the other is not. When you select <On>, if you specify A4 size paper to print fr

om the computer but A4 size

paper is not loaded in the machine, it will print your document on Letter size paper.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Paper Size Override> Select

● Y

ou can specify print settings, such as the number of copies or 1-sided/2-sided printing, from an

application or the printer driver. However, the <Paper Size Override> setting can only be specied on

the machine.

You can change settings related to print quality.

Adjust the toner density

ellow>/<Magenta>/<Cyan>/<Black>

17 Levels

17 Levels

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Print

Quality> <Density> <Density> Select the target color Adjust the

density <Apply> <Apply>

Setting Menu List

312

● Y

ou can use <Density (Fine Adjust)> to adjust the toner density of each color to three density levels:

high density, medium density, and low density.

● When <T

oner Save> is set to <On>, you cannot set this item.

You can save toner consumption. Select <On> when you want to check the layout or other appearance

characteristics before proceeding to nal printing of a large job.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Print Quality> <Toner

Save> Select <Off> or <On>

Specify the pr

ocessing method used to reproduce gradation. <High 2> gives ner gradation than <High 1>.

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Print

Quality> <Gradation> Select <High 1> or <High 2>

● This setting is only available when <Resolution> is set to <600 dpi>.

When ne lines or small te

xt are faded, increase the density to give less faded print.

Five Levels

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Print Quality> <Density Fine

Adjustment> Adjust the adjustment value <Apply>

● A change in the density affects objects other than te

xt or lines and the color balance.

● This setting is only available when <Resolution> is set to <1200 dpi>.

Setting Menu List

313

Specify the r

esolution to be used for print data processing.

<1200 dpi>

<600 dpi>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Print

Quality> <Resolution> Select <1200 dpi> or <600 dpi>

Specify the mode to print data with a smooth nish. If the quality of the printout is not acceptable in <Mode

1> (default), try another mode.

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Print Quality> <Special

Smoothing Mode> Select the mode

Prints an outline of dark te

xt or a gure with a smooth nish. This is the optimal mode for various types of

printing.

Prints gure outline and internal halftones with a smooth nish.

Prints dark text or lines on an area with a colored background with a smooth nish.

Prints an image such as a photo or an outline of a gure or text with a smooth nish.

Prints an image and halftones with an even balance.

Prints the entire image with a smooth nish.

● When

<Error Diffusion> is set to <On> in <Halftones>, printing in modes other than <Mode 5> all produces

the same results.

Setting Menu List

314

● When <Resolution> is set to <1200 dpi>, all settings other than <Mode 6> pr

oduce the same result.

When the toner volume for text or lines exceeds the limit value of the machine, make a correction so that the

toner volume does not exceed the limit value.

ext Priority>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Print Quality> <Toner

olume Correction>

Select the item

Adjusts the toner supply amount so that pr

oper resolution is ensured for text and lines, and that proper color

tone is ensured for other types of print data.

Adjusts the toner supply amount so that proper color tone is ensured for all types of print data.

Adjusts the toner supply amount so that proper resolution is ensured for all types of print data.

Specify the processing method used to reproduce lines.

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Print Quality> <Line

Contr

ol>

Select <Resolution Priority> or <Gradation Priority>

aws lines with the same resolution as for text.

Draws lines while maintaining color and gradation.

Congure a setting to print text or ne lines in bold.

Setting Menu List

315

<Off>

<On>

ext>

<Line>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Print Quality> <Width

Adjustment> <On> Select the target

● If you set to <On>, the printing speed may be slo

wer or image quality may be affected.

● Even if you set to <On>, bold printing may not be possible depending on the printing application.

Congure the smoothing setting to print the outline of graphics (e.g., illustrations created using applications)

or text with a smooth nish.

Select whether to perform smoothing processing. <Level 2> prints an outline with a smoother nish than

<Level 1>. First try with <Level 1>.

<Off>

<Le

vel 1>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Print Quality> <Advanced

Smoothing> <Advanced Smoothing> Select the item

<Apply to Graphics> *1

Specify whether to apply smoothing pr

ocessing to graphics when <Advanced Smoothing> is set to <Level

1> or <Level 2>.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Print Quality> <Advanced

Smoothing> <Apply to Graphics> Select <Off> or <On>

<Apply to Text> *1

Specify whether to apply smoothing pr

ocessing to the text when <Advanced Smoothing> is set to <Level

1> or <Level 2>.

<Off>

Setting Menu List

316

<On>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Print Quality> <Advanced

Smoothing> <Apply to Text> Select <Off> or <On>

● The

settings of <Apply to Graphics> and <Apply to Text> are only effective when [Advanced Smoothing] is

set to [Printer Default] in the printer driver.

Congure the smoothing setting to print the gradation (color density) of graphics (e.g., illustrations created

using applications) or bit map images with a smooth nish.

Select whether to perform smoothing processing. <Level 2> prints an outline with a smoother nish than

<Level 1>. First try with <Level 1>.

<Off>

<Le

vel 2>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Print Quality> <Gradation

Smoothing> <Gradation Smoothing> Select the item

<Apply to Graphics> *1

Specify whether to apply smoothing pr

ocessing to graphics when <Gradation Smoothing> is set to <Level

1> or <Level 2>.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Print Quality> <Gradation

Smoothing> <Apply to Graphics> Select <Off> or <On>

<Apply to Images> *1

Specify whether to apply smoothing pr

ocessing to images when <Gradation Smoothing> is set to <Level

1> or <Level 2>.

<Off>

<On>

Setting Menu List

317

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Print Quality> <Gradation

Smoothing> <Apply to Images> Select <Off> or <On>

● [Gr

adation Smoothing] in the printer driver applies only to graphics data. The setting congured here

applies to smoothing processing for image data.

When printing a color document in black and white, using this item adjusts the density of text to make it

more legible. This is useful and effective for printing in black and white a color document containing light-

colored text.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Print Quality> <Enhance

ext for B&W Printing>

Select <Off> or <On>

● This item does not apply to te

xt drawn as graphics or images.

● This item has no effect on PDF or PS print data.

● If you set this item to <Off> when printing documents that contain light-colored text, the text is printed

thinner than when <On> is selected, so it may be more or less illegible.

● Even when this item is set to <Off>, the print result may be such that text looks emphasized. If so, also set

<Advanced Smoothing> to <Off>.

<Advanced Smoothing>(P. 316)

Specify the page layout settings such as binding position and margin values.

If you ar

e binding the printouts with a binding tool such as a stapler, use this item to specify whether to bind

on the long or short edge. Specify the setting of this item in combination with <Gutter>, which species the

binding margin to apply to the binding position.

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Layout> <Binding

Location> Select <Long Edge> or <Short Edge>

Setting Menu List

318

Specify this to bind on the long edge of paper.

Specify this to bind on the short edge of paper.

Shift the print position to adjust the binding mar

gin to apply to the binding edge specied by <Binding

Location>. The value "0.00" exerts no effect on the binding margin.

-1.90 to 0.00

to +1.90 (inches) or -50.0 to 00.0 to +50.0 (mm)

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Layout> <Gutter> Specify

the binding margin

Entering the setting value

Specify the print position shift dir

ection and shift width. Whether the setting value is a "+" or "-" value

determines the binding edge along which to adjust the binding margin. The margin width can be adjusted in

0.01" (0.5 mm) increments.

Basic Operation(P. 96)

Setting Value Long Edge Short Edge

A value with a "+" sign Left edge of paper Top edge of paper

A value with a "-" sign Right edge of paper Bottom edge of paper

Setting Menu List

319

Irr

espective of the paper source, you can shift the print position in units of "0.01" (0.5 mm)" for all print jobs.

-2.00 to 0.00

to +2.00 (inches) or -50.0 to 00.0 to +50.0 (mm)

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Layout> Select the

combination of adjustment dir

ection and printing side

Specify the offset value

Shifts the print position on the side of paper facing up.

Shifts the print position on the side of paper facing down.

Entering the setting value

For <Offset Short Edge (Fr

ont)>/<Offset Short Edge (Back)>, specify a value with a "+" sign to shift the print

position in the left-to-right direction. For <Offset Long Edge (Front)>/<Offset Long Edge (Back)>, specify a

value with a "+" sign to shift the print position in the up-to-down direction. To shift in the reverse direction,

specify a value with a "-" sign.

Basic Operation(P. 96)

Printing stops if a certain error occurs in the process. However, if you set this item to <On>, the certain error will

be skipped and printing can continue. Normally

, set this item to <Off>.

<Off>

<On>

Setting Menu List

320

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Auto Error Skip> Select

Set the time period after which the current print job is automatically canceled in the case of a print data

eception interruption.

5 to 15

to 300 (sec.)

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Timeout> Set the time

period

Specify the mode in which the machine should operate when the format of document data is unknown.

<Auto>

<PS>

<PCL>

<PDF>

<XPS>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Personality> Select the

Personality mode

Select whether to print data in color or black and white.

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Color Mode> Select <Auto

(Color/B&W)> or <Black & White>

Specify the operation that is to be performed when the image quality has degraded due to insucient memory

during printing.

Setting Menu List

321

Select <Output> or <Display Error>

Continues printing r

egardless of how much the image quality has degraded.

If the image quality has degraded signicantly, an error message is displayed, and printing is stopped.

Specify whether to feed paper from the manual feed slot when the appropriate paper is not loaded in the paper

awer while Auto Select Paper is enabled.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Escape Tray Mode> Select

Specify whether to process the last page using 1-sided printing when processing a document containing an odd

number of pages using 2-sided printing.

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Speed/Print Side Priority for 2-

Sided> Select <Speed Priority> or <Print Side Priority>

ocesses the last page using 1-sided printing.

Setting Menu List

322

Also pr

ocesses the last page using 2-sided printing.

When a document containing an even number of pages is ended with 1-sided

printing

● When <Speed Priority> is selected, the last page that is blank or unprintable is pr

ocessed using 1-

sided printing even if the document consists of the even number of pages.

When you use paper that has been preprinted with a logo

● If <Speed Priority> is selected and the last page is processed using 1-sided printing, the page

orientation or print side may differ from that of other pages. In such a case, select <Print Side

Priority>.

Specify whether to feed paper from the manual feed slot when Auto Select Paper is enabled. If <On> is selected,

paper is fed fr

om the manual feed slot when paper of the same size and same type is loaded in both the manual

feed slot and paper drawer.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Prioritize Multi-Purpose

ray>

Select <Off> or <On>

● This setting is only available when <Escape Tray Mode> is set to <Off>.

Specify whether to cancel the printing when the paper size in the loaded paper is different from the one in the

printer driver.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Check Paper Size in

ray>

Select <Off> or <On>

If printing is interrupted due to an error such as a paper jam, printing ordinarily restarts from the page on

which the err

or occurred after the error has been resolved. When <Off> is selected, the page on which an error

occurred is skipped, and printing restarts from the next page.

Setting Menu List

323

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <Recovery Printing> Select

When <Off> is selected

● The page may not be printed depending on the timing at which an err

or occurred.

● If an error occurs during 2-sided printing, both of the corresponding pages may not be printed.

You can change the settings that become effective when printing from the UFR II printer driver.

ou can select the printing method used to reproduce halftones (the intermediate range between the lighter

and darker areas of an image) for optimal image quality.

This mode is suitable for printing data with text and thin lines and the curved lines of CAD data, etc.

<Off>

<On>

<Error Diffusion> Select <Off> or <On>

● This setting is only available when <Resolution> is set to <600 dpi>.

● The stability of the te

xture and xed toner may be reduced when <Error Diffusion> is used.

<Resolution/Gradation> *1

Select a method used to reproduce halftones, if <Error Diffusion> is set to <Off>. This option can be

specied for each image type in any one document.

<Text>

<Gr

aphics>

<Image>

Setting Menu List

324

<Gr

adation>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <UFR

II> <Halftones> <Resolution/Gradation> Select the type of image Select <Resolution> or

<Gr

adation>

Type of image

Select the object for which to change the setting. <T

ext> represents letters and characters, <Graphics>

represents lines and gures, and <Image> represents photos and images.

Setting value

Produces a ne print with clear edges of text. It is suitable for printing characters and ne lines.

Produces a print with smooth gradation or smooth edges. It is suitable for printing gures or graphs

containing gradation areas.

Specify the processing method used to correct the color.

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <UFR II> <Matching

Method> Select the item

Performs pr

ocessing so that the color tone is suitable for printing general papers such as photos or documents.

Performs processing so that the color tone is suitable for printing bitmap images. When this item is selected, an

image is printed in the colors closest to those displayed on the monitor.

Setting Menu List

325

Minimizes a color variance that occurs when RGB data is converted to CMYK data.

Performs pr

ocessing so that the color tone is deeper and more vivid than <General>.

Congures a setting so that black or gray data of which color information is "R = G = B" is printed using only

the K (black) toner. If <Off> is selected, data is printed using the toner of four colors: CMYK. This option can

be specied for each image type in any one document.

<Text>

<Off>

<On>

<Gr

aphics>

<Off>

<On>

<Image>

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <UFR II> <Gray

Compensation> Select the type of image Select <Off> or <On>

Specify whether to disable a blank page in print data from being output.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <UFR II> <Paper

Save> Select <Off> or <On>

<PCL>

Specify the PCL printing settings such as page layout and print quality.

Specify whether to disable a blank page in print data fr

om being output.

<Off>

<On>

Setting Menu List

326

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Paper Save> Select

Select <Portr

ait> (vertical orientation) or <Landscape> (horizontal orientation) for the page orientation.

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Orientation> Select

<Portr

ait> or <Landscape>

Specify the font to use b

y selecting a corresponding font ID number. You can print the PCL font list with font

samples from the operation panel.

PCL Font List(P. 400)

0 to 54

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Font

Number> Select the font number

Set the font size in points, adjustable in 0.25 incr

ements. You can specify this setting only when a

proportionally-spaced scalable font is selected in <Font Number>.

4.00 to 12.00

to 999.75 (point)

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Point Size> Specify

the point size

<Pitch>

Set the font pitch, or cpi (char

acters per inch), adjustable in 0.01 increments. You can specify this setting only

when a xed-pitch scalable font or a bitmap font is selected in <Font Number>.

0.44 to 10.00

to 99.99 (cpi)

Setting Menu List

327

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Pitch> Specify the

pitch value

Set the number of lines printed on one page fr

om 5 to 128. This setting is automatically changed according

to the settings specied in <Default Paper Size> and <Orientation>.

5 to 60

to 128 (lines)

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Form

Lines> Specify the number of lines

Select the char

acter code that is most suited for the computer you send print data from. The specied setting

is ignored when the character code is controlled by the font specied in <Font Number>.

<ISO4>

<ISO6>

<ISO11>

<ISO15>

<ISO17>

<ISO21>

<ISO60>

<ISO69>

<ISOL1>

<ISOL2>

<ISOL5>

<ISOL6>

<ISOL9>

<LEGAL>

<MA

TH8>

<PC775>

<PC8>

<PC850>

<PC852>

<PC858>

<PC8DN>

<PC8TK>

<PSMA

TH>

<VNUS>

<WIN30>

<WINL1>

<WINL2>

<WINL5>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Character

Code> Select the character code

Select whether to set a custom paper size. Select <On> to set the dimensions of the paper in <X dimension>

and <Y dimension>.

Setting Menu List

328

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Custom

Paper> Select <Off> or <On>

*1*2

Select the unit of measur

ement to use to set a custom paper size.

<Inch>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Unit of

Measur

Select <Millimeter> or <Inch>

Specify the horizontal dimension (short edge) of the custom paper.

3 to 8 1/2

(inches) or 77 to 216 (mm)

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <X

dimension> Specify the dimension

Specify the vertical dimension (long edge) of the custom paper.

5 to 14 (inches) or 127 to 355 (mm)

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Y

dimension> Specify the dimension

Select whether to append a carriage r

eturn (CR) when the machine receives a line feed code (LF). If <Yes> is

selected, the print position moves to the beginning of the next line when the machine receives an LF code. If

<No> is selected, the print position moves to the next line, just under the received LF code.

Setting Menu List

329

<Yes>

<No>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Append CR to

LF> Select <Yes> or <No>

Select whether to e

xpand the width of the printable area of A4 size paper in portrait orientation to that of

Letter size.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Enlarge A4 Print

Width> Select <Off> or <On>

ou can select the printing method used to reproduce halftones (the intermediate range between the lighter

and darker areas of an image) for optimal image quality.

This mode is suitable for printing data with text and thin lines and the curved lines of CAD data, etc.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Halftones> <Error

Diffusion> Select <Off> or <On>

● This setting is only available when <Resolution> is set to <600 dpi>.

● The stability of the te

xture and xed toner may be reduced when <Error Diffusion> is used.

Setting Menu List

330

<Resolution/Gradation> *1

Select a method used to r

eproduce halftones, if <Error Diffusion> is set to <Off>. This option can be

specied for each image type in any one document.

<Text>

<Gr

aphics>

<Image>

<Resolution/Gradation> Select the type of image Select <Resolution> or <Gradation>

Type of image

Select the object for which to change the setting. <T

ext> represents letters and characters, <Graphics>

represents lines and gures, and <Image> represents photos and images.

Setting value

oduces a ne print with clear edges of text. It is suitable for printing characters and ne lines.

Produces a print with smooth gradation or smooth edges. It is suitable for printing gures or graphs

containing gradation areas.

Specify the processing method used to correct the color.

Setting Menu List

331

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Matching

Method> Select the item

Performs pr

ocessing so that the color tone is suitable for printing general papers such as photos or documents.

Performs processing so that the color tone is suitable for printing bitmap images. When this item is selected, an

image is printed in the colors closest to those displayed on the monitor.

Minimizes a color variance that occurs when RGB data is converted to CMYK data.

Performs processing so that the color tone is deeper and more vivid than <General>.

Congures a setting so that black or gray data of which color information is "R = G = B" is printed using only

the K (black) toner. If <Off> is selected, data is printed using the toner of four colors: CMYK. This option can

be specied for each image type in any one document.

<Text>

<Off>

<On>

<Gr

aphics>

<Off>

<On>

<Image>

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Gray

Compensation> Select the type of image Select <Off> or <On>

<PS>

Specify the PS printing settings such as page layout and print quality.

This setting enables you to specify the amount of time befor

e a job times out. If a job has not nished within

the set time limit, the job automatically cancels.

to 3600 (sec.)

Setting Menu List

332

Specify the seconds for job timeout

This setting determines whether an err

or page is printed when an error is encountered.

<Off>

<On>

Select <Off> or <On>

Specify whether to use pr

ocessing that standardizes the thickness of ne lines.

<On>

<Off>

Select the item

<On>

Standar

dizes the thickness of ne lines.

Standardizes and slims down the thickness of ne lines. Lines may become too ne and/or indistinct.

<Off>

Does not standardize the thickness of ne lines. Depending on drawing position and the angle of the line, ne

lines may be drawn thicker or may not be uniform.

Congures a setting so that black text of which color information is "R = G = B = 0%," "C = M = Y = 100%," or "C

= M = Y = 0%/K = 100%" is printed using only the K (black) toner. When <Off> is selected, text is printed based

on the <Output Prole> setting.

<Off>

<On>

Setting Menu List

333

Select <Off> or <On>

Specify the printing method used when black te

xt overlaps a colored background or gure. This option is not

displayed when <Pure Black Text> is set to <Off>.

<Off>

<On>

Select <Off> or <On>

<Off>

Outlines black te

xt from a colored background or gure rst, then prints black text in the outlined part.

Printouts may be faded much more than <On>, or text may be outlined.

<On>

Prints all the color

ed backgrounds and gures, and overlaps black text on these backgrounds and gures using

only the black (K) toner, then prints.

<RGB Source Pr

ole>

Select the prole for RGB data according to the monitor you are using.

<sRGB>

<None>

Setting Menu List

334

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PS> <RGB Source Pr

ole>

Select the prole

<sRGB>

Sets the image quality to the industry standar

d for general Windows computer monitors. If the monitor

supports sRGB, data can be printed in the color tones closest to the displayed colors.

Adjusts the brightness of the print result to prevent the image quality of the brightest and darkest parts from

being degraded. The greater the gamma value is, the darker the printed text or image becomes.

<None>

Carries out color separation from RGB data to CMYK data without applying an RGB source prole.

Select a simulation target to print the CMYK data. The machine converts CMYK data into a device dependent

CMYK color model based on the simulation.

<JapanColor(Canon)>

.S. Web Coated v1.00(Canon)>

<None>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PS> <CMYK Simulation

ole>

Select the pr

ole

<JapanColor(Canon)>

Set a JapanColor pr

ole. Data is printed in the color tones closest to those of the Japanese printing standard.

<U.S. Web Coated v1.00(Canon)>

Set a U.S. Web Coated prole. Data is printed in the color tones closest to those of the U.S. printing standard.

Set a Euro Standard prole. Data is printed in the color tones closest to those of the European printing

standard.

<None>

Prints CMYK data by using a device-dependent CMYK color model without applying the CMYK simulation prole.

● When <None> is selected, the dark color gr

adation may become uneven depending on data.

Setting Menu List

335

<Use Grayscale Pr

ole>

Specify whether to convert gray data to CMYK data using the grayscale prole of the machine.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PS> <Use Grayscale Pr

ole>

Select <Off> or <On>

● Even

if <On> is selected, data is printed using only the K (black) toner depending on the setting of <Output

Prole> or <Pure Black Text>.

Select the appropriate prole for the print data. This option can be specied for each image type in any one

document.

<Text>

<Photo>

<Gr

aphics>

<Photo>

<Image>

<Photo>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PS> <Output Pr

ole>

Select the type of image Select the pr

ole

Setting Menu List

336

Type of image

Select the object for which to change the setting. <T

ext> represents letters and characters, <Graphics>

represents lines and gures, and <Image> represents photos and images.

Setting value

Prints data b

y adjusting it to the color tones closest to those displayed on the monitor.

<Photo>

Prints data by adjusting it to photo-like color tones.

Prints data by adjusting it to the color tones closest to those displayed on the monitor and using only the K

(black) toner to reproduce black and gray elements.

Prints data by adjusting it to photo-like color tones and using only the K (black) toner to reproduce black and

gray elements.

The setting of this item is unavailable when one of the following settings is selected.

● <RGB Sour

ce Prole> is set to <None>

● <CMYK Simulation Prole> is set to <None>

● <Use Grayscale Prole> is set to <Off>

Select the element to be prioritized when carrying out color matching in <RGB Source Prole>.

Select the item

ovides the color tone that is suitable for printing photos or bit map images.

Provides the color tone that is suitable for printing artworks, graphs, and other images used for presentation

materials.

Set this option when you want to reproduce the RGB color value in the color reproduction range of the machine

as accurately as possible.

Setting Menu List

337

● The setting of this item is unavailable when <RGB Sour

ce Prole> is set to <None>.

You can select the printing method used to reproduce halftones (the intermediate range between the lighter

and darker areas of an image) for optimal image quality.

This mode is suitable for printing data with text and thin lines and the curved lines of CAD data, etc.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PS> <Halftones> <Error

Diffusion> Select <Off> or <On>

● This setting is only available when <Resolution> is set to <600 dpi>.

● The stability of the te

xture and xed toner may be reduced when <Error Diffusion> is used.

<Resolution/Gradation> *1

Select a method used to reproduce halftones, if <Error Diffusion> is set to <Off>. This option can be

specied for each image type in any one document.

<Text>

<Gr

aphics>

<Image>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer

Settings> <PS> <Halftones> <Resolution/Gradation> Select the type of image Select

<Resolution> or <Gr

adation>

Setting Menu List

338

Type of image

Select the object for which to change the setting. <T

ext> represents letters and characters, <Graphics>

represents lines and gures, and <Image> represents photos and images.

Setting value

oduces a ne print with clear edges of text. It is suitable for printing characters and ne lines.

Produces a print with smooth gradation or smooth edges. It is suitable for printing gures or graphs

containing gradation areas.

Adjust the brightness of the entire image in increments of 5%. The lower the setting value is, the brighter the

image or text becomes. The greater the setting value is, the darker the image or text becomes.

85 to 100

to 115 (%)

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PS> <Brightness> Adjust

the brightness

Specify whether to o

verprint CMYK data, with overprint specied, as composite output.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PS> <Composite

Overprint> Select <Off> or <On>

● Overprinting using special colors is not permitted.

<Gr

ayscale Conversion>

Specify the way of printing color data in black and white.

<sRGB>

<NTSC>

Setting Menu List

339

Select the type of grayscale conversion

<sRGB>

Prints in black and white with emphasis on color differ

ences so that a smooth gradation is achieved.

<NTSC>

Prints in black and white so that the resulting image looks like a black and white television picture (of the NTSC

system).

Prints in black and white so that R, G, and B are uniformly converted to the same gray level by using only

brightness as the reference.

You can specify the password that restricts the use of the control command prepared by the PS printer.

<StartJobPasswor

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PS> <PS Password

Settings> Select <SystemParamsPassword> or <StartJobPassword> Enter the

passwor

<Apply> Enter the password (Conrm) <Apply>

● <SystemPar

amsPassword> is a password that allows changes to the system parameter, and

<StartJobPassword> is a password that allows startjob, exitserver operator to perform. For more

information, check PostScript language specications.

● If <StartJobPassword> is set but <SystemParamsPassword> is not set, password check will not be

performed while performing startjob, exitserver operator.

You can change the print settings that will apply when printing image les (

JPEG/TIFF).

You can change the printing method used to reproduce halftones (the intermediate range between the

lighter and darker areas of an image) for optimal image quality.

Setting Menu List

340

<Halftones> Select <Gradation> or <Error Diffusion>

Prints images with ne gr

adation, such as digital camera images, with a smooth nish.

This mode is suitable for printing data with text and thin lines and the curved lines of CAD data, etc.

● The stability of the texture and xed toner may be reduced when <Error Diffusion> is used.

<PDF>

You can change settings for PDF les.

Specify whether to enlarge or reduce the original according to the print range of paper. Note that size

enlargement/reduction will not affect the aspect ratio of the original.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PDF> <Enlarge/Reduce to Fit

Paper Size>

Select <Off> or <On>

Specify whether to e

xtend the print range to the paper size.

<Off>

<On>

Select <Off> or <On>

● If

you specify <On>, it may occur that edge-adjacent portions of page are not printed or that printouts

come out partially smudged depending on the original.

Setting Menu List

341

Specify whether to shrink multiple pages and print them on one page in such arr

angement that the rst

page is positioned at top left. For example, to print 4 pages onto a single sheet, select <4 on 1>.

<Off>

<2 on 1>

<4 on 1>

<6 on 1>

<8 on 1>

<9 on 1>

<16 on 1>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PDF> <N on 1> Select the

number of pages to be combined

Specify whether to print comments. If you specify <Auto>, comments in PDF les will be printed.

<Off>

<Auto>

Select <Off> or <Auto>

Specify whether to use pr

ocessing that standardizes the thickness of ne lines.

<On>

<Off>

Select the item

<On>

Standar

dizes the thickness of ne lines.

Standardizes and slims down the thickness of ne lines. Lines may become too ne and/or indistinct.

Setting Menu List

342

<Off>

Does not standar

dize the thickness of ne lines. Depending on drawing position and the angle of the line, ne

lines may be drawn thicker or may not be uniform.

Congures a setting so that black text of which color information is "R = G = B = 0%," "C = M = Y = 100%," or "C

= M = Y = 0%/K = 100%" is printed using only the K (black) toner. When <Off> is selected, text is printed based

on the <Output Prole> setting.

<Off>

<On>

Select <Off> or <On>

Specify the printing method used when black te

xt overlaps a colored background or gure. This option is not

displayed when <Pure Black Text> is set to <Off>.

<Off>

<On>

Select <Off> or <On>

<Off>

Outlines black te

xt from a colored background or gure rst, then prints black text in the outlined part.

Printouts may be faded much more than <On>, or text may be outlined.

<On>

Prints all the color

ed backgrounds and gures, and overlaps black text on these backgrounds and gures using

only the black (K) toner, then prints.

<RGB Source Pr

ole>

Select the prole for RGB data according to the monitor you are using.

Setting Menu List

343

<sRGB>

<None>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PDF> <RGB Source Pr

ole>

Select the pr

ole

<sRGB>

Sets the image quality to the industry standar

d for general Windows computer monitors. If the monitor

supports sRGB, data can be printed in the color tones closest to the displayed colors.

Adjusts the brightness of the print result to prevent the image quality of the brightest and darkest parts from

being degraded. The greater the gamma value is, the darker the printed text or image becomes.

<None>

Carries out color separation from RGB data to CMYK data without applying an RGB source prole.

Select a simulation target to print the CMYK data. The machine converts CMYK data into a device dependent

CMYK color model based on the simulation.

<JapanColor(Canon)>

.S. Web Coated v1.00(Canon)>

<None>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PDF> <CMYK Simulation

ole>

Select the pr

ole

<JapanColor(Canon)>

Set a JapanColor pr

ole. Data is printed in the color tones closest to those of the Japanese printing standard.

<U.S. Web Coated v1.00(Canon)>

Set a U.S. Web Coated prole. Data is printed in the color tones closest to those of the U.S. printing standard.

Set a Euro Standard prole. Data is printed in the color tones closest to those of the European printing

standard.

Setting Menu List

344

<None>

Prints CMYK data b

y using a device-dependent CMYK color model without applying the CMYK simulation prole.

● When <None> is selected, the dark color gradation may become uneven depending on data.

Specify whether to convert gray data to CMYK data using the grayscale prole of the machine.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PDF> <Use Grayscale

ole>

Select <Off> or <On>

● Even if <On> is selected, data is printed using only the K (black) toner depending on the setting of <Output

Prole> or <Pure Black Text>.

Select the appropriate prole for the print data. This option can be specied for each image type in any one

document.

<Text>

<Photo>

<Gr

aphics>

<Photo>

<Image>

<Photo>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PDF> <Output Pr

ole>

Select the type of image Select the pr

ole

Setting Menu List

345

Type of image

Select the object for which to change the setting. <T

ext> represents letters and characters, <Graphics>

represents lines and gures, and <Image> represents photos and images.

Prole

Prints data b

y adjusting it to the color tones closest to those displayed on the monitor.

<Photo>

Prints data by adjusting it to photo-like color tones.

Prints data by adjusting it to the color tones closest to those displayed on the monitor and using only the K

(black) toner to reproduce black and gray elements.

Prints data by adjusting it to photo-like color tones and using only the K (black) toner to reproduce black and

gray elements.

The setting of this item is unavailable when one of the following settings is selected.

● <RGB Sour

ce Prole> is set to <None>

● <CMYK Simulation Prole> is set to <None>

● <Use Grayscale Prole> is set to <Off>

Select the element to be prioritized when carrying out color matching in <RGB Source Prole>.

Select the item

ovides the color tone that is suitable for printing photos or bit map images.

Setting Menu List

346

Provides the color tone that is suitable for printing artworks, graphs, and other images used for presentation

materials.

Set this option when you want to r

eproduce the RGB color value in the color reproduction range of the machine

as accurately as possible.

● The setting of this item is unavailable when <RGB Source Prole> is set to <None>.

You can select the printing method used to reproduce halftones (the intermediate range between the lighter

and darker areas of an image) for optimal image quality.

This mode is suitable for printing data with text and thin lines and the curved lines of CAD data, etc.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PDF> <Halftones> <Error

Diffusion> Select <Off> or <On>

● This setting is only available when <Resolution> is set to <600 dpi>.

● The stability of the te

xture and xed toner may be reduced when <Error Diffusion> is used.

<Resolution/Gradation> *1

Select a method used to reproduce halftones, if <Error Diffusion> is set to <Off>. This option can be

specied for each image type in any one document.

<Text>

<Gr

aphics>

<Image>

<Gr

adation>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer

Settings> <PDF> <Halftones> <Resolution/Gradation> Select the type of image Select

<Resolution> or <Gr

adation>

Setting Menu List

347

Type of image

Select the object for which to change the setting. <T

ext> represents letters and characters, <Graphics>

represents lines and gures, and <Image> represents photos and images.

Setting value

oduces a ne print with clear edges of text. It is suitable for printing characters and ne lines.

Produces a print with smooth gradation or smooth edges. It is suitable for printing gures or graphs

containing gradation areas.

Adjust the brightness of the entire image in increments of 5%. The lower the setting value is, the brighter the

image or text becomes. The greater the setting value is, the darker the image or text becomes.

85 to 100

to 115 (%)

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PDF> <Brightness> Adjust

the brightness

Specify whether to o

verprint CMYK data, with overprint specied, as composite output.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PDF> <Composite

Overprint> Select <Off> or <On>

● Overprinting using special colors is not permitted.

<Gr

ayscale Conversion>

Specify the way of printing color data in black and white.

<sRGB>

<NTSC>

Setting Menu List

348

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <PDF> <Grayscale

Conversion> Select the type of grayscale conversion

<sRGB>

Prints in black and white with emphasis on color differ

ences so that a smooth gradation is achieved.

<NTSC>

Prints in black and white so that the resulting image looks like a black and white television picture (of the NTSC

system).

Prints in black and white so that R, G, and B are uniformly converted to the same gray level by using only

brightness as the reference.

<XPS>

You can change settings for XPS les.

Specify the pr

ocessing method used to correct the color.

Select the item

Performs pr

ocessing so that the color tone is suitable for printing general papers such as photos or documents.

Performs processing so that the color tone is suitable for printing bitmap images. When this item is selected, an

image is printed in the colors closest to those displayed on the monitor.

Minimizes a color variance that occurs when RGB data is converted to CMYK data.

Performs processing so that the color tone is deeper and more vivid than <General>.

Setting Menu List

349

ou can select the printing method used to reproduce halftones (the intermediate range between the lighter

and darker areas of an image) for optimal image quality.

This mode is suitable for printing data with text and thin lines and the curved lines of CAD data, etc.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <XPS> <Halftones> <Error

Diffusion> Select <Off> or <On>

● This setting is only available when <Resolution> is set to <600 dpi>.

● The stability of the te

xture and xed toner may be reduced when <Error Diffusion> is used.

<Resolution/Gradation> *1

Select a method used to reproduce halftones, if <Error Diffusion> is set to <Off>. This option can be

specied for each image type in any one document.

<Text>

<Gr

aphics>

<Image>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer

Settings> <XPS> <Halftones> <Resolution/Gradation> Select the type of image Select

<Resolution> or <Gr

adation>

Setting Menu List

350

Type of image

Select the object for which to change the setting. <T

ext> represents letters and characters, <Graphics>

represents lines and gures, and <Image> represents photos and images.

Setting value

oduces a ne print with clear edges of text. It is suitable for printing characters and ne lines.

Produces a print with smooth gradation or smooth edges. It is suitable for printing gures or graphs

containing gradation areas.

Congures a setting so that black or gray data of which color information is "R = G = B" is printed using only

the K (black) toner. If <Off> is selected, data is printed using the toner of four colors: CMYK. This option can

be specied for each image type in any one document.

<Text>

<Off>

<On>

<Gr

aphics>

<Off>

<On>

<Image>

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <XPS> <Gray

Compensation> Select the type of image Select <Off> or <On>

Specify the way of printing color data in black and white.

<Text>

<sRGB>

<NTSC>

<Gr

aphics>

<sRGB>

<NTSC>

<Image>

<sRGB>

Setting Menu List

351

<NTSC>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <XPS> <Grayscale

Conversion> Select the type of image Select the type of grayscale conversion

Type of image

Select the object for which to change the setting. <T

ext> represents letters and characters, <Graphics>

represents lines and gures, and <Image> represents photos and images.

Type of grayscale conversion

<sRGB>

Prints in black and white with emphasis on color differences so that a smooth gradation is achieved.

<NTSC>

Prints in black and white so that the resulting image looks like a black and white television picture (of the

NTSC system).

Prints in black and white so that R, G, and B are uniformly converted to the same gray level by using only

brightness as the reference.

Specify whether to disable a blank page in print data from being output.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <Printer Settings> <XPS> <Paper Save> Select

Select a page description language so that the machine is detected as a printer that is compatible with that language

when it is connected to a computer b

y using Plug and Play.

Select a page description language so that the machine is detected as a printer that is compatible with that

language when it is detected o

ver the network.

Setting Menu List

352

<PCL6>

<PS>

<USB>

Select a page description language so that the machine is detected as a printer that is compatible with that

language when it is connected to a computer via USB

<PCL6>

<PS>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Printer> <PDL Selection (Plug and Play)> Select <Network>

or <USB> Select a page description language Restart the machine

Detects and connects the machine as a UFR II printer.

Detects and connects the machine as a UFR II printer that is compatible with XML Paper Specication (XPS).

<PCL6>

Detects and connects the machine as a PCL6 printer.

Detects and connects the machine as a PCL6 printer.

<PS>

Detects and connects the machine as a PS printer.

Setting Menu List

353

8054-05Y

All the settings r

elated to receiving I-Faxes are listed with descriptions. Default Settings are marked with a dagger (

<Common Settings>(P. 354)

<E-Mail Settings>(P. 354)

Specify oper

ations that are to be performed when the amount remaining in the toner cartridges is running low.

When I-Faxes are received while the amount remaining in the toner cartridges is running low, they will not be

printed. Ho

wever, if this function is enabled, you can still continue printing even if the amount remaining in the

toner cartridges is running low.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Receive> <Common Settings> <Continue Print. When

Amount in Cart. Lo

<On>

● When this function is enabled, the print of I-Fax

es may be faded or blurry. Received documents will

not be stored, so you need to ask the sender to resend the document if it is illegible.

<E-Mail Settings>

Congur

e settings to print received I-Fax documents.

Prints received document on both sides of paper.

<Off>

<On>

Setting Menu List

354

Specify the paper size to be used for printing.

<LTR>

<LGL>

<Go

vernment-LTR>

<Government-LGL>

<India-LGL>

<AUS-FOOLSCAP>

<Brazil-OFICIO>

<Mexico-OFICIO>

<A4>

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Receive> <E-Mail Settings> <RX Print Size> Select the

paper size

Setting Menu List

355

8054-060

All the settings r

elated to printing stored les are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger

(

<Common Settings>(P. 356)

<Memory Media Settings>(P. 361)

<Screen When Memory Media Connected>(P. 361)

Asterisks (

)

● Settings mark

ed with an asterisk (

) may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options, or

other setting items.

Congur

e the default settings for memory media print.

You can change the settings to print les in a USB memory de

vice and the method for displaying them.

You can change the default settings associated with memory media print. The settings congured here are

used as the default settings of the memory media print function.

Changing the Default Settings for

Functions

(P. 130)

to 999

<Color>

<Paper>

<MP T

ray>

<2-Sided Printing>

<Off>

<Calendar T

ype>

<Off>

<2 on 1>

<4 on 1>

<Original T

ype>

Setting Menu List

356

5 Le

vels

7 Le

vels

<Off>

<2 on 1>

<4 on 1>

<6 on 1>

<8 on 1>

<9 on 1>

<16 on 1>

<Specied Pages>

<Enlar

ge/Reduce to Fit Paper Size>

<Off>

<On>

<Enlar

ge Print Area>

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

<Auto>

<On>

<Off>

<Other>

<Off>

<On>

<Resolution/Gr

adation>

<Text>

<Gr

aphics>

<Image>

<Gr

adation>

Setting Menu List

357

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

<On>

<RGB Source Pr

ole>

<sRGB>

<None>

<CMYK Simulation Pr

ole>

<U.S. Web Coated v1.00 (Canon)>

<None>

<Use Grayscale Pr

ole>

<Off>

<On>

<Output Pr

ole>

<Text>

<Photo>

<Photo>

<Image>

<Photo>

<Per

ceptual>

<Off>

<On>

<Gr

ayscale Conversion>

<sRGB>

<NTSC>

Setting Menu List

358

17 Levels

17 Levels

ext Priority>

<Off>

<On>

<Gr

adation>

Five Le

vels

<1200 dpi>

<600 dpi>

<Line Contr

ol>

<Off>

<On>

ext>

<Line>

<Off>

<Le

vel 1>

<Apply to Gr

aphics>

<Off>

<On>

<Apply to T

ext>

<Off>

Setting Menu List

359

<On>

<Gr

adation Smoothing>

<Off>

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

<On>

Select whether to display les in a USB memory de

vice in ascending or descending order of le name or date.

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Access Files> <Common Settings> <Access Stored Files

Settings> <File Sort Default Settings> Select the order of les that ar

e displayed

Select whether to display short or long te

xt for le names that are stored in a USB memory device.

<Menu> <Function Settings> <Access Files> <Common Settings> <Access Stored Files

Settings> <File Name Display Format> Select <Short File Name> or <Long File Name>

Shortens a le name to as fe

w as eight characters. To distinguish les that have similar names, numbers such as

1" or "

2" are added at the end of the le names.

Displays a le name up to 20 characters.

Setting Menu List

360

● The number of char

acters described above does not include the characters in le extensions, such as ".jpg."

Specify whether to enable or disable the functions of a USB memory de

vice.

Select whether to permit printing data from a USB memory device when it is attached to the machine.

Restricting the USB Print Function(P. 233)

<Off>

<On>

Specify whether the start scr

een of the memory media print is displayed when you insert a USB memory device while

the Home screen is displayed.

<Off>

<On>

Select <Off> or <On>

Setting Menu List

361

8054-061

Specify whether to enable or disable Secur

e Print (

Printing via Secure Print(P. 146) ). Default settings ar

e marked

with a dagger (

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

<On>

<Secur

e Print Deletion Time>

10 to 30

to 240 (min.)

Setting Menu List

362

8054-062

Item Description

<User Management>(P. 364) You can congur

e the settings for managing users of the machine.

<Device Management>(P. 365) You can manage information about the hardware and operations, as well as

various data r

equired when using the machine functions.

<Remote UI Settings/Update Firmware>(P. 368) You can congur

e the settings related to the Remote UI and software

available for the machine.

<Data Management>(P. 370) You can congur

e settings to utilize data such as machine settings data or

perform data initialization.

<Security Settings>(P. 372) You can congur

e the settings related to the user authentication function,

password, and encryption.

<Initialize All Data/Settings> Restores all data including logs and setting values to their default settings.

Initializing All Data/Settings(P. 263)

Setting Menu List

363

8054-063

All the settings r

elated to user management of the machine are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked

with a dagger (

<System Manager Information Settings>(P. 364)

<Department ID Management>(P. 364)

Specify the ID or PIN e

xclusively for Administrators who have access privileges to <Network> and <Management

Settings>. ID is <System Manager ID> and PIN is <System Manager PIN>. You can also register the name of an

Administrator.

Setting the System Manager ID and PIN(P. 183)

Enter a number for the System Manager ID and PIN.

Enter alphanumeric characters for the name of an Administrator.

Select whether to use the Department ID Management, a featur

e that uses IDs as user accounts to specify access

privileges and maintain information on how the machine is used.

Setting the Department ID

Management(P

. 185)

<Off>

<On>

Select <Off> or <On>

Setting Menu List

364

8054-064

All the settings r

elated to management of information for the hardware and operations, as well as about management

of data required when using the machine functions are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a

dagger (

<Device Information Settings>(P. 365)

<Select Country/Region>(P. 365)

<Display Job Log>(P. 366)

<Displ. Consmbls. Info (RUI/Toner Status)>(P. 366)

<Notify to Check Paper Settings>(P. 367)

<Canon Genuine Mode>(P. 367)

Asterisks (

)

● Settings mark

ed with "

" cannot be imported or exported.

● Settings marked with "

" may be unavailable or vary or have different defaults depending on your country

or region.

Enter alphanumeric char

acters for the name and the installation location to identify the machine.

<Menu> <Management Settings> <Device Management> <Device Information

Settings> Select <Device Name> or <Location> Enter the device name or location ( Entering

ext(P. 98) )

<Apply>

*1 *2

Specify the country or r

egion where the machine is used. The default setting may vary depending on the setting

selected at initial power-on.

<Br

azil (BR)>

<Other>

Setting Menu List

365

<Menu> <Management Settings> <Device Management> <Select Country/Region> Select

a country or r

egion

Select whether to display printing logs on the machine display

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Management Settings> <Device Management> <Display Job Log> Select <Off>

or <On> Restart the machine

<Displ. Consmbls. Info (RUI/Toner Status)>

Set whether to display a button in the Remote UI or T

oner Status for accessing the Web site for purchasing toner

cartridges. Also set whether to use Toner Status.

<Displ. Consumables Purchase Button (RUI)>

<Off>

<On>

oner Status Settings>

<Off>

<On>

<Displ. Consmbls. Purchase Btn.>

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Management Settings> <Device Management> <Displ. Consmbls. Info (RUI/Toner

Status)> Specify the settings

<Displ. Consumables Purchase Button (RUI)>

Select <Off> to pr

event a button that accesses sites for purchasing toner cartridges from being displayed in the

Remote UI.

Setting Menu List

366

If you do not want to use T

oner Status, select <Off>. To prevent a button that accesses sites for purchasing

toner cartridges from being displayed in Toner Status, select <On> and then <Off>.

Specify whether to display a message pr

ompting you to check paper settings when loading the paper drawer into the

machine.

<Off>

<On>

Select <Off> or <On> Restart the machine

The mode for when Canon genuine toner cartridges ar

e used.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Management Settings> <Device Management> <Canon Genuine Mode> Select

● When necessary

, the service representative may change the setting. If this item is not displayed, contact the

administrator of the machine.

Setting Menu List

367

8054-065

All the settings r

elated to the software available for the machine are listed with descriptions. Default settings are

marked with a dagger (

<Remote UI Settings>(P. 368)

<Update Firmware>(P. 369)

Asterisks (

)

● Settings mark

ed with an asterisk (

) cannot be imported or exported.

Congur

e settings for using the Remote UI. Using the Remote UI allows you to congure machine settings from a Web

browser.

Select whether to use the Remote UI ( Disabling Remote UI(P. 235) ). When using Remote UI, you can also

specify whether to use the TLS encrypted communication ( Conguring the Key and Certicate for

TLS(P. 205) ).

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Management Settings> <Remote UI Settings/Update Firmware> <Remote UI

Settings> <Use Remote UI> <On> Select <Off> or <On> Restart the machine

Set a PIN of up to 7 digits for access to the Remote UI. All users use a common PIN. Setting a Remote UI

PIN(P

. 191)

<Off>

<On>

Setting Menu List

368

<Menu> <Management Settings> <Remote UI Settings/Update Firmware> <Remote UI

Settings> <Remote UI Access Security Settings> <On> Enter the PIN <Apply> Enter the

PIN (Conrm) <Apply>

Select ho

w to install the rmware update according to the environment of the machine.

Updating the

Firmware(P. 259)

Setting Menu List

369

8054-066

The settings for utilizing the machine settings and for initializing data ar

e listed with descriptions. Default settings are

marked with a dagger (

<Import/Export>(P. 370)

<Enable Product Extended Survey Program>(P. 370)

<Initialize Key and Certicate>(P

. 371)

<Initialize Menu>(P. 371)

Asterisks (

)

● Settings mark

ed with an asterisk (

) cannot be imported or exported.

ou can import and export various settings of the machine by using a USB memory device. For more information

about the available USB memory devices and how to insert/remove the USB memory device, see

Using a USB

Memory Device(P. 134) .

Import

<Yes> Enter the password <Apply>

Export

Enter the password <Apply> Enter the password (Conrm) <Apply>

When import is executed

● The machine automatically r

estarts after the import process has nished.

Enable or disable the Pr

oduct Extended Survey Program (a program for the machine usage survey).

Setting Menu List

370

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Management Settings> <Data Management> <Enable Product Extended Survey

ogram>

Select <Off> or <On> Restart the machine

Select to r

estore [Key and Certicate Settings] and [CA Certicate Settings] to the factory defaults.

Initializing Key

and Certicate(P

. 262)

Select to r

estore the settings listed below to the factory defaults. You can restore all the settings listed below at once,

or you can restore individual settings separately.

Initializing Menu(P. 262)

Setting Menu List

371

8054-067

All the settings r

elated to the authentication function and encryption are listed with descriptions. Default Settings are

marked with a dagger (

<Authentication/Password Settings>(P. 372)

<Encryption Settings>(P. 372)

<Verify System at Startup>(P. 373)

ou can reinforce the security of the authentication function.

Congure the security functions for user authentication.

<Lock

out Settings>

When a user has failed user authentication, specify whether to disable the user from temporarily logging in

to the machine (lockout). When <On> is selected, specify how many consecutive times failures are permitted

before lockout is activated and also the time required before a user can log in again after lockout.

<Off>

<On>

1 to 10 (time(s))

1 to 60 (min.)

<Authentication Function Settings> <Lockout Settings> <Enable Lockout> <On> Specify

each setting item Restart the machine

● This option is not applied to login using the department ID

Congur

e a setting for disabling a weak encryption or the key and certication using a weak encryption.

<Off>

<On>

Setting Menu List

372

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Management Settings> <Security Settings> <Encryption Settings> <Prohibit Use

of W

eak Encryption>

<On> <Prohibit Key/Cert. with Weak Encryption> Select <Off> or

<On> Restart the machine

When the machine starts, verication is performed to determine that the system has not been tamper

ed. If tampering

is detected, the machine enters a state to wait for rmware update. In this case, perform a rmware update operation

from a computer.

Updating the Firmware(P. 259)

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Management Settings> <Security Settings> <Verify System at

Startup> <On> Restart the machine automatically

● If nothing is displayed e

ven after a while, system recovery may be impossible. In this case, contact your

dealer or service representative.

Setting Menu List

373

Maintenance

Maintenance .....................................................................................................................................................

375

Regular Cleaning ............................................................................................................................................... 377

Cleaning the Exterior .................................................................................................................................... 378

Cleaning the Fixing Assembly ....................................................................................................................... 379

Cleaning the Transfer Belt (ITB) .................................................................................................................... 380

Replacing the Toner Cartridge ......................................................................................................................... 381

Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables ......................................................................................... 388

Relocating the Machine .................................................................................................................................... 389

Adjusting Image Quality ................................................................................................................................... 391

Adjusting Gradation ..................................................................................................................................... 392

Correcting "Print Color Mismatch" ................................................................................................................ 394

Adjusting Print Position ................................................................................................................................ 395

Viewing the Counter Value ............................................................................................................................... 397

Printing Reports and Lists ................................................................................................................................ 398

Consumables ..................................................................................................................................................... 401

Maintenance

374

Maintenance

8054-068

This chapter describes upk

eep of the machine, including how to clean the machine and adjustment of print quality.

Maintenance and Inspections

● The minimum holding period for performance parts for r

epairs and toner cartridges is seven (7) years after

production of the machine model is discontinued.

● If a problem occurs during operation, see "Troubleshooting (FAQ)" on the online manual website. If the

problem still cannot be resolved or you think the machine needs to be checked, contact your dealer or

service representative.

Installation

● If you nd the machine's operation to be noisy in some operating modes or due to your surroundings, we

recommend setting up the machine in a separate location from your oce.

● Water droplets (condensation) may form inside the machine if the room where the machine is installed is

heated rapidly, or if the machine is moved from a cool, dry location to a warm, humid location. Using the

machine under these conditions may result in problems such as paper jams, poor print quality, or faults. Let

the machine adjust to the ambient temperature and humidity for at least two hours before use.

● Machines with storage devices such as hard disks may not operate properly when used at high altitudes

(3,000 meters above sea level or higher).

◼ Basic Cleaning

Regular Cleaning(P. 377)

◼ Replacing Consumables

Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 381) Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables(P. 388)

Maintenance

375

Consumables(P. 401)

◼ Adjusting and Managing the Machine

Relocating the Machine(P. 389) Adjusting Image Quality(P. 391)

Viewing the Counter Value(P. 397) Printing Reports and Lists(P. 398)

Maintenance

376

Regular Cleaning

8054-069

Regularly clean the machine to pr

event deterioration in printing quality and to ensure that you use it safely and easily.

Where to Clean

Exterior of the machine and ventilation slots

Cleaning the Exterior(P. 378)

Internal xing assembly and tr

ansfer belt

Cleaning the Fixing Assembly(P. 379)

Cleaning the Transfer Belt (ITB)(P. 380)

Maintenance

377

Cleaning the Exterior

8054-06A

Regularly wipe the e

xterior of the machine, especially around the ventilation slots, to keep the machine in good

condition.

Turn OFF the machine, and unplug the power cord from the AC power outlet.

● When you turn OFF the machine, data that is waiting to be printed is deleted.

Clean the exterior of the machine and the ventilation slots.

● Use a soft, well-wrung-out cloth dampened with water or a mild deter

gent diluted with water.

● To locate the ventilation slots, see

Front Side(P. 74) .

Wait for the exterior of machine to dry completely.

Reconnect the power cord and turn ON the machine.

Maintenance

378

Cleaning the Fixing Assembly

8054-06C

If the xing assembly is dirty

, the printout may get smudged. To clean the xing assembly, perform the following

procedure. Note that you cannot clean the xing assembly when the machine has documents waiting to be printed. To

clean the xing assembly, you need plain A4 or Letter size paper. Set the paper in the paper drawer or manual feed

slot before performing the following procedure.

Loading Paper(P. 102)

● Prior to performing cleaning, mak

e sure that there remains a sucient amount remaining in the toner

cartridges.

Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables(P. 388)

Select <Menu> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 91)

Select <Adjustment/Maintenance>

<Maintenance>.

Select <Clean Fixing Assembly>.

Check that the size and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the

machine.

Press .

➠ Cleaning starts. When a message appears notifying that cleaning is complete, pr

ess

to return to the

Home scr

een.

● When <Clean Fixing Assembly> is complete, a sheet of blank paper is ejected.

Maintenance

379

Cleaning the Transfer Belt (ITB)

8054-06E

Dirt may adher

e to the transfer belt inside the machine and cause the print quality to deteriorate. To clean the transfer

belt, perform the following procedure. Note that you cannot clean the transfer belt when the machine has documents

waiting to be printed.

Select <Menu> in the Home screen.

Home Screen(P. 91)

Select <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Maintenance>.

Select <Clean ITB>.

Select <Start>.

➠ Cleaning starts. When a message appears stating that cleaning is complete, pr

ess

to return to the

Home scr

een.

Maintenance

380

Replacing the Toner Cartridge

8054-06F

A warning message appears in the display when the amount r

emaining in the toner cartridge is low or when printing

is no longer possible because of toner depletion. Note that the print quality may suffer if you continue printing without

resolving this issue. You can check the amount remaining in the toner cartridges on the display (

Checking the

Remaining Amount of Consumables

(P. 388) ).

When a Message Appear(P. 381)

When Printouts are Poor in Quality(P. 383)

Procedure for Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 383)

When a Message Appear

The message that is displayed depends on the amount remaining in the toner cartridges. Depending on which

message is displayed, you will need to make sure that you have a replacement toner cartridge ready or replace the

toner cartridge.

Procedure for Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 383)

Consumables(P. 401)

● Wher

e "XXXX" appears in the descriptions below, the toner cartridge color black, yellow, magenta, or cyan

appears in the actual messages.

This message noties you that a toner cartridge needs to be r

eplaced soon. Make sure that you have a

replacement toner cartridge ready. Replace the toner cartridge if you see this message before you start to print

a large job.

When a message is displayed

● When printing, you can continue printing the original.

● If a message is displayed for the black toner cartridge while an I-Fax document is being r

eceived, the

machine does not perform printing so that unclear print is avoided. To continue printing even if the

amount remaining in toner cartridge is running low, set <Continue Print. When Amount in Cart. Low>

to <On>.

<Continue Print. When Amount in Cart. Low>(P. 354)

Specify when a message is displayed

● Y

ou can set any value as the percentage of the amount remaining in the toner cartridge that triggers

a message.

<Displ. Timing for Cartridge Prep. Notif.>(P. 269)

This message noties you that a toner cartridge needs to be r

eplaced soon. Make sure that you have a

replacement toner cartridge ready. Replace the toner cartridge if you see this message before you start to print

Maintenance

381

a large job. This appears when <Action When Warning> is set to <Stop Printing> ( <Action When

arning>(P. 270) ).

Displays the pr

ocedure for replacing a toner cartridge. Follow the on-screen instructions to replace the toner

cartridge.

You can end a printing stoppage state and continue printing.

You can check the toner cartridge name.

● If a message is displayed for the black toner cartridge while an I-Fax document is being r

eceived, the

machine does not perform printing so that unclear print is avoided. Instead, the received data is stored in

memory. To continue printing even if the amount remaining in toner cartridge is running low, set

<Continue Print. When Amount in Cart. Low> to <On>.

<Continue Print. When Amount in Cart.

w>(P. 354)

Specify when a message is displayed

● Y

ou can set any value as the percentage of the amount remaining in the toner cartridge that triggers

a message.

<Displ. Timing for Cartridge Prep. Notif.>(P. 269)

This message, which appears with the toner cartridge color(s), noties you that a toner cartridge has r

eached

the end of its lifetime. It is recommended that you replace the cartridge with a new one. You can continue

printing, but the print quality cannot be guaranteed.

Displays the pr

ocedure for replacing a toner cartridge. Follow the on-screen instructions to replace the toner

cartridge.

You can continue printing, but the machine may malfunction.

You can check the toner cartridge name.

This message noties you that the machine may not print in optimum quality

. It is recommended that you

replace this cartridge with a new one.

Maintenance

382

● When this message is displayed, you cannot continue printing. <Canon Genuine Mode>(P. 367)

When Printouts are Poor in Quality

If your printouts begin to sho

w any of the following features, one of your toner cartridges is consumed. Replace the

nearly empty toner cartridge even if no message is displayed.

Procedure for Replacing the Toner

Cartridge(P

. 383)

Streaks Appear/Printing is

Uneven

Partially faded

Uneven density

White Spots Appear

Toner smudges and splatters appear

Blank space of originals becomes grayish in printouts

Procedure for Replacing the Toner Cartridge

Do not touch the contacts ( ) inside the machine

● Doing so may r

esult in a fault.

Maintenance

383

● Be sur

e to hold the toner cartridge using the handle.

● T

o avoid scratching the surface (

) of the drum inside the machine or exposing it to light. Do not touch the

electrical contacts ( ) or the toner cartridge memory ( ).

Maintenance

384

Read the precautions in "Important Safety Instructions" provided with this product before replacing the toner

cartridges. Manuals and Their Contents(P. 426)

Open the front cover.

Pull out the cartridge tray.

Pull the target toner cartridge straight up and out of the machine.

Remove the replacement toner cartridge from the packing material.

Pull the tab of the packing material on a at place.

Pull out the toner cartridge.

Maintenance

385

Shake the toner cartridge 5 or 6 times as shown below to evenly distribute the toner

inside the cartridge.

● Do not touch the surface of the drum on the bottom of the toner cartridge.

Install the toner cartridge.

● Each toner cartridge color has its o

wn slot in the toner cartridge tray, and this tray is indicated with a

corresponding color label (

). Place the toner cartridge into the slot that corresponds to its color.

● The

bottom surface of the toner cartridge is exposed; therefore, be careful not to bump the toner

cartridge against the slot frame when inserting it into the slot.

Push the toner cartridge tray back in, and close the front cover.

● Immediately after the fr

ont cover is closed, the quick adjustment ( Quick Adjust(P. 392) ) starts.

Maintenance

386

LINKS

Consumables(P. 401)

Maintenance

387

Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables

8054-06H

Use the pr

ocedure below to check the amount remaining in the toner cartridges. It is particularly important to check

whether you need to have a new toner cartridge ready before starting a large print job.

<Device Status> <Cartridge Level> Checking the amount remaining in the toner

cartridges

● The displayed amount r

emaining in a toner cartridge can be used only as a guide and may differ from the

actual amount.

LINKS

Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 381)

Consumables(P. 401)

Maintenance

388

Relocating the Machine

8054-06J

The machine is heavy

. Make sure to follow the procedure below when moving the machine to avoid injury.

● If the machine is to be tr

ansported for relocation, removals, etc., take the following steps to prevent damage

and faults during transportation:

- Remove the toner cartridges.

- Securely pack the machine in the original packaging (box) and packing materials.

Turn OFF the machine and computer.

● When you turn OFF the machine, data that is waiting to be printed is deleted.

Disconnect the cables and cord from the machine in numerical order as in the

illustr

ation below.

● Whether the cables with "

" ar

e connected depends on your environment.

Power plug

Power cord

USB cable

LAN cable

When transporting the machine across a long distance, remove the toner cartridges.

Procedure for Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 383)

Pull out the paper drawer until it stops, and remove it while lifting the front side.

Close all the open covers, and move the machine to a new location.

● Hold the lift handles, and lift up the machine.

Maintenance

389

Carefully place the machine at the new installation site.

● For information about ho

w to install the machine after relocating it, see "Setup Guide."

Manuals and Their

Contents

(P. 426)

Maintenance

390

Adjusting Image Quality

8054-06K

If the printing r

esults are not satisfactory such as low image quality, poor reproducibility, or print color mismatch, try

the adjustments below.

◼ Auto Adjust Gradation

If the density or brightness of colors in printouts and originals are different, perform <Auto Adjust Gradation> to

improve color reproducibility.

Adjusting Gradation(P. 392)

◼ Corr

ect Print Color Mismatch

If the colors in printouts become blurry, perform <Correct Print Color Mismatch>. This problem may be caused by a

color mismatch.

Correcting "Print Color Mismatch"(P. 394)

◼ Adjust Print Position

ou can adjust the print position when the printed image is skewed or part of the image is outside the print range.

Adjusting Print Position(P. 395)

Maintenance

391

Adjusting Gradation

8054-06L

adation refers to the dark to light continuum of shades of a color. The more shades in the gradations of colors that

are printed, the more natural printouts seem. If color reproducibility becomes poor and the density and brightness of

printouts differs markedly from the originals, perform the appropriate adjustment (calibration).

● Fr

equent calibration may affect the lifetime of toner cartridges.

● When the remaining amount of toner in cartridges is low, performing calibration may result in disruption of

color balance. If this phenomenon actually occurs after calibration, it is recommended that you replace any

toner cartridges of low remaining amount.

Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables(P. 388)

● The machine performs automatic adjustment (automatic calibr

ation) in accordance with changes in the

usage condition or environmental conditions.

Quick Adjust

ou can easily adjust the gradation. This adjustment may be automatically performed after you replace a toner

cartridge.

● Quick adjustment is not available while printing is performed.

● Y

ou can also congure so that a quick adjustment is automatically performed immediately after the machine

is turned ON or when a rst print job is performed.

<Auto Correction Settings>(P. 296)

● Y

ou can set the machine to perform this adjustment automatically at a specied time every day.

<Time

Settings for Auto Adjust Gr

adation>(P. 275)

Select <Menu> in the Home screen.

Home Screen(P. 91)

Select <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality> <Auto Adjust

adation>.

Select <Quick Adjust>.

Maintenance

392

Select <Start>.

➠ The adjustment starts.

Maintenance

393

Correcting "Print Color Mismatch"

8054-06R

Print color mismatch r

efers to a shift in the positions of colors that may occur when printing one image with multiple

toner cartridges. Print color mismatch can cause printouts to appear blurry. If print color mismatch occurs, perform

the following calibration procedure.

● Fr

equent calibration may affect the lifetime of toner cartridges.

● When the remaining amount of toner in cartridges is low, performing calibration may result in disruption of

color balance. If this phenomenon actually occurs after calibration, it is recommended that you replace any

toner cartridges of low remaining amount.

Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables(P. 388)

● The machine performs automatic adjustment (automatic calibr

ation) in accordance with changes in the

usage condition or environmental conditions.

● You can set the machine to perform this adjustment automatically after the power is turned ON.

<Auto

Corr

ection Settings>(P. 296)

Select <Menu> in the Home screen.

Home Screen(P. 91)

Select <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Adjust Image Quality>.

Select <Correct Print Color Mismatch>.

Select <Start>.

➠ The adjustment starts.

Maintenance

394

Adjusting Print Position

8054-06S

If a document is printed off-center or out of the printable r

ange, adjust the print position. You can adjust the print

position for each paper source. You can adjust the print position in the range -0.20" to +0.20" (-5.0 mm to +5.0 mm) in

increments of 0.01" (0.1 mm).

Checking the Direction and Distance to Adjust

When you adjust the print position, specify the direction using "+" and "-" and the distance using "mm." For

<Adjust V

ertically (Front Side)>/<Adjust Vertically (Back Side)>, specify a value with a "+" sign to shift the print

position in the up-to-down direction. For <Adjust Horizontally (Front Side)>/<Adjust Horizontally (Back Side)>,

specify a value with a "+" sign to shift the print position in the left-to-right direction. To shift in the reverse

direction, specify a value with a "-" sign.

<Adjust Vertically (Front Side)>/<Adjust Vertically

(Back Side)>

<Adjust Horizontally (Front Side)>/<Adjust

Horizontally (Back Side)>

Select <Menu> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 91)

Select <Adjustment/Maintenance>

<Adjust Image Quality>.

Select <Adjust Print Position>.

Select the paper source.

Select the combination of adjustment direction and printing side.

Set an adjustment value.

Maintenance

395

Press

Adjusting the Print Position for All Print Jobs

● Y

ou can use <Function Settings> in the setting menu of the operation panel to adjust the print position for

all print jobs, irrespective of the paper source. The print position can be adjusted in 0.01" (0.5 mm)

increments between -2.00" (-50.0 mm) and +2.00" (+50.0 mm).

<Offset Short Edge/Offset Long

Edge>

(P. 320)

Maintenance

396

Viewing the Counter Value

8054-06U

ou can check separate totals for the number of pages used for color printouts and black and white printouts. The

number of printouts includes printouts of the memory media print and the list as well as printouts of data from

computers.

<Device Status> <Check Counter> Select the item you want to check Check the

number of pages printed

<101: Total 1>

Displays the total number of pages printed.

<108: T

otal (Black & White 1)>

Displays the total number of pages printed in black and white.

<322: Print (Full Color + Single Color/Small)>

Displays the total number of pages printed in color.

Maintenance

397

Printing Reports and Lists

8054-06W

ou can print reports and lists to check information such as the total volume of printouts for each <Department ID>

and machine settings.

Conguring the Print Settings for Reports and Lists(P

. 398)

Printing a Report on the Total Volume of Printouts by Department ID(P. 398)

Printing Lists of Settings(P. 398)

Printing Reports and Lists on the Usage Status of the Machine(P. 399)

Conguring the Print Settings for Reports and Lists

You can perform 2-sided printing of reports and lists.

<Menu> <Output Reports> <Report Settings> <Default Settings for Report Output> <2-

Sided Printing> <On>

Printing a Report on the Total Volume of Printouts by Department ID

Department ID Management Report

When Department ID Management is enabled, you can check the total volume of printouts for each

<Department ID> b

y printing a Department ID Management Report. By checking the printout totals, you can

better manage your paper and toner cartridge supplies.

<Menu> <Output Reports> <Print List> <Department ID Management Report> Check that

the size and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine <Yes>

Printing Lists of Settings

ou can print information and settings registered in the machine as a list.

User Data List/System Manager Data List

You can check the list of the settings ( Setting Menu List(P. 265) ) as well as the content that has been

egistered in the machine by printing a User Data List or a System Manager Data List. Both lists include the

rmware version and the paper size and type registered in the machine.

Maintenance

398

<Menu> <Output Reports> <Print List> Select <User Data List> or <System Manager Data

List> Check that the size and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the

machine <Yes>

● The User Data List does not include certain settings such as Network Settings and Management

Settings. T

o check all the settings items, print the System Manager Data List.

IPSec Policy List

You can check the list of policy names and the IPSec settings registered in the machine by printing an IPSec

Policy List.

<Menu> <Output Reports> <Print List> <IPSec Policy List> Check that the size and type of

paper displayed on the scr

een is loaded in the machine

<Yes>

Printing Reports and Lists on the Usage Status of the Machine

ou can print the machine status report, the usage log of toner cartridges, and the list of fonts available in PCL or PS

mode.

Eco Report

You can check the monthly total volume of printouts and the power consumption with a report. This report

includes tips that ar

e useful for saving paper and power consumption based on the usage status.

<Menu> <Output Reports> <Print List> <Eco Report> Check that the size and type of

paper displayed on the scr

een is loaded in the machine

<Yes>

● The amount of po

wer consumption may vary depending on the environment and conditions where

the machine is used.

Consumables Status Report

You can check the consumables status installed in the machine with a report.

Maintenance

399

<Menu> <Output Reports> <Print List> <Consumables Status Report> Check that the size

and type of paper displayed on the scr

een is loaded in the machine

<Yes>

PCL Font List

You can check the list of fonts available in PCL mode with a report.

<Menu> <Output Reports> <Print List> <PCL Font List> Check that the size and type of

paper displayed on the scr

een is loaded in the machine

<Yes>

PS Font List

You can check the list of fonts available in PS mode with a report.

<Menu> <Output Reports> <Print List> <PS Font List> Check that the size and type of

paper displayed on the scr

een is loaded in the machine

<Yes>

Cartridge Log Report

You can check the usage logs of toner cartridges with a report.

<Menu> <Output Reports> <Print List> <Cartridge Log Report> Check that the size and

type of paper displayed on the scr

een is loaded in the machine

<Yes>

Maintenance

400

Consumables

8054-06X

The following is a guide to the estimated replacement time for the consumables used in

this machine. Observe safety and health pr

ecautions when storing and handling

consumables. For optimum print quality, using Canon genuine Toner, Cartridge and

Parts is recommended.

● T

o handle and store consumables, observe precautions in "Important Safety Instructions" provided for this

product.

● Depending on the installation environment, printing paper size, or original type, you may need to replace

consumables before the end of the estimated lifetime.

● To maintain print quality, the machine performs automatic calibration in accordance with changes in the

environmental conditions. The machine may also perform automatic calibration when it is turned ON or

recovers from sleep mode. Calibration uses toner and may therefore result in a decrease in the lifetime of

the toner cartridges.

● The color toner cartridges are used even in black and white printing. Therefore, much use of black and white

printing may also result in decrease in the remaining number of printable pages for each color.

◼ T

oner Cartridges

Supplied T

oner Cartridges

The average yield

of the toner cartridge that comes with the machine are shown below.

● Black: 910 sheets

● Y (Yellow), M (Magenta), and C (Cyan): 680 sheets

Replacement T

oner Cartridges

For optimum print quality, using Canon genuine toner cartridges is recommended.

Canon Genuine Toner Cartridge Average yield * of toner cartridge

Canon Cartridge 067 Black 1,350 sheets

Canon Cartridge 067 Yellow

Canon Cartridge 067 Magenta

Canon Cartridge 067 Cyan

1,250 sheets

Canon Cartridge 067 H Black 3,130 sheets

Canon Cartridge 067 H Yellow

Canon Cartridge 067 H Magenta

2,350 sheets

Maintenance

401

Canon Cartridge 067 H Cyan

The aver

age yield is based on "ISO/IEC 19798" (the global standard related to "Method for the determination of toner

cartridge yield for monochromatic electrophotographic printers and multi-function devices that contain printer

components" issued by ISO [International Organization for Standardization]) when printing A4 size paper with the default

print density setting.

Store toner cartridges as described below

Storing toner cartridges in an impr

oper location or environment may cause problems such as data loss.

● Store toner cartridges in the following conditions:

- Storage temperature range: 32 °F to 95 °F (0 °C to 35 °C)

- Storage humidity range: 35 % to 85 % RH (relative humidity, condensation-free)

*Even within the approved storage humidity range, water droplets (condensation) may develop inside the toner cartridge if the temperatures

inside and outside the toner cartridge differ. Condensation will adversely affect the print quality

● Stor

e unopened until immediately prior to use.

● Do not store toner cartridges upright or upside down.

● Do not store toner cartridges in the following locations:

- Locations exposed to open ames

- Locations exposed to direct sunlight or bright light for ve minutes or more

- Locations exposed to excessively salty air

- Locations heavily exposed to corrosive gases (e.g. aerosol sprays or ammonia)

- Very hot and/or humid locations

- Locations subject to dramatic changes in temperature and humidity likely to cause condensation

- Very dusty locations

- Locations within the reach of children

● Store the packaging material safely for future use. It will be needed for situations such as storing the machine with the toner

cartridges removed.

● Canon reserves the right to reposition, reshape, add or remove packaging material without notice.

Be careful of counterfeit toner cartridges

● Please be awar

e that there are counterfeit Canon toner cartridges in the marketplace. Use of

counterfeit toner cartridge may result in poor print quality or machine performance. Canon is not

responsible for any malfunction, accident or damage caused by the use of counterfeit toner cartridge.

For more information, see global.canon/ctc.

● When r

eplacing toner cartridges, see

Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 381) .

Maintenance

402

Troubleshooting (FAQ)

Troubleshooting (FAQ) ................................................................................................................................

404

Troubleshooting (FAQ)

403

Troubleshooting (FAQ)

8054-06Y

When a pr

oblem occurs, check this chapter to nd out solutions before contacting Canon.

Troubleshooting (FAQ)

404

Appendix

Appendix .............................................................................................................................................................

406

Third Party Software ......................................................................................................................................... 407

Feature Highlights ............................................................................................................................................ 408

Going Green and Saving Money ................................................................................................................... 409

Improving Eciency ..................................................................................................................................... 410

So Much More .............................................................................................................................................. 411

Specications .................................................................................................................................................... 413

Main Unit ...................................................................................................................................................... 414

Available Paper ............................................................................................................................................. 416

Printer Functions .......................................................................................................................................... 419

Management Functions ................................................................................................................................ 422

System Environment .................................................................................................................................... 424

Network Environment .................................................................................................................................. 425

Manuals and Their Contents ............................................................................................................................. 426

Using User's Guide ............................................................................................................................................ 427

Screen Layout of User's Guide ...................................................................................................................... 428

Viewing User's Guide .................................................................................................................................... 431

Basic Windows Operations ............................................................................................................................... 433

Menu Route Map ............................................................................................................................................... 440

Notice ................................................................................................................................................................. 441

Appendix

405

Appendix

8054-070

This chapter contains technical specications of this machine, instructions on ho

w to use the User's Guide, disclaimers,

◼ Machine Specications

See the following section(s) when you want to check the specications of the main unit, network environment, print

function, and so on.

Specications(P

. 413)

◼ Referencing the Manual of This Machine

See the rst of the following sections when you want to be sure of the kinds of the manuals describing the functions of

the machine and how to operate the machine. When you want to know how to read and use the User's Guide (this

manual), see the second section.

Manuals and Their Contents(P. 426)

Using User's Guide(P. 427)

◼ Others

See the follo

wing section(s) when you want to get useful information, and check the disclaimers and copyright

information.

Third Party Software(P. 407)

Feature Highlights(P. 408)

Basic Windows Operations(P. 433)

Menu Route Map(P. 440)

Notice(P. 441)

Appendix

406

Third Party Software

8054-071

For information r

elated to third-party software, click the following icon(s).

Third-Party Software Included in This Manual

Appendix

407

Feature Highlights

8054-072

This section describes tips for le

veraging the features of the machine by category. You can make use of the features

according to your intended purposes and operating environment.

Going Green and Saving Money(P. 409)

Improving Eciency(P

. 410)

So Much More(P. 411)

Appendix

408

Going Green and Saving Money

8054-073

There are lots of ways to cut back on paper, toner, power, and expenses.

2-Sided Printing Sleep Mode

You can use the 2-sided printing function to print data from

your computer and print r

eceived I-Fax documents. Because

you'll only be using half the paper you would otherwise, you

can cut your paper costs in half. To save even more, combine

2-sided printing with N on 1 printing of multiple pages on

one sheet of paper. You can print up to 32 pages on a single

sheet, which is both economical and environmentally

friendly.

Printing from a Computer(P. 138)

<Receive>(P. 354) <E-Mail Settings> <Print on Both

Sides>

For saving energy and money, a sleep mode that

wers down a machine when nobody is using it

has become an essential feature. This machine will

enter sleep mode automatically, and can also be put

to sleep whenever you want. Press

once to put

the machine to sleep. Pr

ess it again to instantly

wake the machine back into action.

Entering Sleep Mode(P. 132)

Canon strives to be environmentally and energy conscious in all aspects of its

oper

ations. Click here to learn about the ways in which Canon is helping to protect the

environment.

Appendix

409

Improving Eciency

8054-074

Here are some simple operations that can make complicated tasks more ecient.

Print Images Right Off Your USB Memory Device Remote Management with Remote UI

Plug a USB memory device into the machine and you

can print images and documents dir

ectly, without

using a computer. You can even preview JPEG and

other images before you print, so there is no wasted

paper.

Printing from a USB Memory Device (Memory

Media Print)(P

. 149)

Remote UI lets you manage a lot from your computer, all

without having to go over to the machine. Congure

settings and keep an eye on the machine's status with an

intuitive, easy-to-understand Web browser interface that

you'll master immediately. Save your time and energy for

things other than taking care of the machine.

Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI)

. 237)

Make Print Settings Quickly with Intuitive Operation

You can easily specify the page layout as well as binding position, switching

between 1-sided and 2-sided printing, etc. intuitively on the pr

eview image in

the printer driver. The simple click-operation allows you to conveniently make

settings while viewing how settings are applied.

Printing from a Computer(P. 138)

Appendix

410

So Much More

8054-075

There are a variety of features for whatever you need to do - at home, in the oce, or e

ven on the road.

Using a smartphone/tablet Keep Your Printouts Private

At times such as when you want to quickly print out a

oposal you completed on a tablet while travelling to a

business destination, Canon PRINT Business comes in

handy. Even in environments without a wireless LAN

router, you can connect to the machine with a mobile

device wirelessly and directly.

PCless, quick, and easy! An even broader range of

possibilities for work/play with functionality made for

this age of speed.

Linking with Mobile Devices(P. 160)

Normally, when you print something from your

computer, it comes out of the printer right away

However, if you have sensitive documents, this may not

be what you want. Just use secure printing and no one

will be able to print your documents without entering

your password on the machine's operation panel. Don't

let your condential documents lie exposed on the tray

for everyone to see.

Printing a Document Secured by a PIN (Secure

Print)(P

. 145)

Go Wireless Toner Replenishment Service

Appendix

411

No cables, easy installation, simple maintenance. If you've got a

WPS wireless LAN router, bypass the settings process

altogether and be ready to go before you know it. Enjoy the

kind of clutter-free and easy to use document system that you

can only get from wireless. Compatible with IEEE 802.11b/g/n

for stress-free wireless, and also supports WEP and WPA/WPA2-

PSK (TKIP/AES-CCMP) for tighter security.

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 15)

Through the toner replenishment service, new

toner cartridges are automatically delivered to

you before your existing toner cartridge is used

up.

● Use of the toner r

eplenishment

service requires prior registration

with select retailers. This service is

only available in certain countries/

regions and for certain models.

Appendix

412

Specications

8054-076

Specications ar

e subject to change without notice for product improvement or future release.

◼ Machine Specications

Main Unit(P. 414)

Available Paper(P. 416)

◼ Functional Specications

Printer Functions(P. 419)

Management Functions(P. 422)

◼ Envir

onment To Use the Machine

System Environment(P. 424)

Network Environment(P. 425)

Appendix

413

Main Unit

8054-077

● For information on paper sizes and types for each paper sour

ce, see "

Available Paper(P. 416) ."

Type Desktop

Color Supported Full Color

Resolution for Writing 600 dpi x 600 dpi

Number of Tones 256

Acceptable Paper Stock Paper Sizes

● Max: 8 1/2" x 14" (216.0 mm x 355.6 mm)

● Min (Paper Dr

awer): 3" x 5" (76.2 mm x 127.0 mm)

● Min (Manual Feed Slot):3" x 5" (76.2 mm x 127.0 mm)

Paper Weight

● Paper Drawer: 16 lb Bond to 73 lb Cover (60 g/m² to 200 g/m²)

● Manual Feed Slot: 16 lb Bond to 73 lb Cover (60 g/m² to 200 g/m²)

Paper Type

Available Paper(P. 416)

Warm-Up Time

After Powering ON

13.0 seconds or less

Returning fr

om the Sleep mode

2.0 seconds or less

First Print Time

(Letter)

● Full Color: Approx. 10.3 seconds

● Black-and-White: Approx. 10.3 seconds

Print Speed

(Letter)

● Full Color: 22 sheets/minute

● Black-and-White: 22 sheets/minute

Paper Feeding System/Capacity

Paper Drawer

250 sheets (21 lb Bond (80 g/m²))/250 sheets (17 lb Bond (64 g/m²)) x 1

Manual Feed Slot

1 sheet

Paper Output System/Capacity

Output Tray

100 sheets (16 lb Bond to 24 lb Bond (60 g/m² to 90 g/m²))

Appendix

414

Power Source AC 110 V - 127 V, 4.2 A, 60 Hz

Power Consumption

Maximum Power Consumption

900 W or less

During Sleep Mode

● Appr

ox. 0.7 W (USB connection)

● Approx. 0.7 W (wired LAN connection)

● Approx. 0.7 W (wireless LAN connection)

With the Main Power Turned OFF

0.1 W or less

Dimensions

(W x D x H)

17" x 16 1/2" x 11 3/8" (430 mm x 418 mm x 287 mm)

Weight

Main Unit

Appr

ox. 30.9 lb (14.0 kg)

Maximum Occupancy Space

(W x D x H)

17" x 39 7/8" x 11 3/8" (430 mm x 1,011 mm x 287 mm)

Provide a space of 4" (100 mm) or more around the machine.

Memory Capacity RAM: 1 GB

Environmental Conditions Temperature: 50 °F to 86 °F (10 °C to 30 °C)

Humidity: 20 % to 80 % RH (no condensation)

May vary depending on the envir

onment and conditions under which the machine is being used.

Print speed is measured based on internal testing using Letter size paper printed with 100% print ratio to original on

one-sided paper. Internal testing involved continuously printing the same one page of content on plain paper. Print

speed may vary depending on paper type, paper size or paper feeding direction.

The device may automatically pause or slow down in order to adjust printer condition such as controlling temperature of

a certain unit or limiting impact to image quality during continuous printing.

May vary depending on the installation environment and paper to use.

The toner cartridges are not included.

Appendix

415

Available Paper

8054-078

The paper types that can be used with this machine ar

e shown in the following table.

◼ Supported Paper Sizes

: Available : Unavailable

Paper Sizes Paper Drawer Manual Feed Slot

Automatic 2-Sided Printing

*2*3

Legal (LGL)

Letter (LTR)

*2*3

Statement (STMT)

Executive (EXEC)

Ocio

Ocio (Brazil)

Ocio (Me

xico)

Letter (Government)

Legal (Government)

Foolscap/Folio

Foolscap (Australia)

Legal (India)

3x5inch

Envelope No.10 (COM10)

Appendix

416

Paper Sizes Paper Drawer Manual Feed Slot

Automatic 2-Sided Printing

Envelope Monarch

Envelope C5

Envelope DL

Custom Paper Size

*6*8

Automatic 2-sided printing is available without r

eplacing paper.

Allows you to print received I-Fax documents.

Allows you to print reports or lists.

Landscape or portrait orientation is available.

It is recommended that you print from the paper drawer to obtain optimum print quality. Printing from the manual

feed slot may produce skewed printouts.

The custom size ranging from 3" x 5" (76.2 mm x 127 mm) to 8 1/2" x 14" (216.0 mm x 355.6 mm) is available.

The custom size ranging from 7 1/8" x 10 1/8" (182 mm x 257 mm) to 8 1/2" x 14" (216.0 mm x 355.6 mm) is available.

You may not be able to print depending on the width of the paper you are using.

◼ Supported Paper Types

Chlorine-free paper can be used with this machine.

: Available : Unavailable

Paper Type Paper

Drawer

Manual feed

slot

Automatic 2-

sided printing

Plain 1

*2*3

17 lb Bond to 18 lb Bond (61 g/m² to 69 g/m²)

Plain 2

*2*3

19 lb Bond to 21 lb Bond (70 g/m² to 82 g/m²)

Plain 3

*2*3

22 lb Bond to 24 lb Bond (83 g/m² to 90 g/m²)

Plain 4 25 lb Bond to 28 lb Bond (91 g/m² to 105 g/m²)

Heavy 1 29 lb Bond to 32 lb Bond (106 g/m² to 120 g/m²)

Heavy 2 33 lb Bond to 60 lb Cover (121 g/m² to 163

g/m²)

Thin 1

16 lb Bond (60 g/m²)

Recycled 1

*2*3

17 lb Bond to 18 lb Bond (61 g/m² to 69 g/m²)

Appendix

417

Paper Type Paper

awer

Manual feed

slot

Automatic 2-

sided printing

Recycled 2

*2*3

19 lb Bond to 21 lb Bond (70 g/m² to 82 g/m²)

Color

*2*3

17 lb Bond to 18 lb Bond (61 g/m² to 69 g/m²)

Coated 1 27 lb Bond to 32 lb Bond (100 g/m² to 120 g/m²)

Coated 2 33 lb Bond to 39 lb Bond (121 g/m² to 150 g/m²)

Coated 3 56 lb Cover to 73 lb Cover (151 g/m² to 200

g/m²)

Labels

Envelope

Automatic 2-sided printing is available without r

eplacing paper.

Allows you to print received I-Fax documents.

Allows you to print reports or lists.

It is recommended that you print from the paper drawer to obtain optimum print quality. Printing from the manual

feed slot may produce skewed printouts.

Appendix

418

Printer Functions

8054-079

◼ UFR II Printer Function

Type Internal

Print Size Available Paper(P. 416)

Print Speed Same as "Print Speed" in "Main Unit"

Main Unit(P. 414)

Resolution Data Processing

1200 dpi x 1200 dpi, 600 dpi x 600 dpi

Page Description Language (PDL) UFR II

Protocol Supported TCP/IP: LPD

, Port9100, IPP, IPPS, WSD

Resident Fonts None

Interface USB

USB2.0 High-Speed

Wired LAN

10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 1000Base-T (IEEE 802.3 compliant)

Wireless LAN

IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11n

◼ PS Printer Function

Type Internal

Print Size Available Paper(P. 416)

Print Speed Same as "Print Speed" in "Main Unit"

Main Unit(P. 414)

Resolution Data Processing

1200 dpi x 1200 dpi, 600 dpi x 600 dpi

Page Description Language (PDL)

Adobe®PostScript®3

Appendix

419

Protocol Supported TCP/IP: LPD

, Port9100, IPP, IPPS, IPP, IPPS, WSD

Resident Fonts 136 Roman

Interface USB

USB2.0 High-Speed

Wired LAN

10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 1000Base-T (IEEE 802.3 compliant)

Wireless LAN

IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11n

The PS printer function is available with the LBP633Cdw.

◼ PCL Printer Function

Type Internal

Print Size Available Paper(P. 416)

Print Speed Same as "Print Speed" in "Main Unit"

Main Unit(P. 414)

Resolution Data Processing

1200 dpi x 1200 dpi, 600 dpi x 600 dpi

Page Description Language (PDL) PCL6, PCL5

Protocol Supported TCP/IP: LPD

, Port9100, IPP, IPPS, WSD

Resident Fonts PCL fonts: 45 Roman, 10 Bitmap fonts

Interface USB

USB2.0 High-Speed

Wired LAN

10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 1000Base-T (IEEE 802.3 compliant)

Wireless LAN

IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11n

The PCL printer function is available with the LBP633Cdw.

Appendix

420

◼ Memory Media Print Function

Printable File Formats

PDF, TIFF, JPEG

Appendix

421

Management Functions

8054-07A

◼ Fir

ewall Settings

● Up to 16 IP addresses (or ranges of IP addresses) can be specied for both IPv4 and IPv6.

● Up to 32 MAC addresses can be specied.

◼ IPSec

● IPSec that is supported by the machine conforms to RFC2401, RFC2402, RFC2406, and RFC4305.

Operating system

● Windo

ws 8.1

● Windows 10

Connection mode Transport mode

Key exchange protocol

IKEv1 (main mode)

Authentication method

● Pre-shared key

● Digital signature

Hash algorithm

(and key length)

● HMAC-SHA1-96

● HMAC-SHA2 (256 bits or 384 bits)

Encryption algorithm

(and key length)

● 3DES-CBC

● AES-CBC (128 bits, 192 bits, or 256 bits)

Key exchange algorithm/group (and key length)

Die-Hellman (DH)

● Group 14 (2048 bits)

● ECDH-P256 (256 bits)

● ECDH-P384 (384 bits)

ESP

Hash algorithm HMAC-SHA1-96

Encryption algorithm (and key length)

● 3DES-CBC

● AES-CBC (128 bits, 192 bits, or 256 bits)

Hash algorithm/encryption algorithm (and key

length)

AES-GCM (128 bits, 192 bits, or 256 bits)

AH Hash algorithm HMAC-SHA1-96

● IPSec supports communication to a unicast addr

ess (or a single device).

◼ Registr

ation of Keys and Certicates

● If you install a key or CA certicate from a computer, make sure that they meet the following requirements:

Appendix

422

Format

● Ke

y: PKCS#12

● CA certicate: X.509 DER/PEM

File extension

● Key: ".p12" or ".pfx"

● CA certicate: ".cer" or ".pem"

Public key algorithm

(and key length)

● RSA (512 bits, 1024 bits, 2048 bits, 4096 bits)

● DSA (1024 bits, 2048 bits, 3072 bits)

● ECDSA (P256, P384, P521)

Certicate signatur

e algorithm

● RSA: SHA-1, SHA-256, SHA-384

, SHA-512

, MD2, MD5

● DSA: SHA-1

● ECDSA: SHA-1, SHA-256, SHA-384, SHA-512

Certicate thumbprint algorithm SHA1

Requir

ements for the certicate contained in a key are pursuant to CA certicates.

SHA384-RSA and SHA512-RSA are available only when the RSA key length is 1024 bits or more.

● The machine does not support use of a certicate r

evocation list (CRL).

◼ Denition of "

Weak Encryption"

When <Prohibit Use of Weak Encryption> is set to <On>, the use of the following algorithms is prohibited.

Hash MD4, MD5, SHA-1

HMAC HMAC-MD5

Common key cryptosystem RC2, RC4, DES

Public key cryptosystem

RSA encryption (512 bits/1024 bits), RSA signature (512 bits/1024 bits), DSA (512 bits/1024

bits), DH (512 bits/1024 bits)

● Even when <Pr

ohibit Key/Cert. with Weak Encryption> is set to <On>, the hash algorithm SHA-1, which is

used for signing a root certicate, can be used.

Appendix

423

System Environment

8054-07C

System Requirements for the Remote UI

Windows

● Internet Explor

er 11

● Microsoft Edge

● Google Chrome

macOS

● Safari 11 or later

● Google Chrome

I-Fax Receiving Server Software

● Microsoft Exchange Server 2010

● Microsoft Exchange Server 2013

● Microsoft Exchange Server 2016

● Microsoft Exchange Server 2019

● Lotus Domino R7.0

● Qpopper 4.0.19

System Requirements for the User's Guide Windows

● Internet Explorer 9 and later

● Microsoft Edge

● Firefox

● Firefox ESR

● Chrome

macOS

● Safari

● Firefox

● Chrome

Linux

● Firefox

iOS

● Safari

Android

● Chrome

Befor

e changing the settings of the machine, set your Web browser to enable all cookies and use JavaScript.

Only when browsing the manual on the Internet.

Appendix

424

Network Environment

8054-07E

◼ Common Specications

Protocol Supported TCP/IP

● Fr

ame type: Ethernet II

● Print applications: LPD, Raw, IPP, IPPS, WSD, Mopria, AirPrint, Windows10 Mobile Print

◼ Wir

ed LAN Specications

Interface 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, 1000BASE-T (RJ-45)

◼ Wir

eless LAN Specications

Standard IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11n

Transmission Scheme IEEE 802.11b (Modulation system: DS-SS)

IEEE 802.11g (Modulation system: OFDM method)

IEEE 802.11n (Modulation system: OFDM method)

Communication Mode

● Infr

astructure Mode

● Access Point Mode

Security (encryption method) Infrastructure Mode

● 128 (104)/64 (40) bit WEP

● WPA-PSK (TKIP/AES-CCMP)

● WPA2-PSK (TKIP/AES-CCMP)

Access Point Mode

WPA2-PSK (AES-CCMP)

Connection Method WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup), Manual setup

Appendix

425

Manuals and Their Contents

8054-07F

The manuals listed belo

w are included with the machine. Refer to them as necessary.

Important Safety Instructions The content described in this manual is for the prevention of damage to

operty and injury to users of the machine and others.

Setup Guide This manual outlines the initial settings on the machine required when the

machine is turned on for the rst time; and describes ho

w to install the

software and driver.

User's Guide (This Manual) This manual describes all the functions of the machine. You can browse

information b

y category or enter a keyword to search for pages on a specic

topic.

Using User's Guide(P. 427)

For the manuals with , please click her

e .

Appendix

426

Using User's Guide

8054-07H

The User

's Guide is a manual that can be viewed on your computer or mobile device and it describes all of the

functions of the machine. You can search from your intended use or enter a keyword to quickly nd the page you are

looking for. The section describes the screen layout of the User's Guide and how to read the Guide. You can specify

how the appearance of the User's Guide looks.

◼ Screen Layout of User's Guide

This section describes the screens conguring the User's Guide and how to use the on-screen buttons.

Screen

Layout of User

's Guide(P. 428)

◼ Viewing User's Guide

This section describes the meaning of the marks used in the User's Guide, how the keys on the operation panel and

the buttons on the computer display are represented, and other matters that help you understand the information

contained in the User's Guide.

Viewing User's Guide(P. 431)

◼ Specifying Ho

w the Appearance of the User's Guide Looks

You can change the character size used in the User's Guide, and switch the screen layout to t to the device you use to

view the User's Guide.

How to Find the Topic You Are Looking for

Search the contents

● Y

ou can nd the page you are looking for by selecting the topic from the "Contents" on the left side of the

screen.

Search by keyword

● Perform a search by entering a keyword, such as "envelope" or "toner cartridge," and the pages containing

the keyword are displayed. You can nd the page you are looking for from those results. You can also enter

phrases such as "connecting to a network." The keyword search also supports the AND Boolean to search for

multiple keywords. For the organization of the search screen and how to operate the search screen, see

Search(P. 429) .

Appendix

427

Screen Layout of User's Guide

8054-07J

The User

's Guide is divided into different screens, and the content of each screen varies.

Top Page

Appears when User's Guide is started.

Click to also display all of the sections under the chapters. Click to return to the previous display.

Click to toggle the display between the contents and search. When the table of contents is displayed, each

click on switches between hiding and showing the display. When the search display is shown, each

click on switches between hiding and showing the display.

Click to set parameters to determine how the User's Guide is displayed, such as character size or layout.

Click to display information on how to view the User's Guide, how to perform a search, and other

information.

Click to display the previous or following topic.

[Notice]

Click to vie

w important information you should know when using the machine.

Appendix

428

Topic Page

Contains information about how to congur

e and use the machine.

Navigation

See what chapter topic you are currently viewing.

Click to jump to the corresponding page. To return to the previous page, click "Back" on your Web

owser.

Click to display the hidden detailed descriptions. Click to close the detailed descriptions.

Click to return to the page top.

Sear

Click to display the search window. Contains a text box to perform a search by keyword and nd the page

you ar

e looking for.

Appendix

429

[Enter keyword(s) here]

Enter a keyword or keywords and click to display the search results. You can search for pages

containing all the k

eywords by separating the keywords by a space (blank). Also you can only search for

pages containing an exact phrase by enclosing the keywords in double quotation marks.

Sear

ch result

Displays the search results of the pages that contain the specied keywords. From the results, locate the

page you are looking for and click the topic title of the page.

● The specied k

eyword(s) are shown in bold in the search results.

Appendix

430

Viewing User's Guide

8054-07K

This section describes the marks, buttons, scr

eens, and other items used in the User's Guide. The warnings and

cautions are also given in the "Important Safety Instructions" included with the machine. See also these instructions.

Marks

Cautions regarding safety, restrictions and cautions regarding the handling of the machine, useful tips, and

other information ar

e indicated using the marks below.

Indicates a warning concerning operations that may lead to death or injury to

persons if not performed corr

ectly. To use the machine safely, always pay

attention to these warnings.

Indicates a caution concerning operations that may lead to injury to persons if

not performed corr

ectly. To use the machine safely, always pay attention to

these cautions.

Indicates an operation that must not be performed. Read these items

car

efully, and make sure not to perform the described operations.

Indicates operational requirements and restrictions. Be sure to read these

items car

efully to operate the machine correctly, and avoid damage to the

machine or property.

Indicates a clarication of an oper

ation, or contains additional explanations

for a procedure.

Indicates useful functions or tips for using the machine.

Keys and Buttons Used in this Manual

Keys on the operation panel and buttons on the computer display appear in the following notation:

Type Example

Keys on the operation panel

Settings displayed on the operation panel

Buttons and other text interfaces displayed on the computer display [Preferences]

/ /

, , and on the operation panel are used to select the target item in settings, but their description is

omitted in the User

's Guide. The operation for selecting <XXXXX> using

or and pressing is

epresented as shown below in the User's Guide.

Select <XXXXX>.

Appendix

431

Computer Screens Used in This Manual

Unless otherwise noted, displays used in the User's Guide are those for the LBP633Cdw. Depending on the

model or oper

ating system you are using, the appearance of the displays used in this manual may slightly differ

from the actual displays. Also, the appearance of drivers and software may differ depending on their version.

Illustrations Used in This Manual

Unless otherwise noted, illustrations used in the User's Guide are those for the LBP633Cdw. When differences

e signicant, multiple illustrations are used with the model names, such as "LBPXXX / LBPXXX." The

illustrations of the toner cartridge are those for the Canon Cartridge 067.

Appendix

432

Basic Windows Operations

8054-07R

Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 433)

Enabling [Network discovery](P. 433)

Displaying Shared Printers in the Print Server(P. 434)

Printing a Test Page in Windows(P. 435)

Checking the Bit Architecture(P. 435)

Checking the Printer Port(P. 436)

Checking Bidirectional Communication(P. 437)

Checking the SSID to Which Your Computer is Connected(P. 438)

When Printing from the Windows Store App(P. 439)

● Depending on the computer that you use, the oper

ation may differ.

◼ Displaying the Printer Folder

Windo

ws Vista

[Start]

select [Control Panel] [Printer].

Windo

ws 7/Server 2008 R2

[Start]

select [Devices and Printers].

Windo

ws 8/Server 2012

Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen

select [Control Panel] [View devices and printers].

Windo

ws 8.1/Server 2012 R2

Right-click [Start]

select [Control Panel] [View devices and printers].

Windo

ws 10

[

] select [Windows System] [Control Panel] [Hardware and Sound] [Devices and Printers].

Windo

ws Server 2008

[Start]

select [Control Panel] double-click [Printers].

Windo

ws Server 2016

Right-click [

] select [Control Panel] [Hardware] [Devices and Printers].

◼ Enabling [Network disco

very]

Enable [Network discovery] to view the computers on your network.

Windows Vista

[Start]

select [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks] select [Turn on network discovery] under

[Network disco

very].

Windows 7/Server 2008 R2

[Start]

select [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks] [Change advanced sharing settings]

select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery].

Windo

ws 8/Server 2012

Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen

select [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks]

[Change advanced sharing settings] select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery].

Windo

ws 8.1/Server 2012 R2

Appendix

433

Right-click [Start] select [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks] [Change advanced sharing

settings] select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery].

Windo

ws 10

[

] select [Windows System] [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks] [Change advanced

sharing settings] select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery].

Windo

ws Server 2008

[Start]

select [Control Panel] double-click [Network and Sharing Center] select [Turn on network

disco

very] under [Network discovery].

Windows Server 2016

Right-click [

] select [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks] [Change advanced sharing

settings] select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery].

◼ Displaying Shared Printers in the Print Server

Open Windows Explorer.

Windows Vista/7/Server 2008

[Start]

select [All Programs] or [Programs] [Accessories] [Windows Explorer].

Windo

ws 8/Server 2012

Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen

select [File Explorer].

Windo

ws 8.1/Server 2012 R2

Right-click [Start]

select [File Explorer].

Windo

ws 10/Server 2016

Right-click [

] select [File Explorer].

Select the printer server in [Network] or [My Network Places].

● T

o view computers on the network, you may need to turn on network discovery or search the network for

computers.

➠ Shar

ed printers are displayed.

Appendix

434

◼ Printing a T

est Page in Windows

You can check whether the printer driver is operational by printing a test page in Windows.

Load Letter size paper in the paper drawer.

Loading Paper in the Paper

awer(P. 104)

Open the printer folder.

Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 433)

Right-click the printer driver icon for this machine, and click [Printer properties] or

[Pr

operties].

Click [Print Test Page] in [General] tab.

➠ The test page is printed.

◼ Checking the Bit Ar

chitecture

If you are not sure whether your computer is running 32-bit or 64-bit Windows follow the procedure below.

Appendix

435

Display [Control Panel].

Windows Vista/7/Server 2008

[Start]

select [Control Panel].

Windo

ws 8/Server 2012

Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen

select [Control Panel].

Windo

ws 8.1/Server 2012 R2

Right-click [Start]

select [Control Panel].

Windo

ws 10/Server 2016

Proceed to step 2.

Display [System].

Windows Vista/7/8/Server 2008 R2/Server 2012

Click [System and Maintenance] or [System and Security]

[System].

Windo

ws 10/Server 2016

Click [

] [Settings] [System] select [About].

Windo

ws Server 2008

Double-click [System].

Check the bit architecture.

For 32-bit versions

[32-bit Oper

ating System] is displayed.

For 64-bit versions

[64-bit Operating System] is displayed.

◼ Checking the Printer Port

Open the printer folder. Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 433)

Appendix

436

Right-click the printer driver icon for this machine, and click [Printer properties] or

[Pr

operties].

In the [Ports] tab, check that the port is selected correctly.

If you are using a network connection and have changed the machine's IP address

● Y

ou need to add a new port.

Conguring Printer Ports(P. 40)

◼ Checking Bidir

ectional Communication

Open the printer folder.

Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 433)

Right-click the printer driver icon for this machine, and click [Printer properties] or

[Properties].

Appendix

437

In the [Ports] tab, make sure that the [Enable bidirectional support] check box is

selected.

◼ Checking the SSID to Which Y

our Computer is Connected

If your computer is connected to a wireless LAN network, click

, , , or in the system tray to display the

SSID of the connected wir

eless LAN router.

Appendix

438

◼ When Printing fr

om the Windows Store App

Windows 8/Server 2012

Display the charms on the right side of the screen

Tap or click [Devices] The driver that you use [Print].

Windo

ws 8.1/Server 2012 R2

Display the charms on the right side of the screen

Tap or click [Devices] [Print] The driver that you

use [Print].

Windo

ws 10

Tap or click [Print] on the application

The driver that you use [Print].

● If you print using this method, only a limited number of print settings ar

e available.

● If the message [The printer requires your attention. Go to the desktop to take care of it.] is displayed, go to

the desktop and follow the instructions in the displayed dialog box. This message appears when the

machine is set to display the user name during printing and similar instances.

Appendix

439

Menu Route Map

8054-07S

For the settings on the machine

's display, see Menu Route Map (PDF manual).

Appendix

440

Notice

8054-07U

◼ International ENERGY ST

program (for USA and Canada only)

The international ENERGY STAR Program is an international program that promotes energy

savings in computers and other oce equipment. The pr

ogram backs the development and

dissemination of products with functions that effectively reduce energy consumption. It is

an open system in which businesses can participate voluntarily.

◼ IPv6 Ready Logo

The protocol stack included in this product has obtained the IPv6 Ready Logo Phase-2

established b

y the IPv6 Forum.

◼ T

rademarks

Adobe and Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other

countries.

Apple, Bonjour, iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, Safari, Mac, macOS and OS X are trademarks of Apple Inc.

iOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and is used under license.

Mopria

, the Mopria

Logo and the Mopria

Alliance logo are registered trademarks and service marks of Mopria

Alliance, Inc. in the United States and other countries. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited.

Google Chrome and Android are trademarks of Google LCC.

This product contains the Universal Font Scaling Technology or UFST

under license from Monotype Imaging, Inc.

UFST

is a trademark of Monotype Imaging, Inc. registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Oce and may

be registered in certain jurisdictions.

Appendix

441

Protected by U.S. Patents 6,185,684; 6,205,549; 7,213,269; 7,272,628; 7,278,168; Patents pending in the U.S. and other

countries.

All instances of the name PostScript in the te

xt are references to the PostScript language as dened by Adobe Systems

Incorporated unless otherwise stated. The name PostScript also is used as a product trademark for Adobe Systems’

implementation of the PostScript language interpreter.

Except as otherwise stated, any reference to a "PostScript printing device," "PostScript display device," or similar item

refers to a printing device, display device or item (respectively) that contains PostScript technology created or licensed

by Adobe Systems Incorporated and not to devices or items that purport to be merely compatible with the PostScript

language.

Adobe, the Adobe logo, PostScript, the PostScript Logo, and PostScript 3 are either registered trademarks or

trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.

All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

All brand names and product names appearing on this document are registered trademarks or trademarks of their

respective owners.

All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

◼ Disclaimers

● The information in this document is subject to change without notice.

● CANON INC. MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,

EXCEPT AS PROVIDED HEREIN, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, THEREOF, WARRANTIES AS TO MARKETABILITY,

MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF USE, OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. CANON INC. SHALL

NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE, OR LOSSES OR

EXPENSES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS MATERIAL.

● If you are unable to view the manual in PDF format, download Adobe Acrobat Reader from the Adobe Systems

website (https://get.adobe.com/reader/).

◼ Copyright

Unauthorized reproduction of the contents of this document in whole or in part is prohibited.

◼ When disposing of used toner cartridges

● To protect the environment and make more effective use of resources, Canon promotes the recovery and recycling

of used toner cartridges. Please cooperate in the recovery of toner cartridges (resource reuse). For details on

resource reuse, see the Canon website:

global.canon/ctc

When disposing of toner cartridges, pack them in their original packaging to prevent toner dispersal and dispose of

the cartridges in accordance with your local government instructions.

◼ TERMS OF imageWARE REMOTE SERVICE

If your Canon imageCLASS product is enabled with embedded functions for the imageWARE Remote Diagnostic

Service (“iWR”), or your product is not iWR enabled but it interacts with the iWR Remote Diagnostic System (“RDS”)

Plug-In program of imageWARE Enterprise Management Console (“EMC”) software, then Canon USA, Canon Canada or

their respective authorized independent Canon retail dealers can access Product meter readings and receive

notications of certain automated meter information, device error monitoring and supply replenishment notices

automatically via the internet. You can read more about iWR in Canon published materials available from your dealer

or on the web sites of Canon USA (www.usa.canon.com) or Canon Canada (www.canon.ca). iWR will only collect and

transmit Product specic meter readings and service data, and will not access, collect or transmit your image content

data in the Product.

Appendix

442

Your instruction to Canon USA, Canon Canada or your dealer to activate iWR (embedded or Plug-In) for a Product shall

be consider

ed (i) a representation that you have an internal IP network and internet access available on a generally

continuous basis; (ii) authorization by you to establish, and perform during the period of iWR activation, HTTPS

communications using your network bandwidth for transmissions over the internet of use and service data

accumulated by the Product and send iWR notice emails to Canon USA, Canon Canada or your dealer, and (iii)

authorization by you to store, analyze and use this data for purposes related to servicing the Product and for Product

and iWR improvement.

By so instructing Canon USA, Canon Canada or your dealer, you shall also be considered to acknowledge that (A) the

iWR software (embedded or Plug-In) is the condential property of Canon USA and its licensor; (B) you have no rights

in such iWR software (except as the Product executes the limited data collection and transmission functions for which

it is congured when delivered and you obtain the benets of iWR as outlined in Canon published materials), (C) you

shall not disassemble, decompile, reverse engineer, disclose or attempt to copy such iWR software, allow any third

party to do any of the foregoing or transfer your limited rights to any other party without the prior written approval of

Canon USA or Canon Canada; and (D) there are many factors outside the control of Canon USA, Canon Canada or their

respective dealers that could affect the accuracy or timing of meter readings or service data harvested by iWR and,

except as expressly provided in the limited warranty statement for the Product or End-User License Agreement for

EMC software, in the case of the iWR RDS Plug-In program, neither Canon USA, Canon Canada nor their respective

dealers shall be responsible for alleged deciencies in, or your dissatisfaction with, iWR or any software used to

provide iWR.

If your dealer ceases to be an authorized Canon USA dealer, it will no longer have access to the use and service data

accumulated by iWR for your Product. In that case, you may request or instruct to Canon USA to recommend to you an

alternative service provider who will have access to this data in order to maintain Product service utilizing iWR

functionality.

V_210303

Appendix

443

This Font Software is licensed under the SIL Open Font License,

ersion 1.1.

This license is copied below, and is also available with a FAQ at:

http://scripts.sil.org/OFL

-----------------------------------------------------------

SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE Version 1.1 - 26 February 2007

-----------------------------------------------------------

PREAMBLE

The goals of the Open Font License (OFL) are to stimulate worldwide

development of collaborative font projects, to support the font

creation efforts of academic and linguistic communities, and to

provide a free and open framework in which fonts may be shared and

improved in partnership with others.

The OFL allows the licensed fonts to be used, studied, modied and

redistributed freely as long as they are not sold by themselves. The

fonts, including any derivative works, can be bundled, embedded,

redistributed and/or sold with any software provided that any reserved

names are not used by derivative works. The fonts and derivatives,

however, cannot be released under any other type of license. The

requirement for fonts to remain under this license does not apply to

any document created using the fonts or their derivatives.

DEFINITIONS

"Font Software" refers to the set of les released by the Copyright

Holder(s) under this license and clearly marked as such. This may

include source les, build scripts and documentation.

"Reserved Font Name" refers to any names specied as such after the

"Original Version" refers to the collection of Font Software

components as distributed by the Copyright Holder(s).

"Modied Version" refers to any derivative made by adding to,

deleting, or substituting -- in part or in whole -- any of the

components of the Original Version, by changing formats or by porting

the Font Software to a new environment.

"Author" refers to any designer, engineer, programmer, technical

writer or other person who contributed to the Font Software.

PERMISSION & CONDITIONS

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining

a copy of the Font Software, to use, study, copy, merge, embed,

modify, redistribute, and sell modied and unmodied copies of the

Font Software, subject to the following conditions:

SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE

444

1) Neither the Font Software nor any of its individual components, in

Original or Modied V

ersions, may be sold by itself.

2) Original or Modied Versions of the Font Software may be bundled,

redistributed and/or sold with any software, provided that each copy

contains the above copyright notice and this license. These can be

included either as stand-alone text les, human-readable headers or

in the appropriate machine-readable metadata elds within text or

binary les as long as those elds can be easily viewed by the user.

3) No Modied Version of the Font Software may use the Reserved Font

Name(s) unless explicit written permission is granted by the

corresponding Copyright Holder. This restriction only applies to the

primary font name as presented to the users.

4) The name(s) of the Copyright Holder(s) or the Author(s) of the Font

Software shall not be used to promote, endorse or advertise any

Modied Version, except to acknowledge the contribution(s) of the

permission.

5) The Font Software, modied or unmodied, in part or in whole,

must be distributed entirely under this license, and must not be

distributed under any other license. The requirement for fonts to

remain under this license does not apply to any document created using

the Font Software.

TERMINATION

This license becomes null and void if any of the above conditions are

not met.

DISCLAIMER

THE FONT SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,

EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT

OF COPYRIGHT, PATENT, TRADEMARK, OR OTHER RIGHT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE

INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL

DAMAGES, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING

FROM, OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE FONT SOFTWARE OR FROM

OTHER DEALINGS IN THE FONT SOFTWARE.

SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE

445

Third-Party Services

If you use third-party services through the PRODUCT, use of the services are subjected the conditions

below.

When you access and/or obtain some third party content (such as text, images, videos, audios, or

software) through the SOFTWARE, except as expressly permitted by the content owner or by

applicable law, you may not (a) scrape, build databases or otherwise create permanent copies of such

content, or keep cached copies longer than permitted by the cache header; (b) copy, translate, modify,

create a derivative work of, sell, lease, lend, convey, distribute, publicly display or sublicense to any

third party; (c) misrepresent the source or ownership; and (d) remove, obscure, or alter any copyright,

trademark or other proprietary rights notices, falsify or delete any author attributions, legal notices or

other labels of the origin or source of material.

The Software Subjected to Other License Conditions

Please refer to Contents of Software and respective License terms below, for more detail and

corresponding license conditions.

Contents of Software

Names of Software page

1. Adobe PostScript 3 ...................................................................................................................... 3

2. expat ........................................................................................................................................ 11

3. libjingle .................................................................................................................................... 12

4. Net-SNMP ................................................................................................................................. 13

1. Adobe PostScript 3

Portions include software under the following terms:

______________________________________________________________________________________

This product contains either BSAFE and/or TIPEM software by RSA Security Inc.

______________________________________________________________________________________

The Apache Software License, Version 1.1

This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation

(http://www.apache.org/).

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted

provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and

the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions

and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the

distribution.

3. The end-user documentation included with the redistribution, if any, must include the following

acknowledgment:

"This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation

(http://www.apache.org/)."

Alternately, this acknowledgment may appear in the software itself, if and wherever such third-party

acknowledgments normally appear.

4. The names "Xerces" and "Apache Software Foundation" must not be used to endorse or promote

products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please

contact [email protected].

5. Products derived from this software may not be called "Apache", nor may "Apache" appear in their

name, without prior written permission of the Apache Software Foundation.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,

BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE APACHE SOFTWARE FOUNDATION

OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE

GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER

CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT

(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,

EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

This software consists of voluntary contributions made by many individuals on behalf of the Apache

Machines, Inc., http://www.ibm.com. For more information on the Apache Software Foundation,

please see <http://www.apache.org/>.

______________________________________________________________________________________

This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its

contributors.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted

provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and

the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions

and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the

distribution.

3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following

acknowledgement:

This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its

contributors.

4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or

promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR

IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL

THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,

EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF

SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)

HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,

OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS

SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

______________________________________________________________________________________

This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by James A. Woods, derived from original

work by Spencer Thomas and Joseph Orost.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that the above copyright

notice and this paragraph are duplicated in all such forms and that any documentation, advertising

materials, and other materials related to such distribution and use acknowledge that the software was

developed by the University of California, Berkeley. The name of the University may not be used to

endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,

INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS

FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and

associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including

without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell

copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to

the following conditions:

The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial

portions of the Software.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS ORIMPLIED,

INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THEX CONSORTIUM BE LIABLE

FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER INAN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR

OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR INCONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER

DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

Except as contained in this notice, the name of the X Consortium shall not be used in advertising or

otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written

authorization from the X Consortium.

______________________________________________________________________________________

NOTICE REGARDING SABLOTRON

March 27, 2003

Portions of this product are based on Modifications created from the Original Code known as the

"Sablotron XSLT Processor". The Sablotron XSLT Processor is subject to the Mozilla Public License

Version 1.1 (the "License"). You may obtain a copy of

the License at http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/

Software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF

ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing rights and

limitations under the License.

The Original Code is the Sablotron XSLT Processor.

The Initial Developer of the Original Code is Ginger Alliance Ltd. Portions created by Ginger Alliance

Pursuant to sections 3.2 and 3.6 of the License, the Modifications created by Adobe Systems

Incorporated are available as Source Code. The Modifications may be downloaded via the Internet

from:

http://partners.adobe.com/asn/tech/xml/sablotron/index.jsp

The Original Code may be downloaded via the Internet from:

https://sourceforge.net/projects/sablotron/

______________________________________________________________________________________

This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its

contributors.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted

provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and

the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions

and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the

distribution.

3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following

acknowledgement: This product includes software developed by the University of California,

Berkeley and its contributors.